JP2015134275A - Game machine - Google Patents

Game machine Download PDF

Info

Publication number
JP2015134275A
JP2015134275A JP2015093976A JP2015093976A JP2015134275A JP 2015134275 A JP2015134275 A JP 2015134275A JP 2015093976 A JP2015093976 A JP 2015093976A JP 2015093976 A JP2015093976 A JP 2015093976A JP 2015134275 A JP2015134275 A JP 2015134275A
Authority
JP
Japan
Prior art keywords
unit
side
operation unit
ball
game
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Granted
Application number
JP2015093976A
Other languages
Japanese (ja)
Other versions
JP5963909B2 (en
Inventor
市原 高明
Takaaki Ichihara
高明 市原
石田 浩一
Koichi Ishida
浩一 石田
啓太 温井
Keita Nukui
啓太 温井
Original Assignee
株式会社大一商会
Daiichi Shokai Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 株式会社大一商会, Daiichi Shokai Co Ltd filed Critical 株式会社大一商会
Priority to JP2015093976A priority Critical patent/JP5963909B2/en
Publication of JP2015134275A publication Critical patent/JP2015134275A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of JP5963909B2 publication Critical patent/JP5963909B2/en
Application status is Active legal-status Critical
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in a game.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine includes start pockets 2101, 2102 for receiving a game ball driven onto a game area 1100. When the game ball enters the start pockets 2101, 2102, lottery processing for a jackpot is performed with a predetermined winning probability. As a result, a jackpot game for giving privilege to a player is performed when winning a jackpot. In this case, the game machine shows a degree of expectation of a jackpot when predetermined movement appears in an operation reception part provided such that a player can operate.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”).

  Conventionally, as can be seen, for example, in Patent Document 1, there is known a gaming machine in which a game lottery for the progress of a game is performed when a game ball enters a starting port.

  That is, in this type of gaming machine, it is determined whether or not there is a game ball entering the starting port. When there is a ball entering the starting port, a game lottery for the progress of the game is performed so that the winning of the jackpot, the number of rounds in the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game, and the like are determined. As a result, when the jackpot is won, a large number of game balls can be paid out to the player by playing the jackpot game, and after the jackpot game, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player. Yes.

  Further, when a game lottery related to the progress of the game is performed, a plurality of symbols are variably displayed on the liquid crystal screen. Next, an expected effect is made as to whether or not the plurality of symbols variably displayed in this way are stopped and displayed in a special symbol combination that suggests that the jackpot has been won. As a result, the player enjoys the above-mentioned expected production about whether or not to stop display with a special symbol combination, and enjoys this, and the winning result about the jackpot from the symbol combination finally stopped and displayed Will be able to recognize and play games.

  However, with such a pachinko machine, for a player, after the game ball is inserted into the start port, the player only sees the game progressing automatically by the pachinko machine. There was concern that the entertainment would be reduced by the production. Therefore, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, an operation button that can be operated by the player is prepared, and the operation button is operated at a predetermined timing when a plurality of symbols are variably displayed on the liquid crystal screen. The contents of the effect in the liquid crystal screen are changed according to whether or not it has been done.

JP 2006-346396 A

  According to such a conventional gaming machine, the player can change the effect in the liquid crystal screen by operating the operation means. However, in recent years, a wide variety of effects are performed in the liquid crystal screen, whereas the effects using the operating means are in reality that have become monotonous effects that do not change.

  Accordingly, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

Means 1: a starting opening that allows a game ball to enter,
A hit determination means for performing a determination process for a hit based on the game ball entering the start opening;
Special game execution means for executing a special game capable of giving a prize to a player based on winning in the determination processing by the hit determination means;
An operation means having an operation receiving portion formed so as to be operable by a player;
Effect display means for performing a display effect in a predetermined display area;
Based on the fact that an operation opportunity for the operation receiving unit is given to the player when the display effect is being executed by the effect display means, and the operation receiving unit is operated at this operation opportunity, the display effect is provided. Production control means capable of executing an operation system production that causes a change in
The production control means includes
An operation opportunity for the operation receiving portion is given to the player while a predetermined driving force is not generated with respect to the operation receiving portion, and the player operates the operation receiving portion at the normal operation opportunity. A normal operation system effect control means capable of executing an operation system effect that causes a change in the display effect, and a feeling of operation when a player operates the operation receiver is the normal operation opportunity. Unlike a case, given a predetermined movement in the operation receiving portion by a predetermined driving force, the player is given an opportunity to operate the operation receiving portion. A special operation system effect control means capable of executing an operation system effect that causes a change in the display effect when a player performs an operation on the operation receiving unit;
The operation receiver is
It is possible to receive an operation by a player in a manner that resists the predetermined driving force when the predetermined movement appears due to the predetermined driving force, and that resists the predetermined driving force. When the player receives an operation in the game machine, the predetermined movement in the operation receiving unit can be stopped.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest by a novel game.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a back perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment or detachment structure of the upper-axis support metal fitting of a main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the figure of (A) from the downward direction. It is a reverse view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a locking member. It is a reverse view of the upper metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the side speaker and the side speaker cover from the door frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the side speaker and the side speaker cover from the door frame, and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base board cover and wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the upper right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state which pressed the press operation part in the operation unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle apparatus in a door frame and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the foul cover unit in a door frame and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the foul cover unit in a door frame, and was seen afterwards. It is a front view shown in the state where a front cover of a foul cover unit was removed. It is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. It is a back perspective view of the ball feeding unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the ball | bowl feeding unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which removed the rear case of the ball | bowl feeding unit and was seen from the back. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED for the light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system | strain of the LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of a body frame. It is a left view of a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a prize ball unit in a body frame. It is a back perspective view of a prize ball unit in a main part frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen afterwards. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and was seen afterwards. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the payout path, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the distribution | circulation passage of the ball | bowl in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball | bowl exit opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. It is a back surface perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the back. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of the power supply board box in a board | substrate unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the terminal board box in a board | substrate unit, (B) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the terminal board box in a board unit, and was seen from the front. (A) is a front view of a launching power supply board box, (B) is a sectional view of an AA line shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in a main body frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in a main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the fastening mechanism in a back cover and was seen from the rear side. (A) is the left view of the locking device in a main body frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the locking device in a main body frame from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding door for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame that are slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which looked after disassembling the locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the fraud prevention member in a locking device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board and was seen from the back. It is a front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko machine. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming board using a gaming panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board which looked at FIG. 103 from back. FIG. 110 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board in FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction. It is a fragmentary sectional view which shows the crime prevention structure in the shaft support side of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back side in the state which accommodated the game board in the main body frame. It is a detailed front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board of FIG. 108 and was seen from the front. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 112 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 111. It is a block diagram which shows the drive circuit of a firing solenoid. It is a circuit diagram which shows a shunt regulator circuit, an amplifier circuit, and an operational amplifier circuit group. It is a figure which shows the characteristic of a DC / DC converter. It is a timing chart of the predetermined point in the drive circuit of the firing solenoid of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power failure generation | occurrence | production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special control process. It is a flowchart which shows a start opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit game process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table structure in the random number memory means for special symbols. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sub main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 16 ms regular process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change start process (step S1210). It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the 1st big hit lottery on a main control board. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the 2nd big hit lottery on a main control board. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the advantageous game state generate | occur | produced according to the lottery result in the 1st big hit lottery and the 2nd big hit lottery. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the normal lottery with a main control board. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the production | presentation in a periphery control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of the rotation detection piece of a driven gear and two rotation detection sensors accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation part in a rotation operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of the rotation detection piece of a driven gear and two rotation detection sensors accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation part in a rotation operation unit. (A) is a table | surface figure which shows ON / OFF of two rotation detection sensors accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation part in a rotation operation unit, (B) is accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of a dial operation part. It is a list figure which shows ON / OFF of two rotation detection sensors. (A)-(F) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display screen of a liquid crystal display device (production | presentation means, symbol display means) when an operation unit functions as an operation means. (A)-(E) are explanatory drawings which show an example of the display screen of a liquid crystal display device when an operation unit functions as an operation means. (A)-(F) is explanatory drawing which shows the display screen of a liquid crystal display device when determining whether selection operation by a dial operation part is substituted. It is a flowchart which shows the selection operation detection process by an effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification 1 of the selection operation detection process in an effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification 2 of the selection operation detection process in an effect control process. (A)-(D) are explanatory drawings which show an example of an operation unit and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device corresponding to this. (A)-(C) are explanatory drawings which show an example of an operation unit and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device corresponding to this. (A)-(C) are explanatory drawings which show an example of an operation unit and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device corresponding to this. (A)-(D) are explanatory drawings which show an example of an operation unit and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device corresponding to this. It is a flowchart showing a rotation notice control process in the effect control process. (A)-(D) are explanatory drawings which show an example of an operation unit and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device corresponding to this. (A)-(D) are explanatory drawings which show an example of an operation unit and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device corresponding to this. (A)-(C) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the operation unit which functions as an operation description means, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device corresponding to this. (A)-(C) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the operation unit which functions as an operation description means, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device corresponding to this. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of the detection area by a non-contact sensor, and an operation unit. (A)-(C) are explanatory drawings which show an example of an operation unit and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device corresponding to this. (A)-(C) are explanatory drawings which show an example of an operation unit and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device corresponding to this. (A)-(C) are explanatory drawings which show an example of an operation unit and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device corresponding to this. (A)-(C) are explanatory drawings which show an example of an operation unit and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device corresponding to this. (A)-(C) are explanatory drawings which show an example of the display screen of a liquid crystal display device. (A)-(C) are explanatory drawings which show an example of the display screen of a liquid crystal display device.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view illustrating a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame constituting the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, main body frame, game board constituting the pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame.

  1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A game board 4 having a box-shaped main body frame 3, a game area 1100 in which a game ball as a game medium is inserted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side, and a front face of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 A door frame 5 that is pivotally supported to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side. The door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 stores a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a game ball placed below the game window 101 and storing game balls. A dish-shaped upper plate 301 and lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 5, are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in which the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 extend in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. The horizontal width of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width dimension. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the left end front side of the outer frame 2. The right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 moves to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  The pachinko machine 1 is desired to have a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 in a front view, and protrudes forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. In addition, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is disposed at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player holds the handle device 500 in a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and a game can be played.

  Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100. However, the player can recognize the inside of the game area 1100. By inserting a hand or the like, it is impossible to touch game balls, obstacle nails, various winning holes, and bonus items in the game area 1100. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a cover body 1250 that closes the back of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detaching structure between the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of the lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. . FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper and lower frame plates 10 and 11 that extend in the horizontal direction, and left and right sides that extend in the vertical (vertical) direction. Frame plates 12 and 13, and four connecting members 14 that connect the end portions of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, and each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 is connected by the connecting member 14. They are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape) by connecting them together. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present example are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, And an engagement notch 15 that is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. A mounting step 10a that is recessed from the other general surface is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support fitting 20 to be described later is attached to the mounting step 10a. It is like that.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface projects inward to the rear end. The protrusion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extrusion direction) is provided, and the strength rigidity is enhanced (see FIGS. 9 and 106). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, etc. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily held as a finger hook, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there is also a drawing in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

  The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the left-right direction. The plate-like horizontal piece 17 extending to the side, the plate-like vertical piece 18 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the vertical piece 18 are opposite to each other A plate-like engagement piece 19 that extends in the direction and can be inserted and engaged in the engagement notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are asymmetrical to each other. The vertical piece 18 is divided into front and rear parts. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes, respectively. Has been.

  In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 abut against the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engagement piece 19 is an engagement notch between the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. In a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, a predetermined screw passes through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19 and is screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frames 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper side inner side surfaces of the side frames 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protruding portions 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is like that. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame bodies 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state in which the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower side inner side surfaces of the side frame bodies 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are connected by the four connecting members 14. The side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled into a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of the present example is fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower portion of the left side frame plate 12 that is disposed so as to face the upper support bracket 20 and the upper support bracket 20 that is fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10. Fixed to the lower support bracket 21, the reinforcing bracket 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support bracket 21 and fixed to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13, and fixed to the front surface of the reinforcement bracket 22. The decorative cover 23 is provided. The upper support bracket 20 and the lower support bracket 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so that they can be opened and closed.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-like fixed piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support protruding piece 20b protruding forward from the front end of the fixed piece 20a to the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion. The support side wall 20c formed by being cut out so as to bend from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and the left side frame depending from the left end of the fixed piece 20 and the support protruding piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that contacts the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e that continues to the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 20b (see FIG. 14). 14) and a stop drooping portion 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the drooping wall 20e and is inclined inward at the entrance end of the supporting saddle hole 20c. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of an upper shaft support bracket 630 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is detachably engaged with the support hole 20c in the upper support bracket 20. Further, the upper support bracket 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by a fixing piece 20a and a hanging fixing piece 20d.

  The strength of the support protrusion 20b is enhanced by a hanging wall 20e depending from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b. The details of the upper support metal 20 will be described later. The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the player can be concealed so that it cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance can be improved. Further, the support hole 20c formed in the support projecting piece 20b is bent in a square shape so as to be inclined from the side of the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support bracket 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a that is placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece that rises upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and is fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-like support projecting piece 21c projecting forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support projecting piece 21c Support projections 21d. A main body frame pivot formed on a main body frame pivot bracket 644 (see FIG. 66, etc.) of the main body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21. After the support protrusion 21d of the support bracket 21 is inserted into the support hole of the main body frame pivot support 644 in the main body frame 3, the pivot support pin 633 of the upper pivot support 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked to the support stud 20c. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 that are disposed at a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction inside the right side frame plate 13. The closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described in detail later, the hooks 1054 and 1065 are disengaged from the closing plates 24 and 25 by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and turning it to one side. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. This guide plate 26 is used to smoothly guide the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is mounted and fixed in a replaceable manner.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b in the upper support metal fitting 20, and the support projecting piece 20b is supported by a rivet 28. On the other hand, it is pivotally supported. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a that protrudes forward from a position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28, and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a rightward from the position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The protruding operation part 27b, the elastic piece 27c protruding from the opposite side of the position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operation part 27b, and the front end of the stopper part 27a are formed to bulge forward. An arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a narrower width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed to extend forward as the distance from the stopper portion 27a increases.

  As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, the lock member 27 is configured such that the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27 c is the hanging wall when supported by the support protrusion piece 20 b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state). 20e is in contact with the inner surface of the stopper 20a, and the stopper 27a closes the inclined hole of the supporting hole 20c. The tip of the stopper 27a is inclined to the inclined hole of the supporting hole 20c. The head space portion is not closed, and a space in which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the head space portion of the support hole 20c. .

  The support mechanism of the pivot pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 in this example is such that the pivot pin 633 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c so that the stopper portion 27a The tip side faces the stop drooping portion 20f at the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop drooping portion 20f so that the abutting portion is in contact). In a normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 positioned in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 20c formed by bending and the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a are respectively provided. The center is in a state of being offset in an oblique direction and facing each other. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 supporting the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support saddle hole 20c. Since almost no load is applied to the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not loaded. In addition, since the arcuate tip end surface 27d is provided at the tip of the stopper portion 27a, the lock member 27 is smoothly rotated when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. It has become. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft supporting pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c and comes into contact with the arcuate tip end surface 27d, the acting force F is Component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arcuate tip end surface 27d (in the normal direction of the arc of the tip end surface 27d), and one side of the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 633 and the support hole 20c When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27). The moment for rotating the tip part in the direction away from the support protruding piece 20b (clockwise in the figure) does not act, and the pivot pin 633 is formed between the tip part of the stopper part 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole part of the support collar hole 20c. Maintain the state of being pinched between the inner surface of one side. To. Therefore, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded even in a normal shaft support state or in a state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, and is an elastic formed integrally with synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c and to prevent the pivot pin 633 from coming off from the support hole 20c over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction away from the support projecting piece 20b (clockwise in the figure), one side of the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a. Does not rotate in a direction in which it comes into contact with the stop drooping portion 20f and disengages any further, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude beyond the support protruding piece 20b.

  Even if the shape of the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the component force F1 or the distal end portion of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 20b. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the axis fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times. Since the one side of the tip end of the stopper portion 27a only abuts against the stop drooping portion 20f even when the member 27 rotates, the present applicant points out that the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support protruding piece 20b. I have confirmed.

  The action of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, a lower support metal fitting is provided in a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in a main body frame shaft support metal 644 (see FIG. 63). 21 support protrusions 21d need to be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is pressed against the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27, thereby pushing As shown in FIG. 16B, the lock member 27 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 27c, so that the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support rod hole 20c. Then, when the shaft support pin 633 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the shaft support pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not contact each other. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c and rotates in the clockwise direction, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again and closes the inlet portion of the support hole 20c. The distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out of the support saddle hole 20c.

  This state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support saddle hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, the finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion piece 20b, and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support rod hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the main body frame 3 is lifted, and the main body frame 3 is detached from the outer frame 2 by releasing the engagement between the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal 644 and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal 21. It can be removed from.

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are made of wood, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal ( For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility lined up in a game hall, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing it at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. However, since such an operation is performed by nailing nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nails can be easily nailed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used without problems in existing island facilities. It can be installed. In addition, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion mold material, it becomes possible to form a thin wall while maintaining strength as compared with a conventional wooden outer frame. The left and right widths when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63, etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 has a large horizontal dimension. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12, 13 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are connected by a connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12, 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and the connecting member 14 is engaged with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, the assembly strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased, and it is sturdy. It can be made into a rectangular frame. Further, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member projecting outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be attached in close contact with the adjacent ball lending machine.

[1-2. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 25. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right rear. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover as seen from the rear after being disassembled from the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view.

  The door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a gaming frame 101 having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape) as shown in the figure. The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery, the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 below the lower end. A pair of side speaker covers 290 disposed and attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. .

  Further, the door frame 5 passes through the tray unit 300, the tray unit 300 attached to the lower part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the door. A handle device 500 that is attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 that is disposed on the rear side of the tray unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. A foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side, a ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be closed. The glass unit 590 is provided.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 26 to 30. FIG. 26A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 26B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the door frame base substrate cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 30 shows the wiring state for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is a perspective view which expands and shows.

  As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of the present example is a door having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a substantially elliptical shape having a vertically long shape. The frame base body 110, the upper bracket 120 for fixing the upper decorative unit attached to the upper center of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110, and the lower left and right sides of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110 A pair of side speakers 130 arranged on both outer sides, a speaker bracket 132 for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base body 110, and the front side of the door frame base body 110 are attached to the lower right corner when viewed from the front. And a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500.

  The door frame base unit 100 has a side surface of the side speaker 130 and a front side of a wiring 136 (see FIG. 24) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like on the outside of the right side speaker 130 in front view. Is further provided with a cover member 134 that is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 (see FIGS. 22 and 24). The cover member 134 can guide the wiring 136 along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111 and holds the wiring 136 so that the wiring 136 does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or removed. Can be done.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is configured so that the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and the lower surface of the gaming window 101 are covered with the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 to be attached, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in a rear view. ) And a launch cover 191 attached to the rear face of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the gaming window 101, and a rotational position of the handle device 500 attached to the rear face of the door frame base body 110 below the launch cover 191. The handle device relay board 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control board 4100 and the rear side of the handle device relay board 192 are covered. The door frame is disposed on the opposite side of the middle device relay board cover 193 and the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board 192 with the center in the left-right direction (right side of the left-right center (back side) in the rear view). A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base main body, a door frame base substrate cover 195 covering the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and a door pivotally supported on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. A wiring holding member 197 that holds a part of the wiring cord 196 that connects the frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side is provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the present example has an overall rigidity increased by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 in which metal sheet metal is assembled with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has a strength capable of sufficiently supporting the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The door frame base board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 to be described later. 4, and an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs the amplified signal to each speaker 130. In this example, each decoration unit 200, 240, 280, each decorative board 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 or the operation unit 400, dial driving motor 414 or sensor 432a, 432b provided in the operation unit 400, 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, and the wiring cord 196 that connects the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140, etc. As will be described in detail later, the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate of the main body frame 3 are extended to the rear by being held by the wiring holding member 197. 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 30).

  The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed in a vertically long frame shape by synthetic resin as shown in FIGS. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the gaming window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right side and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, whereas the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. ing. Further, on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110, a cutout portion of a rectangular shape 101a into which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view). Is formed. The door frame base body 110 has an upper side formed by the gaming window 101 and widths of the left and right sides of an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, a pivot supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of a reinforcing unit 150 described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in a front view. Accordingly, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be viewed from the player side, and a game area 1100 wider than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It is like that.

  In addition to the gaming window 101, the door frame base body 110 is disposed on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, and attaches and fixes the ball feeding unit 580 and the speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130. The ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 28) and the game ball penetrating in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and stored in the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 are transferred to the ball feeding unit 580. A ball feed opening 113 for supply and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140 inclined obliquely so that the right side (open side) end of the front surface which is arranged in the lower right corner portion and bulges forward in the front view is retracted Part 114, a wiring passage port 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle attachment part 114 and allows the wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short toward the front in the upper Le mounting portion 114 is provided with a Joana 116, which can be inserted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 28, the door frame base main body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side of the ball feed unit mounting recess 112, and a door frame base main body in the rear view. A board mounting part 118 for mounting the door frame base board 194 disposed on the lower right side (axis support side), and an arrangement closer to the center than the speaker mounting part 111 on the left side (open side) in the rear view of the lower end of the gaming window 101 The security cover mounting portion 119 for protruding backward and mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 and the door frame base body 110 are recessed to the front side substantially along the inner periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear side. The glass unit support step 110a with which the outer periphery of the front surface can abut and the glass unit locking member 190 can be rotated by protruding backward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. Further comprises a, and four of the locking member mounting portion 110b for supporting the.

  Further, the rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided with a door frame protruding piece 110c protruding a predetermined amount rearward from the lower side thereof, and the door frame protruding piece 110c is an engagement groove 603 of the main body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the pachinko machine 1 from the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even so, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. The rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided with a positioning projection 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 in rear view and engages with the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. The positioning projection 110d is fitted into the fitting groove 612 so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at correct positions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 27, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like. In addition, a large number of mounting holes for mounting the upper bracket 120, the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base body 110 has an attachment portion 110g (see FIG. 24) for attaching the speaker bracket 132 for attaching the side speaker 130, and an attachment hole 110h (FIGS. 18, 24, and 24) for attaching the side speaker cover 290. Are formed at appropriate positions.

  In the side speaker cover 290, as shown in FIG. 25, the left and right ones are arranged so as to pass through the glass unit support stepped portions 110a into which the glass units 590 are fitted from the rear side. In a state where the glass unit 590 is removed from the 110 (door frame 5), the glass unit 590 can be detached with a predetermined screw through the mounting hole 110h. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18, the mounting hole 110 h for mounting the side speaker cover 290 is configured such that the rear side is covered by fixing the security cover 180 to the door frame base main body 110. Therefore, in order to remove the side speaker cover 290, first, the security cover 180 and the glass unit 590 must be removed from the door frame base body 110. Accordingly, it is possible to take time for removing the side speaker cover 290 to allow a person who performs an illegal act to remove the relatively large glass unit 590. The removal work can be made conspicuous, and the deterrence (safety) against fraud etc. can be enhanced by deceiving theft acts on the side speakers 130 and the fraudulent acts on the game area 1100 etc. It has become.

  In addition, the door frame base main body 110 includes a lower dish ball supply port 310g and a foul cover unit 540 in the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300, which will be described later, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the substrate mounting part 118. A rectangular ball passage opening 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

  Next, the upper bracket 120 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the upper center of the front surface of the door frame base main body 110, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the left and right attached to the door frame base unit 100 are left and right. The upper gap formed between the side decoration units 200 and 240 is concealed, and both left and right ends are supported by the side decoration units 200 and 240, respectively. The upper bracket 120 is partially inserted into the upper decorative unit 280 so that the upper decorative unit 280 can be supported from above when the door frame 5 is assembled. It is like that.

  The pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is not shown in detail, but the intersection of the central axes is a predetermined distance from the center of the game area 1100 to the front in front view (for example, 0.2 m to 1). .5 m), the sound is delivered most efficiently to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the side speaker 130 mainly outputs middle and high range sounds, and is disposed at a position as far away from the pachinko machine 1 as possible in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output a sound with a high stereo feeling.

  The outer periphery of these side speakers 130 is sandwiched between a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 disposed on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 disposed on the rear side, so that the door frame It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side with a predetermined screw.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side open as shown in FIGS. A step portion 195a that is recessed forward is provided at a position slightly below the center. A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the lateral direction as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, and the cross section is formed in an I-shape. It is formed of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 includes a plurality of holding holes 197a (three in the upper and lower parts in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. The wiring holding member 197 has an end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled, and a step 195 a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the vertical direction. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 rotates to the door frame base substrate cover 195 side, so that the wiring holding member 197 is rotated. The door frame base substrate cover 195 can be accommodated in the stepped portion 195a.

  This wiring holding member 197 has a predetermined bundling in a holding hole 197a which is paired up and down with the wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side. The wiring cord 196 can be held by inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 30).

  In the wiring holding member 197 of this example, when the door frame 5 is rotated with respect to the main body frame 3 in the closing direction, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3. It will be pushed forward by the part and will turn in the direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. Thereby, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side is free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the edge. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded in two laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other, so that wiring is performed by the wiring cord 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves in a direction away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). Accordingly, the wiring cord 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is unfolded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being obstructed by the wiring cord 196.

  As described above, according to this example, the end of the wiring frame holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the door frame base substrate cover 195 is moved so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. Since it is pivotally supported on the rear surface and a part of the wiring cord 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction, the main body frame 3 When the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring cord 196 can be folded or unfolded laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions (breakage of the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connection connector, etc.) due to pinching.

  Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even when a force acts through the wiring cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, It is possible to prevent blurring in the vertical direction, and the wiring cord 196 can be reliably folded in the horizontal direction to prevent occurrence of problems.

  Further, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes a cylindrical tube portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tube portion 141 from the rear end of the tube portion 141 as shown in FIGS. An annular flange portion 142 extending outward in a right angle direction, and a plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding into the cylindrical portion 141 and arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. 143, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state in which the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment portion 114 in the door frame base body 110. Although not shown in the drawings, the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 is substantially coincident with the wiring passage opening 115 in a state of being attached to the handle attachment portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. The three grooves 502a are arranged and formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 coincide with each other. Yes. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 that is inclined obliquely so that the shaft of the cylinder portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) toward the front in a front view. Similarly, the shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 is also inclined obliquely.

  Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the rear side of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110, and a door frame base main body, as mainly shown in FIGS. 110, a pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 attached along the pivot-side side part back surface, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the open-side side part back surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110. And a lower reinforcing metal plate 154 attached along the lower back surface of the gaming window 101, which are fastened to each other with screws, rivets or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having shaft pins 155 provided on the upper surface and the lower end portion of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. So that it can be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, the lower reinforcing metal plate 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the horizontal width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and the lower long side end edge of both long side edges thereof. A lower bent protrusion piece 159 that is bent forward (see FIG. 27), and an upper bent protrusion piece 160 that is bent forward to the right side (open side) portion of the upper long side edge when viewed from the front. And a vertical bent projecting piece 161 that is bent rearward at the central portion of the upper long edge and is extended in the vertical direction. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by the lower bent protrusion piece 159, the upper bent protrusion piece 160, and the like. Further, the vertical bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to be engaged and locked with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5, the vertical bent protruding piece 161 is locked to the locking piece 592 b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 is moved in the horizontal direction and It is possible to restrict movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 has a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101a of the door frame base body 110.

  Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes an open side outward bent protrusion 163 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154, As shown in the figure, the open side inner bent projecting piece 164 is formed so as to extend rearward longer than the open side outer bent projecting piece 163. ing. In addition, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 to be described later is provided at the lower rear side of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 that extends rearward to the outer end of the long side and opens to the outside of the shaft support side (see FIG. 106). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bent protrusions 167 bent rearward on both sides of the long side.

  The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased. Although there is a possibility that an action may be easily performed, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the present example includes the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. Further, the shaft-supporting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is configured such that a front end piece 952b of a side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the U-shape (see FIG. 106), the insertion of the tool can be prevented, and only the pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 can be prevented from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. This crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 590 and prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4. Are formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing metal plates 152 and 153, and the upper side thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4 A formed contact recess 181 and a post-crime prevention protrusion 182 protruding rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181 are provided. In addition, the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180 are respectively provided with crime prevention rear end protrusions 183 that protrude rearward along the shape of the ends. In addition, the rear side crime prevention end protrusion 183 on the right side (axial support side) in the rear view is configured to extend rearward longer than the opposite (open side) crime prevention rear end protrusion 183. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention projection piece 184 that protrudes along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and the left and right sides outside the projection piece 184 before the crime prevention And a U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 projecting forward at the lower end.

  The security cover 180 has a mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) attached to the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100 in front view and a mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (shaft support side). By attaching to the security cover attaching part 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. In a state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, detailed illustration is omitted, but the pre-crime projection piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 is in contact with the vertical bent protruding piece 161. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed, the post-crime protruding protrusion 182 protruding rearward is inserted into the lower surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 and the half on the open side is front. The component 1110 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool enters the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the post-crime projecting piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  The crime prevention cover 180 can cover the lower part of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the door frame 5 closed by the back surface thereof. In addition, it is possible to prevent the hitting ball that flies or reversely feeds the guide passage portion from colliding with the glass plate 594.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with fitting portions 190a that are rotatably fitted to locking member mounting portions 110b that protrude rearward from the door frame base main body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 has a retaining screw fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is pivotally supported with respect to the locking member attaching part 110b.

  The locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a protrusion protruding rearward on the rear side, although the detailed illustration is omitted, and this protrusion rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook when operating. Of the four glass unit locking members 190, no protrusion is formed on the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 attached to the lower right in the rear view, and the rear surface is a flat surface. ing.

  Further, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110, respectively. In addition, when the launch cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, the rear surfaces thereof are substantially the same surface. The front surface of the ball striking device 650 attached to the main body frame 3 can be covered.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Next, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 31B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as seen from the exploded side.

  The right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the figure, and the inside is the gaming window 101. The outer side of the door frame base unit 100 is linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side decoration frame 202 that forms a skeleton of the right side decoration unit 200, a side upper decoration member 204 disposed along the upper side of the side decoration frame 202, and a side upper decoration member 204. The side upper decorative lens 206 fitted from the rear side, the upper side of the side decorative frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204 are covered, and the side upper decorative member 204 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 206. A side upper cover 208; a side lens 210 that supports the lower portion of the side upper cover 208 and is fitted and fixed to the side frame 202 from the rear side; and a side inner lens 212 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 210 It is equipped with.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from the substantially vertical center to the upper side, and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface. A substrate 214 and a right side lower decorative substrate 216 which is disposed on the lower side from a substantially vertical center of the side inner lens 212 on the lower side and on which a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) are mounted; A right side upper decorative substrate cover 218 that covers the rear side of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and is attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative substrate 214, and a right side that covers the rear side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 Attached to the side lens 210 and the side decoration frame 202 so as to sandwich the lower decoration substrate 216. The right side under the decorative board cover 220 that is provided with a.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 includes an upper right speaker 222 disposed at the upper left portion in the front view of the side decoration frame 202, and an upper portion that supports the upper right speaker 222 and is fitted to the upper rear portion of the side decoration frame 202. A speaker bracket 224; an upper speaker cover 226 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 224 and the side decoration frame 202; and a side sub-lens 228 attached to a predetermined position on a side surface of the side upper cover 208 from the inside. Yes. On the rear side of the side sub-lens 228, the LED 214c of the upper decorative board 214 on the right side is arranged so that the LED 214c is decorated for light emission.

  In the right side decoration unit 200, a side decoration frame 202, a side upper decoration member 204, a right side upper decoration board cover 218, and a right side lower decoration board cover 220 are formed of a light-impermeable member. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surface of the frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204. Further, the side upper decorative lens 206, the side upper cover 208, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker cover 226, the upper speaker bracket 224, and the side sub lens 228 of the right side decorative unit 200 are translucent members. The side upper cover 208 is substantially milky white, and the side upper decorative lens 206, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker bracket 224, the upper speaker cover 226, and the side sub lens 228 are substantially transparent. It is said that.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the side surfaces of the side lens 210 and the upper speaker cover 226 that are formed to be substantially transparent and the surface side of the side inner lens 212 and the upper speaker bracket 224 are formed in a polyhedral shape. The light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative board 214 and the right side lower decorative board 216 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 210 and the side inner lens 212 It cannot be clearly seen from the person side. The front surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 are white, and the right side decorative unit 200 is efficiently decorated with light by the light from the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b, and the like. The decorative boards 214 and 216 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit. The right side upper decorative board 214 and the right side lower decorative board 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b can appropriately emit light so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be illuminated.

  The side decoration frame 202 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example is formed in an arc shape substantially along the gaming window 101 as shown in the figure, and specifically, along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. An arc-shaped inner frame 202a and an upper portion that is arranged at a position away from the inner frame 202a toward the outside and is linear along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper portion. The outer frame 202b formed in an arc shape so as to bend toward the upper end edge of the inner frame 202a, the upper end frame 202c connecting the upper end edges of the outer frame 202b and the inner frame 202a, the outer frame 202b and the inner frame The inner frame 2 is arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in this example) along the circumferential direction of the lower end frame 202d that connects the lower end edges of 202a and the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b. And a, and the partition frame 202f having a slit 202e of a predetermined width with connecting 2a and an outer frame 202b.

  The inner frame 202a of the side decorative frame 202 extends with substantially the same width in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the outer frame 202b is formed in a straight line at the substantially same position as the rear end of the inner frame 202a, while the rear end of the linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is the upper and lower sides. Are formed in an arc shape such that both ends of the projection protrude forward. Further, the curved arc-shaped portion on the upper side of the linearly extending portion of the outer frame 202b is formed in an arc shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end edge side protrudes forward. Further, the partition frame 202f of the side decoration frame 202 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction so that a portion between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b protrudes most forward. The partition frame 202f is disposed on radiation extending radially from the vicinity of the lower center of the gaming window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

  As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 202 is divided into a plurality of portions in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b by a plurality of partition frames 202f, and each of the divided frames is divided. Is a light emitting decoration opening 202g, and a peripheral lens portion 210a of a side lens 210, which will be described later, is fitted from the rear side. In addition, the radiating lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 is fitted into the slit 202e of the partition wall frame 202f from the rear side. Further, the slit 202e and the light emitting decoration opening 202g can be partitioned by the partition wall frame 202f, and the respective light emission modes can be made different.

  As shown in the drawing, the side upper decoration member 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height substantially along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 202b of the side decoration frame 202, and the rear surface. Are formed in a depressed state, and a plurality of openings 204a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 204 has a Jomon-shaped relief on the upper side along the openings 204a arranged in a line.

  On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 206 has a shape that can be fitted into the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 204, and from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 204 to the vicinity of the front end thereof through the opening 204a. A plurality of light guides 206a capable of protruding is provided. The light guide portion 206a has a polyhedral shape at the tip, and can be inserted and fitted into the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204 so that it appears as if a jewel has been fitted into the opening 204a. It can be done. Further, the light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 disposed on the rear side by the light guide portion 206a of the side upper decorative lens 204 can be emitted forward (player side) from the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204. In addition, the tip of the light guide unit 206a can be shined as a gemstone.

  The side upper cover 208 of the right side decoration unit 200 has an upper surface and a right side surface (in front view) substantially aligned with the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame unit base 100), and a lower surface (lower end). Has a shape substantially along the side upper decorative member 204. The side upper cover 208 has an attachment step 208a that is open at the bottom and recessed rearward so that the upper side decoration member 204 can be accommodated in the lower front portion. A mounting boss, a mounting hole, or the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 204 or the like is formed on the end surface. Also, two cutouts 208b arranged on the upper and lower sides are formed on the right side surface of the side upper cover 208, so that the side sub-lens 228 attached to the inside through the cutouts 208b is desired to the front side. It has become. By inserting the side sub lens 228 into the notch 208b of the side upper cover 208, only this portion can emit light in a different manner.

  The side lens 210 of the right side decoration unit 200 has a shape that is substantially along the side decoration frame 202 and has a recessed rear surface, and is inserted into the light emitting decoration opening 202g of the side decoration frame 202 later. A peripheral lens portion 210 a and a radiating lens portion 210 b inserted into the slit 202 e of the side decorative frame 202 later are provided. As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 does not include the peripheral lens portion 210a corresponding to the light emitting decoration opening 202g that is in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decoration frame 202, and the corresponding part is opened forward and downward. It is set as the accommodation step part 210c made. The accommodation step 210c accommodates an upper right speaker 222, an upper speaker bracket 224, and the like which will be described later. Further, the side lens 210 includes an attachment portion 210 d that forms the upper surface of the accommodation step portion 210 c and is fixed to the rear side of the attachment step portion 208 a in the side upper cover 208.

  The side lens 210 has a curved surface shape that bulges to the front side so that the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiating lens portion 210b are substantially along the front end of the partition frame 202f of the side decorative frame 202. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 210a is not uniform. Thus, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a is irregularly refracted. Further, the inner surface formed in the shape of a polyhedron can provide a distinctive appearance in which the peripheral lens portion 210a is sparkling.

  The side inner lens 212 is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side, and corresponds to a portion where the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiating lens portion 210b are formed in the side lens 210 as shown in the figure. It corresponds to the main body part 212a having a recessed rear surface and the radiation lens part 210b (slit 202e of the side decoration frame 202) that is continuous from the rear end of the main body part 212a and projects forward from the main body part 212a. And a plate-like light guide part 212b arranged at the above position. The main body 212 a of the side inner lens 212 is formed in a state where the front surface thereof is kept a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 210. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, one surface of the main body 212a of the side inner lens 212 is formed into a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The light transmitted through the main body part 212a is irregularly refracted by the non-uniform thickness of the main body part 212a.

  By combining the side inner lens 212 with the side lens 210, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a and the main body portion 212a can be birefringently refracted, and the shape of the object disposed on the opposite side can be changed. It is almost unrecognizable. Further, the irregular reflection due to the polyhedral shape along with the irregular refraction allows the side lens 210 (circumferential lens portion 210a) to have a brilliant appearance and make the sense of perspective unclear.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and the light emitting decorative openings 202g of the side decorative frame 202 (the periphery of the side lens 210). The LEDs 214a and 216a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens portion 210a) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the slit 202e (side lens 210 of the side lens 210) is used. The LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b) have a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °). Note that the LED 214c on the right side upper decorative substrate 214 that decorates the side sub lens 228 with light emission is a red LED in this example.

  Like the side speaker 130, the upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs a mid-high range sound, and is attached to a predetermined position and in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 224. Yes. The upper speaker bracket 224 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion 224a that protrudes obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed to the upper end back side of the horn portion 224a in the upper speaker bracket 224 so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side by the horn portion 224a in front view. It has become.

  The upper right speaker 222 of this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn part 224a of the upper speaker bracket 224. It has become difficult. Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker bracket 224 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 224 is irregularly refracted due to the uneven thickness.

  The upper speaker cover 226 that covers the front side of the upper speaker bracket 224 is fitted from the rear side of the side decorative frame 202 so as to close the light emitting decorative opening 202g that is in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decorative frame 202. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 210. Further, a plurality of through holes 226a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 226 so that sound from the upper right speaker 222 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 226 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing in different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 226 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness. Therefore, in the upper speaker cover 226 and the upper speaker bracket 224, the light is irregularly refracted, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the through hole 226a formed in the upper right speaker 222 and the upper speaker cover 226 from the player side. The appearance can be similar to that of the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Next, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. 34A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from the exploded side.

  The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the drawing, and the inside is the gaming window 101. The outer side of the door frame base unit 100 is linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed substantially symmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 includes a side decoration frame 242 that forms a skeleton of the left side decoration unit 240, a side upper decoration member 244 disposed along the upper side of the side decoration frame 242, and a side upper decoration member 244. The side upper decorative lens 246 fitted from the rear side, the upper side of the side decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative member 244 are covered, and the side upper decorative member 244 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 246. A side upper cover 248, a side lens 250 that supports the lower portion of the side upper cover 248 and is fitted and fixed to the side frame 242 from the rear side, and a side inner lens 252 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 250 It is equipped with.

  The left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the substantially vertical center to the upper side, and the left side upper decoration in which a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface. A substrate 254, and a left side lower decorative substrate 256, which is disposed on the lower side from a substantially center in the vertical direction of the side inner lens 252 and has a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface. A left side upper decorative substrate cover 258 that covers the rear side of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and a left side that covers the rear side of the left side lower decorative substrate 256 Attached to the side lens 250 and the side decoration frame 242 so as to sandwich the lower decoration board 256. That the left side under the decorative board cover 260, and a.

  Furthermore, the left side decoration unit 240 includes an upper left speaker 262 disposed in the upper right part in the front view of the side decoration frame 242 and an upper part that supports the upper left speaker 262 and is fitted to the upper rear side of the side decoration frame 242. The speaker bracket 264 and the upper speaker cover 266 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 264 and the side decoration frame 242 are provided.

  In the left side decoration unit 240, a side decoration frame 242, a side upper decoration member 244, a left side upper decoration substrate cover 258, and a left side lower decoration substrate cover 260 are formed of an opaque member. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 242 and the side upper decorative member 244. Further, the side upper decorative lens 246, the side upper cover 248, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker cover 266, and the upper speaker bracket 264 of the left side decorative unit 240 are formed of a translucent member. The substantially entire side upper cover 248 is milky white, and the side upper decorative lens 246, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper speaker cover 266 are substantially transparent.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the side surfaces of the side lens 250 and the upper speaker cover 266 that are formed to be substantially transparent and the surface side of the side inner lens 252 and the upper speaker bracket 264 are formed in a polyhedron shape. The light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, etc. mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative board 254 and the left side lower decorative board 256 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252 It cannot be clearly seen from the person side. Further, the front surfaces of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white, and the left side decorative unit 240 is efficiently decorated with light emission by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, and the like. The decorative boards 254, 256 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are not lit. The left side upper decorative board 254 and the left side lower decorative board 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. The left side decoration unit 240 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light.

  The side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example is formed in an arc shape substantially along the gaming window 101 as shown in the figure, and specifically, along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. An arc-shaped inner frame 242a and an upper portion that is arranged at a position away from the inner frame 242a toward the outside and is linear along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper portion. The outer frame 242b formed in an arc shape so as to bend toward the upper edge of the inner frame 242a, the upper frame 242c connecting the upper edges of the outer frame 242b and the inner frame 242a, the outer frame 242b and the inner frame A lower end frame 242d for connecting the lower end edges of 242a, and the inner frame 2 arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in this example) along the circumferential direction of the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b. And a, and the partition frame 242f having a slit 242e of a predetermined width with connecting 2a and an outer frame 242b.

  The inner frame 242a of the side decoration frame 242 extends with substantially the same width in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the outer frame 242b has a rear end at a linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 that is formed in a straight line at substantially the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 242a, whereas the front end is vertically Are formed in an arc shape such that both ends of the projection protrude forward. In addition, the curved arc-shaped portion on the upper side of the linearly extending portion of the outer frame 242b is formed in an arc shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end edge side protrudes forward. In addition, the partition frame 242f of the side decoration frame 242 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction so that a portion between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b protrudes most forward. The partition frame 242f is arranged on the radiation that extends radially from the vicinity of the lower center of the gaming window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

  As shown in the figure, the side decorative frame 242 is divided into a plurality of portions in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b by a plurality of partition walls 242f. Is a light emitting decoration opening 242g, and a peripheral lens portion 250a of a side lens 250 to be described later is fitted from the rear side. Further, the radiating lens portion 250b of the side lens 250 is fitted into the slit 242e of the partition wall frame 242f from the rear side. Further, the slit 242e and the light emitting decoration opening 242g can be partitioned by the partition wall frame 242f, and the respective light emitting modes can be made different.

  As shown in the drawing, the side upper decoration member 244 of the left side decoration unit 240 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height substantially along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 242b of the side decoration frame 242 and is also provided on the rear surface. Is formed in a depressed state, and a plurality of openings 244a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 244 has a Jomon-like relief on the upper side along the openings 244a arranged in a row.

  On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 246 has a shape that can be fitted into the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 244 and extends from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 244 through the opening 244a to the vicinity of the front end thereof. A plurality of light guides 246a that can protrude is provided. The light guide 246a has a polyhedral shape at the tip, and by inserting and fitting into the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244, it can appear as if gems are also fitted in the opening 244a. It can be done. Further, the light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 disposed on the rear side by the light guide portion 246a of the side upper decorative lens 244 may be emitted forward (player side) from the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244. In addition, the tip of the light guide 246a can be shined as a jewel.

  The upper side cover 248 of the left side decoration unit 240 has a top surface and a left side surface (in front view) substantially aligned with the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame unit base 100), and a lower surface (lower end). The shape is substantially in line with the side upper decorative member 244. The side upper cover 248 is provided with a mounting step 248a that is open at the bottom and recessed rearward so that the side upper decorative member 244 can be accommodated in the lower front portion. A mounting boss, a mounting hole, and the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 244 and the like are formed on the end surface. Further, the side upper cover 248 includes a covering portion 248b that covers the upper shaft support portion 156 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 from the front side on the outer side surface (the left side surface in a front view).

  The side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 has a shape substantially along the side decoration frame 242 and has a recessed rear surface, and is inserted into the light emitting decoration opening 242g of the side decoration frame 242 later. A peripheral lens portion 250a and a radiation lens portion 250b to be inserted into the slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242 later are provided. As shown in the figure, the side lens 250 does not include the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the light emitting decoration opening 242g contacting the upper end frame 242c of the side decoration frame 242, and the corresponding part is opened forward and downward. It is made the accommodation step part 250c made. The housing step 250c accommodates an upper left speaker 262, an upper speaker bracket 264, and the like, which will be described later. The side lens 250 includes an attachment portion 250d that forms the upper surface of the accommodation step portion 250c and is fixed to the rear side of the attachment step portion 248a in the side upper cover 248.

  The side lens 250 has a curved surface shape that bulges to the front side so that the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiating lens portion 250b are substantially along the front end of the partition frame 242f of the side decorative frame 242. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 250a is not uniform. As a result, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a is irregularly refracted. In addition, the inner surface formed in a polyhedral shape allows the peripheral lens portion 250a to have a distinctive appearance.

  The side inner lens 252 is inserted and fitted into the side lens 250 from the rear side, and corresponds to a portion where the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiating lens portion 250b are formed in the side lens 250 as shown in the figure. It corresponds to the main body 252a having a recessed rear surface and the radiation lens portion 250b (slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242) that is continuous from the rear end of the main body 252a and projects forward from the main body 252a. A plate-shaped light guide portion 252b disposed at the position. The main body portion 252 a of the side inner lens 252 is formed such that the front surface thereof is kept a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 250. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, one surface of the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed into a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The light transmitted through the main body 252a is irregularly refracted by the non-uniform thickness of the main body 252a.

  By combining the side inner lens 252 with the side lens 250, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and the main body portion 252a can be doubled and refracted, and the shape of the object disposed on the opposite side can be changed. It is almost unrecognizable. Further, the irregular reflection due to the polyhedral shape along with the irregular refraction allows the side lens 250 (circumferential lens portion 250a) to have a sparkling appearance and make the perspective feel unclear.

  The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and the light emitting decorative openings 242g of the side decorative frame 242 (the periphery of the side lens 250). The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens portion 250a) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the slit 242e (side lens 250 of the side lens 250) is used. The LEDs 254b and 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 250b) have a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °).

  Similar to the side speaker 130, the upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs a mid-high range sound and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. Yes. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion 264a that protrudes obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the upper speaker back side of the upper end of the horn portion 264a in the upper speaker bracket 264, so that the upper left speaker 262 cannot be seen from the player side by the horn portion 264a in front view. It has become.

  The upper left speaker 262 of the present example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn part 264a of the upper speaker bracket 264, and this causes noise to other pachinko machines. It has become difficult. Although not shown in detail, the front speaker bracket 264 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 264 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness.

  The upper speaker cover 266 covering the front side of the upper speaker bracket 264 is fitted from the rear side of the side decorative frame 242 so as to close the light emitting decorative opening 242g in contact with the upper end frame 242c of the side decorative frame 242. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 250. Further, a plurality of through holes 266a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 266 so that sound from the upper left speaker 262 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 266 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing different directions like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 266 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness. Accordingly, in the upper speaker cover 266 and the upper speaker bracket 264, the light is irregularly refracted, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the through hole 266a formed in the upper left speaker 262 and the upper speaker cover 266 from the player side. The appearance can be similar to that of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250.

[1-2D. Upper decoration unit]
Next, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as seen from the rear.

  The upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. 17 and the like, at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5 and between the upper edge on the center side in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 has a substantially inverted isosceles triangular shape as viewed from the front, and penetrates the central opening 281a that penetrates largely to the center and both the left and right sides of the central opening 281a. A front decorative member 281 that has a pair of side openings 281b and into which the tip of the upper bracket 120 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted above the central opening 281a, and a rear side in the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 A central lens 282 fitted from the rear side, an inner lens 283 arranged at the rear end of the central lens 282, a pair of side lenses 284 fitted from the rear side into the side opening 281b of the front decorative member 281, and an outer shape in front view The shape is similar to that of the front decoration member 281 and the center lens 282, the inner lens 283, and the pair of side lenses 284 are placed in front. A main body member 285 attached to the rear side of the front decoration member 281 so as to be sandwiched between the decoration members 281; an upper decoration substrate 286 disposed on the rear side of the main body member 285 and mounted with a plurality of color LEDs 286a and 286b on the front surface; And a board cover 287 attached to the rear surface of the main body member 285 so that the outer shape of the front view is substantially the same as that of the main body and covers the upper decorative board 286 from the rear side.

  The upper decorative unit 280 extends rearward while being bent continuously from the lower end of the front decorative member 281, and the upper front end is supported by the front decorative member 281, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and is downward A lower surface decorative member 288 having a pair of lower openings 288a penetrating toward the lower surface, and a lower lens 289 fitted into the lower opening 288a of the lower surface decorative member 288 from the upper side and fixed to the lower surface decorative member 288 and the substrate cover 287, It is equipped with. In this example, a plating layer having metallic luster is formed on the surfaces of the front decorative member 281 and the lower decorative member 288. The LED 286a of the upper decorative board 286 is disposed at a position corresponding to the central lens 282, and the LED 286b is disposed at a position corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289. The lens 284 and the lower lens 289 can be individually decorated with light emission. In this example, the LED 286a is a full-color LED, and the LED 286b is a high-intensity white LED.

  The front decorative member 281 in the upper decorative unit 280 of this example has an inner peripheral shape of the central opening 281a in an arc shape in which the central upper end is a side extending left and right, the central lower end is a vertex, and each side is loose in front view. And has three protrusions extending from the approximate center of the upper side on both sides of the upper side and the lower end vertex to the central opening 281a. Further, the front decorative member 281 is formed with a plurality of streaks extending obliquely outward and upward on the outer side of the upper side of the central opening 281a. A side opening 281b is formed so as to extend along the streaking as well as the shape of the blade extending.

  The central lens 282 fitted into the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 has an outer shape substantially the same as that of the central opening 281a, and has a shape that bulges forward. Are formed in a polyhedron shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions. The central lens 282 of this example is formed of a transparent (colorless transparent, colored transparent) resin. By fitting the central lens 282 into the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281, the central lens 282 looks like a jewel that is trillant cut, and the front decorative member 281 looks like a jewel base. .

  The inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the central lens 282 is formed of a transparent resin so as to close the opening on the rear side of the central lens 282, and a fine lens (or prism) is formed on the surface. A plurality of light sources are formed so that light from the upper decorative substrate 286 can be diffused widely toward the central lens 282 side. On the other hand, the side lens 284 fitted into the side opening 281b of the front decoration member 281 is formed of a transparent resin so that the front surface thereof is substantially continuous with the front surface of the front decoration member 281 when fitted into the side opening 281b. Has been. Note that a plurality of fine lenses (or prisms) are formed on the back surface side of the side lens 284, as with the inner lens 282, and the entire side lens 284 is substantially uniform by the light emitted from the upper decorative substrate 286. Can emit light.

  Note that the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284 have a feeling of being clouded by a plurality of minute lenses formed on the surface, and the rear side is not clearly seen through the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284. It has become.

  The main body member 285 of the upper decorative unit 280 has an outer shape substantially conforming to the shape of the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 and extends in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction, and the front end opening is inclined downward and closed. Center portion 285a inclined obliquely upward, and a closed rear end disposed on both sides of the central portion 285a is positioned substantially at the same position as the rear end of the central portion 285a, and the front end extends shorter than the central portion 285a. And a plurality of openings 285c formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 286a and 286b mounted on the upper decorative substrate 286, penetrating the rear end surfaces of the central portion 285a and the side portion 285b. ing. When the upper decorative board 286 is arranged on the rear side of the main body member 285, the LED 286a of the upper decorative board 286 is inserted and arranged in the opening 285c so that the light from the LED 286a does not leak to the rear side. It has become. Further, the central part 285a and the side part 285b of the main body member 285 are recessed from the front side to the rear side, so that light from the corresponding LEDs 285a and 286b does not affect the side.

  The lower decorative member 288 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed so as to become thinner toward the rear, and the left and right side surface shapes thereof are the upper speaker covers 226 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. The shape of the end portion of the upper speaker frame 266 near the upper end frame 202c, 242c is substantially the same as the end shape of the upper speaker cover 226, 266 closer to the upper end frame 202c, 242c. ing. The lower lens 289 is sandwiched between the lower surface decoration member 288 and the upper speaker covers 226 and 266. Further, light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the left side upper decorative substrate 254 is supplied to the lower lens 289 via the upper speaker brackets 224 and 264 of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It emits light.

[1-2E. Side speaker cover]
Next, the pair of side speaker covers 290 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The side speaker cover 290 covers and decorates the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and includes lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, It is arranged between.

  The side speaker cover 290 supports a cover body 291 having a disk shape and a plurality of holes curved so as to cover the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an outer periphery of the cover body 291 from the front side. A main body member 292 that has an annular opening that is formed so as to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and a lower plate of the dish unit 300 that is disposed below the main body member 292. And a lower member 293 formed so as to be continuous with the left and right rear ends of the cover 328. In this example, since the cover body 291 is made of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to be deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 is possible. As long as it can be protected.

  In the side speaker cover 290, a plating layer having metallic luster is formed on the surface of the main body member 292. The lower member 293 is formed of a translucent member having a milky white color similar to that of the lower plate cover 328 in the plate unit 300 described later.

  The side speaker cover 290 of this example is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 independently of the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the dish unit 300. Through a mounting hole 110h (see FIG. 18) formed at a predetermined position 110, the door frame base body 100 is fixed to the door frame base body 100 by a predetermined screw inserted from the rear side of the door frame base body 110.

  Thereby, after removing the security cover 180 in the door frame 5, the side speaker cover 290 can be removed to the front side by removing the screws attaching the side speaker cover 290 from the rear side of the door frame 5. The side speaker 130 can be removed by removing the speaker bracket 132 from the front side of the door frame 5. Therefore, even if the side speaker 130 needs to be replaced for some reason, the front side of the side speaker 130 can be removed without removing the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the dish unit 300, and the like from the door frame 5. Only the side speaker cover 290 that covers the speaker can be easily removed, and the side speaker 130 can be easily replaced.

[1-2F. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44. 41 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the rear.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls paid out from a prize ball device 740 to be described later, and games stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to a ball hitting device 650 described later via the ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of the present example includes a substantially plate-shaped dish unit base 310 that is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and that extends in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped upper plate body 312 which is fixed at substantially the center of the front surface and opened upward and rearward and has a large front side left side (axial support side) bulging forward. The upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward, and a plurality of openings 316a attached to the upper front edge of the upper plate upper panel 314 and penetrating in the vertical direction A plate front decoration member 316, and a plurality of light guide portions 318a which are disposed between the plate upper decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 and are fitted into the openings 316a of the plate upper decoration member 316 are provided. did The right pair of upper dish upper lens 318 and upper dish upper lens 318 are arranged on opposite sides of the upper dish upper panel 314 and are attached to the lower surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 and have a plurality of color LEDs 320a and 322a on the upper surface. Are mounted between the upper plate upper decorative panel 320 and the upper plate upper decorative panel 314 and the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322. And an upper dish upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine prisms for diffusing the light to the upper dish upper lens 318 side.

  The dish unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the dish unit base 310 at the lower side of the upper dish body 312 and opened upward and rearward, and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in front view and the front end toward the center in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped lower dish body 324 formed to become lower toward the front, and fixed to the upper part of the lower dish body 324, and in the front view, the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in the same manner as the lower dish body 324. A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 that is curved so as to become higher toward the center, and an opening 328a along the front ends of the lower plate top plate 326 and the lower plate main body 324, and covers the outer periphery of the opening 328a A cover 328, a dish side middle cover 330 having openings 330 a that are disposed on both left and right sides of the lower dish cover 328 and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and an opening 330 a of the dish side middle cover 330 A dish-side middle cover lens 332 fitted from the side, and a dish-side outer cover 334 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the dish-side middle cover 330 and extending in the left-right direction to positions corresponding to the left and right ends of the door frame base unit 100. ing. Note that the dish side middle cover 330 disposed on the right side when viewed from the front is formed with a lock hole 330b at a right end portion thereof to face a cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 described later. Further, a handle insertion hole 334a into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front is formed in the right dish side outer cover 334 when viewed from the front.

  Further, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 for removing game balls attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish body 312 and stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302, and a lower dish body 324. A lower tray ball removing mechanism 350 for pulling downward the game balls attached to the lower surface and stored in the lower tray 302, and installed on the upper left side in front view of the tray unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball rental unit 360 that operates a ball rental machine (also referred to as CR unit 6; see FIG. 113).

  The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 that can store game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. The dish unit 300 constitutes a lower dish 302 that can store game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the lower dish body 324, the lower dish top plate 326, the lower dish cover 328, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper end edge extending in the left-right direction. Is provided. A ball rental unit attachment portion 310b for penetrating in the front-rear direction and attaching the ball rental unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a. The dish unit base 310 is disposed on the lower side of the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner when viewed from the front) and has a horizontally long rectangular shape that passes through in the front-rear direction and an upper dish ball supply port 310c. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction below the right end of the decorative portion 310a on the lower side of the mouth 310c (substantially in the height direction of the plate unit base 310), and the upper plate And a pair of lower tray support portions 310e that are disposed directly below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper tray ball supply port 310c, protrude forward, and have the same upper surface. The upper dish ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower dish support part 310e arranged immediately below.

  The dish unit 300 is disposed between a pair of lower dish support portions 310e and is fitted to the rear ends of the lower dish body 324 and the lower dish top plate 326, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular ring in front view. A groove 310f and a rectangular lower dish ball supply port 310g that is disposed in the lower right portion of the center surrounded by the lower dish support groove 310f and penetrates in the front-rear direction are provided. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply bowl 310h that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish bowl supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish bowl supply bowl 310h. A notch 310i formed on a side surface and having a size through which a game ball can pass.

  The upper tray ball supply port 310 c of the dish unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the door frame base main body 110 and the cutout portions 101 a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100. The unit 540 communicates with the first ball outlet 544a. At the front end of the upper bowl supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends in the right direction in the front view and is recessed backward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side when viewed from the front is slightly lower with respect to the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the front end side is lower with respect to the front-rear direction. As a result, the difference in height between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 increases toward the right end of the guide recess 310j. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper plate 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540 are: Since it becomes impossible to go straight into the front upper plate 301 from the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the paid-out game ball comes into contact with the game ball whose front side is closed and rolls. The direction is changed, and is guided to roll rightward in the guide recess 310j, and is released from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower stages in the upper plate 301, so that when the game ball blocks the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the player does not bring the game ball by hand. However, it is possible to continue to supply (release) the game balls that have been paid out into the upper plate 301, and to prevent the player from feeling troublesome about the storage of the game balls in the upper plate 301. , By dedicating the player to the game ball driving operation and the game using the game ball that has been driven in, it is possible to suppress the interest in the game from being reduced, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 Can be done.

  The upper dish ball outlet 310d of the dish unit base 310 includes an opening 344a of the upper dish ball removal base 344 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. Via the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 via the door frame base unit 100. Further, in the lower dish ball supply port 310g, a lower dish ball supply rod 310h extending rearward from the rear side extends rearward through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 It is connected to the ball passage 344c of the upper dish ball removal base 344.

  In this example, as shown in the drawing, the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 310g is provided with an enlarged portion 310k that spreads leftward in a front view, and the lower dish ball supply port is provided by this enlarged portion 310k. The front end of 310g is in a state of spreading in the left-right direction. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging at the lower plate ball supply port 310g at an early stage due to the game balls in the lower plate 301 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310g, and more games The sphere can be supplied into the lower plate 301.

  The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (the shaft support side) bulges forward from the center in the front view, and the bottom surface is entirely lowered at the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. Yes. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 has a rear end on the pivot support side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310 c in the plate unit base 310, and a rear end on the open side of the upper plate ball discharge port 310 d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed so as to be located in the vicinity of the middle position in the vertical direction, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

  The upper plate body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 312a that can come into contact with the game ball from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 312a is electrically grounded (grounded) so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

  The upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper dish body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 protrudes forward, and is outside the open side of the upper dish body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed which penetrates in the vertical direction to which an upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, which will be described later, is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape that is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312 at the front end, and a decoration attachment portion 314b for attaching the upper plate front decoration member 316, and an upper portion at the center in the horizontal direction And an operation unit mounting portion 314c for mounting an operation unit 400, which will be described later, formed in a step shape lower than the decoration mounting portion 314b at a position in front of the plate body 312.

  In addition, although detailed description is omitted, the decoration mounting step 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314 is vertically positioned at positions corresponding to the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 attached to the lower surface. An opening or notch that penetrates in the direction is formed, and an opening through which a wiring cord that connects the operation unit 400 and the peripheral control unit 4140 can pass is formed in the operation unit mounting portion 314c. .

  The upper front decorative member 316 has a shape extending in a left-right direction along the front end of the upper dish upper panel 314, and the light guide part 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318 from the lower side to the plurality of openings 316a. And the upper plate upper lens 318 can be held between the upper plate upper panel 314 by being attached to the decorative attachment portion 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314. Further, an upper dish upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine lenses (prisms) on its surface is disposed below the upper dish upper lens 318, and an upper dish right decorative board 320 and an upper dish left decorative board 322 are disposed. Is sufficiently diffused so that the entire upper dish lens 318 can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly. As shown in the figure, the inner peripheral shape of the opening 316a in the upper dish front decorative member 316 is formed in a pear shape, and the light guide 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318 fitted into the opening 316a is the same. It is shaped, and by fitting this light guide portion 318a, it appears to have an appearance as if a pair-shaped gemstone was fitted into the opening 316a of the upper dish front decorative member 316. .

  The lower plate body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a that extends in a fan shape forward in a plan view and has a rear end that is formed in a straight line in the left-right direction and has a substantially lower center on the upper surface, and a center of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from the front and side ends excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate main body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest on the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side, and the side of the bottom plate 324a The upper end rising upward from the end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower dish top plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear part of the upper end.

  The lower plate body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324 a and the side plate 324 c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310 f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 is closed by an opening / closing shutter 352 of a lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 disposed on the back side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower plate cover 328 is formed in an inverted triangle shape with the outer shape in front view bulging downward and arcs on each side, and includes an opening 328a penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center. The inner shape of the opening 328 a is a shape that matches the shape formed by the front ends of the lower plate main body 324 and the lower plate top plate 326, and forms the opening of the lower plate 302. The lower plate cover 328 is made of translucent milky white resin, and although not shown, color LEDs are arranged on the back side at predetermined intervals, and the entire lower plate cover 328 emits light. It can be decorated.

  The dish side middle cover 330 is disposed on the left and right outer sides of the lower dish cover 328 in a front view, and is predetermined along a lower side of the lower dish cover 328 from a substantially center in the left and right direction to a side surface of the door frame 5 in a front view. The upper rear end extending to the side surface of the door frame 5 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side middle cover 330 includes an opening 330a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the dish side middle cover lens 332 is fitted into the opening 330a from the rear side. Further, the right (open side) dish side middle cover 330 in the front view has a lock hole 330b penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 near its outer end (right end). When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces the lock hole 330b.

  The dish side middle cover 330 further includes a bottom plate portion 330 c extending rearward from the lower front end thereof, and the rear end of the bottom plate portion 330 c is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is like that. In addition, a part of the lower side of the lower plate body 324 is covered by the bottom plate portion 330 c of the plate side middle cover 330.

  The dish-side outer cover 334 is disposed on the left and right outer sides of the dish-side middle cover 330 in a front view, and the front view has a substantially triangular shape along the side and bottom sides of the door frame 5 and opens rearward and upward. It is formed in a box shape. In this example, a handle insertion hole 334 a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the right (open side) dish side outer cover 334 at a position corresponding to the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side outer cover 334 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and a part thereof is attached to the dish unit base 310. Further, the lower side excluding the central portion of the lower plate body 324 is covered with the plate side outer cover 334 and the plate side middle cover 330.

  The upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 is provided for the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341 that is attached to the attachment hole 314a of the upper dish upper panel 314 so as to be movable back and forth, and the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341. And an operation piece 342 supported on the front side of the dish unit base 310 and moved upward and downward by the vertical movement of the operation piece 342, and a ball feed unit 580 described later. The upper plate ball removal slider 343 disposed on the rear side of the plate unit base 310 is provided with a contact piece 343a that comes into contact with the operation rod 583c of the ball removal member 583, and the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is slidable in the vertical direction. An upper dish ball removal base 344 that is supported and attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 310.

  Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 is omitted, an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper dish ball removal button 341 is arranged so that the upper dish ball removal button 341 is positioned at the upper moving end. The coil spring is urged upward. The upper dish ball removal slider 343 is biased upward by a coil spring provided between the upper dish ball removal base 344.

  The upper dish ball removal base 344 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 closes the upper dish ball discharge port 310d of the dish unit base 310 and simultaneously communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to open forward 344a (see FIG. 43), and a ball guiding channel 344b that communicates with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper dish ball removing base 344 and guides the game ball that has passed through the opening 344a downward and then guided backward (FIGS. 42 and 44) and after extending downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b, it extends toward the right side (axial support side) end portion in rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper dish ball removing base 344. And a ball passage 344c through which game balls can be distributed.

  In the upper dish ball removal base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper dish ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guide channel 344b communicated with the opening 344a is the ball of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper plate 301 is transferred to the ball feed unit 580 so as to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feed opening 113. Can be supplied to.

  Further, the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding channel 344b of the upper plate ball removing base 344 communicates with the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 through the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base body 110. In addition, the lower end extending to the shaft support side communicates with the notch 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game balls discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 are It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The rear end lower portion of the bulb passage 344c is closed by an upper dish bulb passage cover 345.

  When the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward is also provided. Move down. Then, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a moves the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 in a predetermined direction by moving the contact piece 343a downward. The partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other. Thereby, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 enter the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d through the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 and the ball guide path 344b. After that, the balls are discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball passage 344c of the upper dish ball base 344, and from the lower dish ball supply port 310g to the lower dish 302 via the lower dish ball supply rod 310h of the dish unit base 310. It can be discharged.

  Note that the ball removal member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is biased upward by the coil spring. Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent breakage and to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 583a.

  The lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 includes a lower dish ball removal base 351 disposed between the bottom plate portions 330 of the dish side middle cover 330 disposed on the lower side of the lower dish body 324 in front view and left and right. A plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 352 pivotally supported on the upper surface of the lower dish ball removal base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324, and rotating the opening / closing shutter 352 and lower dish A lower dish ball removal slider 353 supported on the upper surface of the ball removal base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower dish ball removal button 354 attached to the front end of the lower dish ball removal slider 353 are provided.

  The lower dish ball removal base 351 includes a base ball removal hole 351a penetrating in the vertical direction at a position facing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324. The open / close shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b, and a shutter ball extraction hole which is disposed on the front side of the closing portion 352a and penetrates in the vertical direction and can substantially coincide with the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b. 352b, and a closing portion 352a is biased by a coil spring between the lower dish ball removal base 351 and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b and the base ball removal hole 351a.

  Although not shown in detail, the open / close shutter 352 includes a contact pin that can come into contact with the lower dish ball removal slider 353. The lower dish ball removal slider 353 is rotated so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removal hole 352b move rearward, or the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring. Can be done.

  Further, as shown in the drawing, the lower dish ball removal button 354 is disposed at a position sandwiched between the left and right dish side middle covers 330 on the lower side in the horizontal direction of the lower dish cover 328 in the dish unit 300. The surface shape is such that the surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 and the plate side middle cover 330 is smoothly continuous.

  Further, the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 is configured such that the shutter ball removal hole 352b of the opening / closing shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 and the base ball removal hole 351a of the lower dish ball removal base 351. In order to hold in the moving position, a holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower dish ball removal slider 353 in a predetermined position is further provided.

  The lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower dish ball removal button 354 is moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower dish ball removal button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower dish cover 328 or the like. Yes, the lower plate ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, the game ball can be stored in the lower plate body 324 (the lower plate 302). When the lower dish ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pressed backward, the lower dish ball removal button 354 and the lower dish ball removal slider 353 slide rearward, and the lower dish ball removal slider 353 slides backward. The opening / closing shutter 352 rotates against the urging force of the coil spring so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removal hole 352b move rearward.

  Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates rearward, the shutter ball hole 352b overlaps with the lower plate ball hole 324b and the base ball hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball hole 352b and the lower plate ball hole are formed. 324b matches, and the game balls stored in the lower dish 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 300 through the lower dish ball removal hole 324b. When the lower dish ball removal slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removal hole 352b and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is locked (held), the lower dish ball removal button 354 is left in the opened state, and the shutter ball removal hole 352b is provided in the lower dish ball. The game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate ball removal button 354 is not kept depressed, while being held in a state where it matches the hole 3324b.

  On the other hand, when closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b, when the retracted lower dish ball removal button 354 is further pushed backward, the holding mechanism 355 releases the lower dish ball removal slide 353, and the lower dish The ball slide 353 can be slid, and the open / close shutter 352 urged by the coil spring in the direction to close the lower plate ball removal hole 324b by the coil spring, the closing portion 352a is moved to the lower plate by the urging force. It will rotate in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball removal hole 324b. Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower dish ball removal slide 353 slides forward, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower dish ball removal button 354 is lowered. It returns to the position of the closed state substantially coincident with the front surface of the dish cover 328 and the like, and the game ball can be stored in the lower dish 302.

  Note that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-described function, and a detailed description of the detailed mechanism is omitted.

  The lending unit 360 in the dish unit 300 includes a lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a lending remaining display portion 363 between the lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball lending unit 360 is pushed into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then pushes the ball lending button 361, a predetermined number of game balls are transferred to the dish unit 300. It can be lent out (paid out) into the upper plate 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the loaned portion is drawn and the cash balance or prepaid card that has been inserted is returned. Yes. Further, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

  The ball rental unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a ball rental unit mounting portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. The ball lending unit 360 includes a security cover mounting portion 364 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

[1-2G. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 to 50. 45 is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46 is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit as seen from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit as seen from the lower right front. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the pressing operation unit is pressed in the operation unit.

  The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, a dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and a press that can be pressed by the player An operation unit 405, which can accept a player's operation or move the dial operation unit 401 in accordance with the gaming state, and not only a game ball driving operation for the player It is intended to be able to participate in production during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a columnar pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular follower coupled to the lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disc-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 that is fixed to the rotating shaft of the drive gear 412, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support tube 416b that supports the pressing operation unit 405 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and the press operation unit 405 disposed in the button support tube 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 are arranged. A spring 418 that biases upward, and an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a and the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 can pass are provided. A base member 420 to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 422a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. And a lower cover 424 that is attached so as to sandwich the base member 420 under the upper cover 422 and covers the lower surface of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  In addition, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and the opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass, and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit attachment portion 314c in the dish unit 300, a surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the cover main body 426, and an operation portion holding member 416 attached to the upper surface of the base member 420. Dial support substrate 430 having a plurality of color LEDs 430b mounted at positions corresponding to the ring of dial operation portion 401 on the upper surface, having an opening 430a through which button support tube 416b and inner tube portion 401a of dial operation portion 401 can pass. Are fixed to the lower side of the base member 420 and A button decoration board 432 having a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting rolling, a pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting an operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a color LED 432d mounted on an upper surface directly below the pressing operation unit 405; It is equipped with.

  The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a material having translucency, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder part 401a extending in the vertical direction and outward from the upper end of the inner cylinder part 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extended surface, an outer tube portion 401c that extends downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b in a cylindrical shape, and is shorter than the inner tube portion 401a, and an outer tube And a flange portion 401d extending in an annular shape outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange 401 d in the dial operation unit 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422 a in the upper cover 422. Moreover, the dial operation part 401 is provided with the connection latching | locking part (refer FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder part 401a, and when the connection latching claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is latched, dial operation part 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

  Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes in the center direction from the inner wall of the inner cylinder portion 401a at a position that is lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner periphery of the inner cylinder portion 401a. As will be described in detail later, the protruding portion 401 f can come into contact with the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operation portion 401. By coming into contact with the portion 401f, the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) can be prevented from being further immersed into the inner cylinder portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

  As shown in the figure, the protrusion 401 f of the dial operation unit 401 and the stepped portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation unit 405 are such that the contact surfaces thereof become lower toward the center of the dial operation unit 401. In this case, the contact area when the two come into contact with each other is increased. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose upper end is closed, a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. A cap inner 408 disposed inside the button body 407 and sandwiched between the upper end of the button main body 406 and the button cap 407. The button main body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape whose bottom surface is narrowed downward, and the upper end of a coiled spring 418 is inserted into the truncated cone-shaped bottom surface. In addition, a through-hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided at the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape. It is like that.

  The button main body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b that extend downward from the lower outer periphery and protrude outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. By engaging with a locking projection 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward movement end is prevented so that the button body 406 does not come out of the button support 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button support tube 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 includes a contact portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button main body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) is prevented from rotating within the button support cylinder 416b. A predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the button main body 406 has a predetermined angle by the gap. It can be rotated within the range.

  Further, the button main body 406 includes a pressing detection piece 406c that extends downward from a different position on the outer peripheral lower part of the locking claw 406b and can be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decorative substrate 432. The pressure detection piece 406c is detected by the pressure detection sensor 432c when the button body 406 (the pressure operation unit 405) moves downward against the urging force of the spring 418.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation unit 405 has an outer diameter lower than a substantially center in the vertical direction smaller than the upper side, and a stepped portion 407a between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) has a lower diameter than the step portion 407a smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and an upper side than the step portion 407a is a dial operation portion. The inner cylindrical portion 401a 401 has a smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operation portion 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 contacts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401. Further, the button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder part 401e (see FIG. 50).

  Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. A character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 includes a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on an annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b in the operation portion holding member 416, and an annular slide that contacts the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. A moving surface 410a is provided. When the sliding gear 410 is inserted into the button support cylinder 416b and the sliding surface 410a is brought into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It can be done.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connection locking claws 410 b that extend upward from a position at which the upper ends face each other and project inward, and these connection locking claws 410 b are provided in the dial operation unit 401. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation unit 401 are connected to each other so as to be integrally rotatable by being locked with the connection locking portion 401e of the inner cylinder portion 401a.

  The driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that protrude downward from the lower end and are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432. Although details will be described later, the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c are arranged between each other. The rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of each of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c by the slit 410d formed therebetween. In this example, the circumferential lengths of the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410 and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle, and the drive gear 412 is driven to rotate by the dial drive motor 414 via the rotation shaft. Thus, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. In addition, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating forward and reverse rotations of the drive gear 412 (rotary shaft) in small increments by the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a predetermined rotation angle for a short period of time based on detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, so that the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is clicked. A feeling can be given.

  Further, the operation unit holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 includes an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. Button support cylinder 416b that slidably moves in the vertical direction, and a locking projection 416f that is formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and can be locked with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 ( 49 and FIG. 50), and a through hole 416c that transmits light from the LED 432d that passes through the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and is mounted on the button decoration board 432 to the button support cylinder 416b (press operation unit 405). And a rotation detection sensor 4 attached to the button decoration board 432 through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. An opening 416d through which 2a and 432b can pass, an opening 416e that passes through the bottom of the button support tube 416b in the vertical direction and is attached to the button decoration board 432, and an opening 416e that is desired from above, and downward from the bottom. And a pair of board holding claws 416f for locking and holding the extended button decorative board 432.

  Although not shown in detail, the operation portion holding member 416 is disposed in the button support tube 416b, and forms a predetermined amount of clearance in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and is locked. A plurality of abutting portions that can abut against the claw 406b are further provided. By this contact portion, the button main body 406 (the pressing operation portion 405) can be rotated within a predetermined angle range, and is not rotated in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although detailed explanation is omitted, the operation unit holding member 416 is appropriately provided with a screw hole for fixing to the base member 420, a positioning boss for positioning the base member 420 and the button decoration board 432, and the like. Is provided.

  The operation portion holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation portion 401) about a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 through the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing it on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so as to be rotatable. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. . A coiled spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button main body 406, and the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion) is arranged by the spring 418. 405) is biased upward.

  The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, and the operation unit 400 is not easily damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is hit strongly. The base member 420 has a lower concave portion 420b that can be fitted to the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 and is recessed upward, and a bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower concave portion 420b that vertically penetrates the operation holding member 416. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c that is disposed on the opposite side of the lower recess 420b across the opening 420a and that is recessed downwardly so as to accommodate at least the driven gear 410. I have. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b and is attached to the motor mounting portion 420d for attaching the dial drive motor 414, and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e projecting by a predetermined amount, and positioning holes 420f opening downward at the lower ends of the leg portions 420e are provided.

  The base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 disposed on the outer side of the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is located upward from a different position outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decoration board 430. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses and mounting holes for positioning each member at appropriate positions on the upper and lower surfaces thereof.

  The base member 420 is inserted into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side with respect to the central opening 420a. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower concave portion 420b, so that the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although the detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom of the upper recess 420c, in a state where the operation unit holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 placed on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate within the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  Further, the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof fitted to a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424 described later. 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 accommodated in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

  Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor mounting portion 420d, and heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transferred to the base member 420 side. Thus, the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. Thereby, the overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and includes an opening 422a having an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the flange portion 401d cannot pass. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation unit 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. The engaging claw 422b that protrudes downward is provided at both ends in the major axis direction, and the engaging claw 422b is engaged with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  The upper cover 422 includes a claw-like locking piece 422c that extends downward from the outer periphery of one side (front side in the pachinko machine 1) in the short axis direction (front and rear direction in the pachinko machine 1) and protrudes outward at the lower end. I have. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper dish front decoration member 316 in the dish unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper dish front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming out upward from the operation unit mounting portion 314c.

  The upper cover 422 is configured such that the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the base member 420 from the lower side with respect to the opening 422a in a state where the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration board 430, the dial member 401, and the like are attached. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass, it is possible to prevent the dial operation unit 401 from being pulled upward by the opening 422a.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an outer peripheral shape substantially coincident with the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that can be engaged with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at both upper portions in the major axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

  As shown in the figure, the cover main body 426 in the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that passes through the center in the vertical direction and through which the dial operation unit 401 (excluding the flange 401d) can pass, and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the tray unit 300, and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided. .

  The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing part 426b of the cover main body 426. Although not shown in detail, the operation unit 400 is attached to the operation unit attachment part 314c of the dish unit 300. In the state, the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached in a state where the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is slightly lifted from the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm). The cover body 426 can be elastically deformed to reduce the impact when it is pressed or hit.

  In the operation unit 400, the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300 with a predetermined screw with the front cover 428 removed, and then the cover body 426 is attached. The surface cover 428 is attached to the upper surface.

  In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 has a circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The length in the direction is the same length. In addition, the pair of rotation detection sensors 432 a and 432 b attached to the button decoration board 432 has an interval in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 that is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410. It is said that. Thereby, although details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in the detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection is detected. The direction in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotating can be detected from the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

  The operation unit 400 of the present example, as will be described in detail later, can rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. . Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 step by step by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, Rotation can be assisted, it can be prevented from turning on purpose, or a click can be added to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 forward and backward in small increments.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 50, in the operation unit 400 of this example, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed downward, the stepped portion 407 a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401 f of the dial operating unit 401, and the button cap Since 407 (press operation part 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder part 401e, the load applied to the press operation part 405 is dialed via the step part 407a and the protrusion part 401f. The operation unit 401 can be dispersed, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

  Further, the operation unit 400 of this example presses the pressing operation unit 405 so that the dial drive motor 414 is adjusted in small increments while the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating unit 401 are in contact with each other. By repeatedly rotating and reversing, the pressing operation unit 405 can be vibrated together with the dial operation unit 401, and the player can be surprised by the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 so that the game and production can be enjoyed. It has become.

[1-2H. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as seen from behind. As shown in the figure, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to a handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion hole 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300. A fixed and cylindrical handle base 502 whose front end bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis, an annular rotary handle main body rear 504 disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and a rotary handle A rotating handle body front 506 fixed to the front surface of the rear body 504 and integrally rotatable with the rotating handle body rear 504, and disposed on the front surface of the rotating handle body front 506 and fixed to the handle base 502. Rotating handle body front 506 and rotation in cooperation A front cover 508 for rotatably supporting the bundle body after 504, and a.

  Further, the handle device 500 includes a shaft member 510 that is mounted and fixed at the center of rotation in front of the rotary handle body so as to protrude from the front side to the rear side and has a non-circular bearing portion 510a at the rear end, and a bearing portion of the shaft member 510. A rotation position detection sensor 512 that has a detection shaft portion 512a that can be rotated by being engaged with 510a and that is non-rotatably fitted to the front surface of the handle base 502, and the rotation position detection sensor 512 is sandwiched between the handle base 502 and the rotation position detection sensor 512. A sensor support member 514 having a through hole 514a that is fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 and through which the detection shaft 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 can pass, a touch sensor 516 attached to the rear surface of the sensor support member 514, and a touch sensor 516 is a firing stop switch 518 mounted at a different position on the rear surface of the sensor support member 514, and a sensor support A single button 520 that is pivotally supported with respect to the member 514 and activates the firing stop switch 518, and a rotation handle body front 506 and a rotation handle body rear 504 that are arranged so as to cover the outer periphery of the shaft member 510 are initially rotated ( And a handle return spring 522 that urges it to return to a counterclockwise rotation end when viewed from the front.

  As shown in the drawing, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of the present example has a hemispherical round shape that expands to the front side on the front end side, and a cylindrical shape with the rear end open on the rear end side. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on a cylindrical outer periphery on the rear end side. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 have one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three protrusions 143 in the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. Has been placed. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the tube portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a is fitted to the protrusion 143.

  In the handle device 500, an arcuate slit 506a arranged concentrically with the rotation shaft is formed on the front surface 506 of the rotary handle, and three mounting bosses 508a protruding rearward are formed on the front end cover 508. These mounting bosses 508a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through a slit 506a in the front 506 of the rotary handle. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 506a in the front 506 of the rotating handle main body abuts on the mounting boss 508a of the front end cover 508 so that the rotation range of the rotating handle main bodies 504 and 506 is restricted.

  Further, in the handle device 500, a locking protrusion 506b protruding rearward is formed on the rotary handle main body front 506, and one end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking protrusion 506b. And the other end side (rear end side) of the handle return spring 522 is locked to the sensor support member 514, and the rotary handle body 504 is held by the handle return spring 522. , 506 are biased to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

  The handle device 500 of this example is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 is inclined so that the attachment surface faces outward (open side) in a plan view as viewed from above. The device 500 is also tilted outward in plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1). 5 to be fixedly attached. Thereby, it is easy for a player to grasp the handle device 500, and there is no sense of incongruity in the rotation operation, and it is easy to perform the rotation operation.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the rotational handle main bodies 504 and 506 (the handle device 500) are rotated, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is detected via the shaft member 510. The shaft portion 512a rotates. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the ball hitting device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. Thus, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 and the front end cover 508 are conductively plated, and the touch sensor 516 detects contact when the player touches the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 and the like. It is like that. When the touch sensor 516 detects the player's contact, when the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 are rotated, the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength according to the rotation, and the game ball Can be typed in. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be driven, It is possible to reduce a load (burden) related to the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed by preventing the player from playing a game different from the original game.

  Further, when the player presses the single button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 stops the rotational driving of the firing solenoid 654. It is like that. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle apparatus 500, while launching of a game ball can be stopped temporarily, before operating the single button 520 by operating the single button 520 release operation. A game ball can be launched with a driving strength.

  In the handle device 500 of this example, the rotational operation of the rotary handle main bodies 504 and 506 is electrically detected by the rotational position detection sensor 512, and then the emission control is performed based on the detection of the rotational position from the rotational position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational driving strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled by the unit 4120, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 as in a conventional pachinko machine, It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism so that the door frames 5 are linked to each other when the door frame 5 is closed and the linkage is released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the configuration relating to the pachinko machine 1 is simplified. Can be eliminated, and the occurrence of defects in the joint unit can be eliminated. And it is capable to suppress.

[1-2I. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as seen from the back. FIG. 54 is a front view showing the foul cover unit with the front cover removed.

  A foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to a rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100 and is fired by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 to be described later, or a ball hitting device 650. Nevertheless, the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 having a front side opened and having a plurality of game ball passages therein, and a front cover 544 closing the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 includes a first sphere inlet 542a that is disposed in the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a front end of the cover base 542 that communicates with the first sphere inlet. A first sphere passage 542b that expands to the right as viewed from the front, a second sphere inlet 542c that is arranged outside the first sphere inlet 542a (on the right in the rear view) and is larger than the first sphere inlet 542a, and a second A second ball inlet 542c that communicates with the ball passage 542d and extends downward and slopes downward toward the lower right corner when viewed from the front is provided. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. As shown in the drawing, the second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 has a height of a portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end, which is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball. An accommodation space 546 that can accommodate a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 can be guided to the upper part in the vicinity of the downstream of the foul ball inlet 542e and the foul ball inlet 542e, which is disposed at a substantially central upper part in the left-right direction and opens upward, and communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e. A foul ball passage 542f. The cover base 542 includes an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece 542g contacts the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening / closing crank 793. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, and is disposed in the upper left corner of the front view and communicates with the first spherical passage 542b of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first sphere outlet 544a and the second sphere outlet 544b that is disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second sphere passage of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544 a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310 c of the plate unit 300 through the notch 101 a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the rear end of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit 300 is connected to the second ball outlet 544b through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 of the present example passes the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage 542b. 544a can be supplied to the upper plate 101 through the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. Further, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d. From 544b, it can be supplied to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply bowl 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 will be described in detail later, but when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is positioned below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball fired by the hit ball launching device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball inlet 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges (supply) the game balls received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d. ) Can be.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 of the present example forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and can swing by a game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. A swing member 548 pivotally supported by the shaft, a full tank detection sensor 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and a spring that biases the swing member 548 in a non-detection state by the full tank detection sensor 550. 552. As shown in FIG. 54, the swinging member 548 is pivotally supported at the lower end with respect to the cover base 542, and the upper end is rotated to the left in the front view. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Further, the swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a position where the swinging member 548 is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the swinging member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a protruding outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by a full tank detection sensor 550. .

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-like earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 when viewed from the back. , And can remove static electricity generated by rolling resistance caused by circulation of game balls.

  In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540. Even if the inside of the upper plate 301 is full, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, the game ball stagnates in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770 When the upstream normal passage 773 is also full, the game ball flows to the full tank passage 775 side via the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79). From the full tank outlet 776 to the second bulb inlet 542c, the second bulb passage 542d, and the second bulb outlet 544 of the foul cover unit 540. It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via the.

  When the inside of the lower plate 302 of the tray unit 300 is filled with game balls, the game balls can no longer come out from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and are stuck in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. Game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and more game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548 and resists the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 will move to the left. When the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 stops the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700, and also provides the player with a dish unit. Notification is made to prompt the player to discharge the game balls in 300 to the outside.

  When the game ball in the storage space 546 (the lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 is returned to a substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the full detection sensor 550 detects the detection piece 548a. The non-detection is made, and the payout of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 is resumed.

[1-2J. Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 57. FIG. 55 is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. FIG. 56 is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the rear after removing the rear case. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the tray unit 300 one by one to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 can be pulled out to the lower dish 302 by operating the upper dish ball removal button 341.

  In this ball feed unit 580, game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 that has a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b that opens to the lower side of the entrance 581a and is opened at the rear, and the rear end of the front cover 581 is closed and the front is opened. A rear cover 582 having a hitting ball supply port 582a for supplying a game ball that has penetrated in the front-rear direction and entered from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the rear cover 582 and the front cover. A partition 58 that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581. A ball-extracting member 583 having a and a game ball on the partitioning portion 583a of the ball-extracting member 583 are sent one by one to the hitting supply port 582a of the rear cover and extend vertically between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. A ball feed member 584 that is supported so as to be rotatable about an axis, and a ball feed solenoid 585 that rotates the ball feed member 584. In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feeding member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in front view, and the ball removing member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right side. Has been placed.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 includes an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b when viewed from the front. An operating rod 583c of a ball punching member 583, which will be described later, extends from 581c to the front. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a. When the front cover 581 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guide channel 344b in the upper dish ball removal base 344 is assembled. Is formed to close.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 has a partition portion 583a and a partition portion 583a which are separated from the entrance port 581a and the ball exit port 581b below the entrance port 581a and whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feed member 584. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584 and bends from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A pivot collar 583b that is pivotally supported, a rod-shaped actuation collar 583c that projects forward from the upper end of the pivot collar 583b, and a side surface of the pivot collar 583b below the actuation collar 583c. And a weight portion 583d protruding to the opposite side to the partition portion 583a. An operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 55), and a ball feed opening of the door frame base body 110 The upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300 is in contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 584a and a blocking portion 584a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583. A sphere holding portion 584b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end to the rotation axis side, and a rod-like flange portion 584c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 584b are provided. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b in the ball feeding member 54 are each formed within an angle range of about 90 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized to hold one game ball. The ball feed member 584 rotates about the rotation axis when the flange 584c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585. ing.

  In the ball feeding member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a. It rotates between the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 582a to the hit ball launching device 650 and enters the partition portion 583a from the advance port 581a. The ball is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) by the blocking portion 584a and stays on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the flange portion 584c side closes the hitting ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  Further, the ball feed unit 580 is moved back and forth by a ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip is swung vertically by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 585 and a movement of the tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 which is swung vertically. And a ball feed crank 587 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 and extends in the left-right direction, and the side of the engagement portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operation rod 586. Is disposed on the opposite side and is supported between a front cover 581 and a rear cover 582 so as to be pivotable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a ball feed member 584 extending upward from the shaft 587b. And a transmission portion 587c engaged with a rod-shaped flange portion 584c (see FIG. 57) protruding downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center. In this example, a flapper solenoid in which a ball feeding solenoid 585 and a ball feeding operating rod 586 are integrally formed is used.

  The ball feed unit 580 of this example transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 586 that swings by the driving of the ball feed solenoid 585 that moves forward and backward by the ball feed actuating rod 586 and the ball feed crank 587. 584 can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the tip of the swing is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 654.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 that is pivotally supported in the ball feeding unit 580 of the present example is configured to apply a moment that rotates counterclockwise by the weight portion 583c. The operation rod 583c protruding forward comes into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300, so that its rotation is restricted. In a normal state, the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 partitions the entrance 581a and the ball removal port 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball removal port 581b side. Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 downward, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a and comes into contact. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  In this way, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, the ball removal member 583 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the entrance by the partition portion 583a. The partition between the ball outlet 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball outlet passage 344c of the upper dish ball outlet base 344 of the dish unit 300. Then, it is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

  Since the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 against which the operating rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 abuts is biased upward by a coil spring, the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a. However, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged. It is possible to prevent the partition portion 583a from bouncing back.

[1-2K. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 is demonstrated mainly with reference to FIG.22 and FIG.23. This glass unit 590 has an opening of approximately the same size as the gaming window 101 and has an annular, vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 and two sheets for closing the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592. A transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 106). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 has four pieces 592a which are arranged apart from each other in the vertical direction at the left and right ends and extend outward in a plate shape, and a plate which extends in the horizontal direction along the lower end and extends downward. Shaped locking piece 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end to engage with the vertical bent protrusion 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. After that, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190. It is detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 23, FIG. 28, etc.).

  As described above, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 for storing game balls arranged vertically below the gaming window 101 having a vertically long elliptical shape, For driving a game ball stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 disposed on the rear side of the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101 on the right side of the lower plate 302 in front view. A handle device 500 is arranged. The door frame 5 includes a right side decoration unit 200, a left side decoration unit 2200, and an upper decoration unit 280 so as to surround the left and right sides and the upper side of the gaming window 101, and surrounds the lower side of the gaming window 101. Thus, the dish unit 300 is disposed so as to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220 with the side speaker cover 290 interposed therebetween, and the appearance of each unit 200, 220, 280, 300 is rounded. Appearance with continuous integration.

  Further, the door frame 5 emits the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322 and the like provided in the respective units 200, 220, 280, 300, thereby causing the gaming window 101 to emit light. In addition, light emission decoration can be performed with an arbitrary light emission color so as to surround the opening 328a of the lower plate cover 328. Of the LEDs mounted on the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, and 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, on the rear side of the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250. By turning on and off the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256 that are arranged, the mode of the light-emitting decoration surrounding the game window 101 can be changed.

  Specifically, the light emission modes of the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a in the side lenses 210, 250 and the light emission of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b. If the modes are the same emission mode (the emission color and the emission pattern are the same), the overall illumination pattern can be substantially uniform, and the emission modes are different so as to emphasize the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. If it is, it can be set as the light emission decoration which was interrupted in the circumferential direction, and if those light emission modes are different so as to emphasize the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b, it shines radially around the center of the game window 101. It can be made into a light-emitting decoration, and can attract a player's interest strongly.

  In the door frame 5, the base member 420 that supports the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is made of aluminum alloy by die-casting, and the base member 420 is attached to the plate unit 300 by the cover body 426. Since the operation unit mounting portion 314c is suspended, when the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 is hit, the cover body 426 is elastically deformed to bend and the base member 420 is lowered. The contact with the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c through the cover 424 can alleviate the impact on the dial operation unit 401, the pressing operation unit 405, and the like, and can prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged. It can be done.

  Furthermore, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is in a state in which the pressing operation unit 405 is inserted into the annular dial operation unit 401, and the dial operation unit 401 is included together even if a player or the like tries to strike the pressing operation unit 405 strongly. Therefore, the impact hit by the dial operation unit 401 can be dispersed, and the impact can be prevented from being concentrated to be hard to break. In addition, the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 that rotatably supports the dial operation portion 401 is attached to the opening 420a of the metal base member 420 so as to slightly protrude from the upper surface from below. When the impact hitting the portion 401 is transmitted to the operation portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) via the driven gear 410 and the operation portion holding member 416 is bent downward, the lower surface of the driven gear 410 is the outer periphery of the metal opening 420a. Since the base member 420 can contact the upper surface and receive the impact, it is possible to reduce the load on the operation portion holding member 416 and to prevent the gear rail 416a from being crushed by the impact. The durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is attached to the plate unit 300 from the upper side, even if the operation unit 400 is damaged, the operation unit 400 can be easily replaced. It is possible to prevent the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 from being lowered by replacing the unit 400.

[1-2L. Luminous decoration on door frame]
Next, the light emission decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 is a front view showing the arrangement of the LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. FIG. 60 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the dish unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, and 300 is provided with a decoration board 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, and 322 on which LEDs are mounted. The outer periphery can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery excluding the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of peripherals in the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b extend along a radial axis centered around the lower portion of the gaming center 101 in the left-right direction center. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other. The peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 are surrounded by side decorative frames 202 and 242 that are opaque (in this example, have a plating layer on the surface). Is surrounded.

  Side inner lenses 212 and 252 are arranged on the rear side of these side lenses 210 and 250, and the body inner portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are arranged with respect to the rear surfaces of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. The plate-shaped light guides 212b and 252b are formed so as to extend as far as possible to the rear surfaces of the radiation lens units 210b and 250b. Has been. Although not shown in detail in the main body portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, a plurality of fine prisms are formed on the surfaces thereof, and the decorative substrates 214, 216 and 254 arranged on the rear side. , 256 can diffuse light.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are provided with peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b are provided. In this example, LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiating lens portions 210b, 250b are white LEDs (upper decorations). Normal luminance lower than that of the LED 286b of the upper decorative board 286 in the unit 280). In addition, the two LEDs 214c arranged above and below corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 in the upper decorative board 214 on the right side are red LEDs.

  In this example, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White paint, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the lights from the player side are reflected by the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and deteriorating in appearance, and by reflecting the light from each of the LEDs 210a and 210b that emit light to the player side by the substrate, The lenses 210 and 250 can be brightly decorated.

  Next, as described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the upper side of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 facing the center side in the left-right direction. The upper center of the gaming window 101 is decorated. The upper decoration unit 280 includes a large central lens 282 formed in a jewel shape in the center, side lenses 284 formed in a wing shape on the diagonally upper left and right sides of the central lens 282, and lower left and right sides of the central lens 282. And a lower lens 289 arranged. The central lens 282 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed of a blue-tinged transparent member, and the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are formed of a white (milky white) member having translucency. . Thereby, the inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the central lens 282 can be visually recognized from the player side.

  The inner lens 283 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of fine lenses (including prisms) formed on the surface, and can diffuse and refract light, so that the light passes through the transparent central lens 282. When the inner lens 283 is viewed, the central lens 282 appears to be deep, and the central lens 282 itself appears to shine. Further, the upper decorative substrate 286 disposed on the rear side of the inner lens 283 is not visible from the player side.

  The upper decorative board 286 in the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of (six in this example) LEDs 286 a corresponding to the central lens 282 and disposed behind the inner lens 283, and the rear lenses 284 and the lower lens 289. And a plurality of LEDs 286b (in this example, two for the side lens 284 and one for the lower lens 289, respectively). In this example, the LED 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 is a full color LED, and the LED 286b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 is a high-intensity white LED. In addition, the front surface of the upper decorative substrate 286 is also white, so that the same operational effects as described above can be achieved.

  Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, a plurality of jewel-like light guides 318 a in the upper dish upper lens 318 are formed along the front end of the upper dish 301 so as to connect the lower ends of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240. The front decoration member 316 is lined up so as to be exposed through the opening 316a. When viewed from the front, the upper side front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper lens 318 allow the outer side of the lower side of the gaming window 101 to be shown in the figure. (Lower) is designed to decorate. Below the upper dish upper lens 318, an upper dish upper inner lens 319 having a projection corresponding to each light guide 318a is disposed. The upper dish upper lens 318 of the dish unit 300 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the upper dish upper inner lens 319 is formed of a transparent member.

  The upper dish upper inner lens 319 of the dish unit 300 has a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface (upper surface) corresponding to the light guide portion 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318, and diffuses and refracts light. In the same way as the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280, the light guide 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318 is given a deep and sparkling brightness to guide it. The light part 318a looks like a jewel. In addition, the upper dish upper decorative substrate 320 and the upper dish left decorative substrate 322 are not seen from the player side through the light guide 318a by the upper dish upper inner lens 319.

  On the upper surface of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 in the plate unit 300, a plurality of (six in this example) are provided so as to correspond to the light guide portions 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318. LEDs 320a and 322a are provided. In this example, the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper pan right decorative substrate 320 and the upper pan left decorative substrate 322 are full-color LEDs. Moreover, the surface (upper surface) of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 is also white, so that the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 includes a ring-shaped dial operation unit 401 having translucency and a columnar pressing operation unit having translucency disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. 405, and a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 are disposed below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration board 430 is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs 430 b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED with high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  By the way, the door frame 5 of this example corresponds to the peripheral lens portions 210 a and 250 a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the gaming window 101. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are a first annular group 102 (within the hatched area in FIGS. 59 and 60) close to the gaming window 101, and a second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102. (In the range of the cross hatch in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60), the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are made to emit light appropriately, so as to surround the gaming window 101, and are substantially concentric. A plurality (two in this example) of light emission can be decorated. In other words, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are caused to emit light, the hatched area near the gaming window 101 is illuminated in a ring shape, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are activated. When all the lights are emitted, the cross hatch area away from the game window 101 is illuminated in a ring shape.

  In the door frame 5, the LEDs 214 b, 216 b, 254 b, 256 b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210 b, 250 b of the side lenses 210, 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are the first annular group 102 and the first ring group 102. A radial group 104 (within the shaded area in FIGS. 59 and 60) that extends radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the gaming window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the bicyclic group 103 in the circumferential direction. ing. The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104 can appropriately emit light so that the outside of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission in addition to the annular shape of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The light emitting decoration can be decorated so as to be divided in the circumferential direction. Further, the LEDs 214c corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 on the upper right side in the right side decoration unit 200 constitute the upper right side group 105. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 214c, The portion (side sub-lens 228) can be decorated with light emission.

  In the door frame 5, the LED 286 a corresponding to the central lens 282 in the upper decorative unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the gaming window 101 emits light at the upper center of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. Group 106 is designated. The LED 286a of the upper central group 106 can appropriately emit light so that the upper center of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission, and the reference point of the annular light emitting decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 It is possible to make such a luminous decoration. The LED 286 b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper central side group 107 that decorates the left and right sides of the upper central group 106. The LED 286b of the upper central side group 107 is appropriately lit to decorate the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106, or above the gaming window 101 (including the upper part). It is possible to decorate the light emission in a V shape.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 320 a corresponding to the light guide 318 a of the upper dish upper lens 318 fitted in the plurality of openings 316 a of the upper dish front decoration member 316 in the dish unit 300 decorating the lower side of the gaming window 101. , 322 a is a lower group 108 that illuminates and decorates the outer periphery of the lower side of the gaming window 101 so as to connect the left and right lower ends of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 320a and 322a of the lower group 108, the lower side of the gaming window 101 and the front edge of the upper plate 301 can be decorated with light emission, and the LEDs 214a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 , 216a, 254a, and 256a, the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 can be illuminated and decorated in a ring shape.

  In the door frame 5, the LEDs 430 b and 432 d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged at the lower center of the gaming window 101 and in the upper center of the dish unit 300 An operation unit group 109 for decorating light emission is used. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be illuminated and decorated. The player can be informed.

  The light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, and 109 to which they belong. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a to 102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250, respectively. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. It has been.

  The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into 8 systems 104a to 104h for each of the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250. Also, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the upper right side group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the six LEDs 286a belonging to the upper center group 106 are divided into three systems, a lower portion 106a, an upper right portion 106b, and an upper left portion 106c. The six LEDs 286b belonging to the upper central side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

  Further, the twelve LEDs 320a and 322a belonging to the lower group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d, three by three from the right side when viewed from the front. The five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 include four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405, and a pair of left and right 109a and front and rear 109b. The two LEDs, one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405, is divided into three systems. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, 432d is divided into 42 systems. ing.

  Meanwhile, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, and 432d are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 432d belongs are further provided with three independent RGB systems in order to emit full color, and 3 in actual light emission control. It has doubled 84 systems. The LEDs 286b and 430b are high-intensity white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 107b, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 286b and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high luminance. Two systems are connected to each other. In actual light emission control, the number of systems is doubled to 8 systems.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs having normal luminance, and belong to the eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a red LED and belongs to the two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b by these LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled by each system.

  Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting / flashing is controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). . As a result, a rich light-emitting effect can be achieved.

  As the lighting effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color) to spread outwardly around the gaming window 101. Light emission effect, or conversely, light emission effect that converges from the outside toward the gaming window 101 by emitting light sequentially from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color), Alternatively, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can emit light at the same time, so that a light-emitting effect or the like can be performed so that the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 emits light widely.

  In addition, by coordinating with the LEDs (detailed illustration is omitted) provided on the front surface of the game board 4 and the front unit 2000, the LEDs of the game board 4 and the LEDs of the first annular group 102 close to the game window 101 are provided. With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102, it becomes possible to provide a more expressive light-emitting effect, which can attract the player's interest strongly, It is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by delighting the player.

  Moreover, in the 1st cyclic | annular group 102, the 2nd cyclic | annular group 103, and the lower group 108, light circulates the outer periphery of the game window 101 by light-emitting each system | strain 102a-102j, 103a-103j, 108a-108d suitably. Such as a light emission effect, or light moving toward the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, or light from the central lens 282 along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. It is possible to produce a light emission effect that moves. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions). However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light circulates around the outer periphery of the gaming window 101.

  Further, by emitting light only from the radial group 104, a light emission effect is produced in which the light is emitted radially around the gaming window 101, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104. To produce a light emission effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or to cause the radial group 104 to emit light (light on / flash) while the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103 emits light. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect that gives an accent to the light emitting decoration. Further, by emitting light individually from each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104, it is possible to produce a light emission effect that the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b circulate.

  Further, the central lens 282 as a whole emits light by simultaneously emitting light from the respective systems 106a to 106c of the upper central group 106, and light is rotated in the central lens 282 by sequentially emitting light from each of the systems 106a to 106c. Light emission effects can be performed. In addition, the upper center side group 105 emits light so that the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are illuminated and decorated with high brightness, so that the player has an opportunity and a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probable game) State, short-time gaming state, short-time gaming state when probability change, etc.) can be performed. The lower lens 289 is arranged so as to irradiate light from the player's head toward the player, so that the player can easily notice the light emission of the high-brightness LED 286b. .

  Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 can emit light by decorating the front edge of the upper plate 301 by appropriately emitting light from each of the systems 108a to 108d of the lower group 108 or by emitting light in association with the operation group 109. Or a light-emitting effect that prompts the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405. In addition, the system 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 is appropriately caused to emit light so as to prompt the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or guide the rotation operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper central group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is a full color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to produce a lighting effect with different gradations such as emission color and brightness for each 109 or for each system 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, 109c. A rich lighting effect can be performed.

  Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a are the first close to the gaming window 101. Since the ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 far from the game window 101 outside the first ring group 102 can be made to emit light, a plurality of outsides of the game window 101 (game area 1100) are arranged. The pachinko machine can be decorated in a substantially concentric circle shape, and the light surrounding the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 can produce a light emitting effect that is not available in conventional pachinko machines, and attracts the player's attention strongly. 1 can be set.

  In addition, one peripheral lens portion 210a, 250a is provided with two systems of LEDs arranged in a substantially concentric circle, and even if the appearance looks like one, each LED of the two systems can emit light. Since the light emission decoration can be made substantially concentrically, it is difficult to imagine the aspect of the light emission decoration from the appearance, and the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a (the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit) by the light emission decoration can be made. 240) can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention strongly by increasing the impact of the light emitting decoration can be obtained.

[1-3. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 62 is a rear view of the main body frame. FIG. 63 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front, FIG. 65 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the outer frame 2 and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can hold the game board 4 detachably from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrates in the front-rear direction to have a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, and a main body frame base An upper shaft bracket 630 and a lower shaft bracket 640 that are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end portion of the front view 600 and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, and the main body frame base 600. A ball hitting device 650 for driving a game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front surface of the game board 4 and a game ball delivered to the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 And the flow of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. Open the ball exit It includes a unit 790, a.

  The main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and includes various control boards for controlling electrical components provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except the game board 4, a power supply board 851, and the like. Are combined into a unit board unit 800, a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and opens and closes the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 68 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. FIG. 69 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of synthetic resin, and the outer shape of the front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 and is approximately in the front-rear direction. It is formed to have a certain depth D (see FIG. 65). Accordingly, when the main body frame base 600 is faced down when attaching the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the depth D of the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed, and workability relating to the assembly of the main body frame 3 is improved. Can be improved.

  As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 has a gaming board holding port through which the entire range of about 3/4 penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction from the upper part to the lower part so that the outer periphery of the gaming board 4 can be fitted and held. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and a recess from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear, and the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5. Door frame protruding piece 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the frame, the upper bent protruding piece 167 protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side outside protruding rearward of the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153. And an engaging groove 603 into which the bent protrusion 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spread in a plate shape in the left-right direction. 604 and a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. By this peripheral wall portion 605, the free ends (upper and lower left ends in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is like that.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall part 604, and a game board placement part 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and the game board placement part 606. A game board of the game board 4 which is formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 and a positioning projection 607 which protrudes upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can come into contact with the upper end of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction. A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be fitted into the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 to restrict the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict the right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. Yes. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 when viewed from the front will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is mounted with a bracket for mounting the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 on the rear surface of the free end portion (upper left and right end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. Part 610 (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 and the like, the bracket mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs whose front side extends vertically and horizontally, and attaches the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 with sufficient strength. Can be done. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through-hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and is formed at the lower left of the cylinder lock through-hole 611 in front view. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits the positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from the door frame base main body 110 and the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 that is formed in the lower left of the fitting groove 612 when viewed from the front are accommodated. A solenoid housing recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step further to the rear side than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, The ball striking device 650 is attached to the front surface from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 is accommodated in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state in which the ball hitting device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, and the like, A foul space 626 extending downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542 e in the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542 e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  The main body frame base 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 in a front view, and on the upper side of the opening 614 and on the left and right sides of the front view. A through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 66 and the like), and passes through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, so that the lower rear wall 604 The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. The plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having a front wall on the front side.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 has a fixture support portion that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the upper front end of the lower rear wall 604 above the opening 614. 616 and a stopper 617 that protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 when viewed from the front and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan shape around an axis that is pivotally supported by the fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. And an operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise when viewed from the front). The game board fixing tool 690 is pivotally supported on the fixing tool support 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixing tool 690 in the clockwise direction in front view. Then, the fixed piece 690a protrudes upward from the game board mounting portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 mounted on the game board mounting portion 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. Further, the game board fixing tool 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is regulated by contacting the stopper 617. It has become.

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the lower rear surface from the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressure is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 includes three pieces penetrating vertically in the front-rear direction on the inner side (axial support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right side (open side) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 in front view. A door hook hole 620 and a lock locking hole 621 that penetrates in the front-rear direction under the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and is arranged in the left-right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and in the approximate center in the vertical direction. The upper and center door hook holes 620 and the lock locking holes 621 are engaged with and locked by the locking projections 1004 provided at the upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000, and the front end frame 602. The locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side of the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 protrude forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. 1010 protrudes forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 descends slowly and obliquely downward from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the rear view, and then the lower rear wall 604 at the substantially center in the left-right direction. Is provided with a main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 that allows the game ball to circulate from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly above. The main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 is closed at the rear side by the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and the details of the game ball flowing through the ball extraction passage 741d in the prize ball device 740 will be described later. It comes to circulate.

  A plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the back, and the back cover shaft support portion 623 rotatably supports the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. A mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 obliquely upper left in the front view of the opening 614, and the locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) of the peripheral wall portion 605 in front view. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, the main body frame base 600 has mounting bosses and mounting holes for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, and the like as appropriate. Is formed.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 3 by using predetermined screws, respectively, to the metal mounting portions 610 on the upper left and lower rear surfaces of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. Thus, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported to the outer frame 2 to be openable and closable.

  First, the upper shaft support metal 630 is attached to the upper metal attachment part 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment part 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like extension extending forward from the upper end of the attachment part 631. A front extending portion 632, a shaft supporting pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 632, and a shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side in front of the shaft supporting pin 633. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63 and the like) penetrating in the vertical direction is inserted, and the door frame 5 is pivoted downward from the left end of the front extension portion 632 when viewed from the front. And a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 107) for restricting the end. In the upper shaft support 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 is disposed below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. A main body frame shaft support bracket 644. The door frame shaft bracket 642 in the lower shaft bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and forward from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a. A plate-like front extending portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that penetrates in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and a front extending portion And a stopper 642d that is erected upward from the left end of the front view 642a and restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support 642 is integrally formed with a mounting portion 642a, a front extension 642b, and a stopper 642d by bending a single metal plate.

  Further, the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends from the bottom of the mounting portion 644a in a plate-like mounting portion 644a. A front extending portion 644b extending forward and a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. The main body frame shaft support 644 is also integrally formed with an attachment portion 644a and a front extension portion 644b formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support 640 of this example is in a state in which the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction. The front extension 642b of the shaft support 642 and the front extension 644b of the main body frame support 644 are attached to the lower metal attachment 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance therebetween in the vertical direction. It is like that.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support bracket 640 Are positioned on the same axis, and the body frame shaft support hole of the body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extending portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support bracket 21, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is placed on the outer frame 2. The main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable by being inserted into the support hole 20 c of the upper support fitting 20.

  Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640. The metal fitting 642c is coaxially positioned, and the door is such that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support metal 642 in the lower shaft support metal 640. After the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is placed on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction. When the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. Once the door shaft 5 is slid downward and the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 are vertically overlapped, the shaft pin 155 is slid upward to open the door. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Hitting ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launcher 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the ball striking device in the main body frame. FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the ball striking device in the main body frame. This hitting ball launching device 650 can drive the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

  In the ball hitting device 650 of the present embodiment, a metal plate launch base 652 attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the main body frame base 600, and a rotary drive shaft 654a projecting forward on the lower rear surface of the launch base 652 are projected. The launching solenoid 654, the hitting ball 656 fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, the tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and the movement locus of the tip 658. The tip of the hitting ball 656 between the firing rail 660 that extends obliquely to the upper left in front view and is attached to the front surface of the firing base 652 and the firing rail 660 at the upper base end of the firing rail 660. The ball stop that holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660 by forming a gap through which the game ball cannot pass at the same time as the ball 658 can pass. The ball 66 槌 (tip 658) is prevented from rotating toward the firing rail 660 from the hitting position where the game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 can be hit by the piece 662 and the ball stop piece 662. A stopper 664.

  The firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 is not shown in detail, but the drive shaft 654a is reciprocally rotated at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the ball striking ball 656 of the ball striking device 650 includes a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a tip extending from the fixed portion 656a in a gentle arc shape with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a A collar portion 656b that faces the normal direction and has a collar portion 656b fixed to the tip, and a stopper portion 656c that extends to the opposite side with respect to the collar portion 656b and can be brought into contact with the stopper 664c. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball basket 656 is in contact with the stopper 664, the tip of the tip 658 is rotated to the firing rail 660 side from the hitting position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). Being regulated.

  In addition, the launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launcher 650 has a loose arc shape that is recessed downward so as to be substantially along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98) and in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center is shaped like a V-shape, and the game ball hit by the hitting ball 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  Further, the hitting ball launcher 650 includes a stopper cover 666 that covers the front surface of the stopper 664 that can restrict the rotation end of the hitting ball 656 toward the hitting ball position, and a rotation of the hitting ball 656 at a position away from the hitting ball position. And a stopper 668 for restricting an end (a rotation end in a clockwise direction in a front view). The hitting ball launching apparatus 650 of this example has the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber, so that it can absorb the impact when the hitting ball basket 656 abuts and suppress the generation of noise due to the abutment. Be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, and the like, the hit ball launching device 650 of the present example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, the lower side of the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601) is located outside the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 that extends downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed between the lower end of the rail 1111. The hitting ball launching device 650 of this example hits the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by firing the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the front view from the launch rail 660. Can be done. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 A game ball that has not been driven into a foul ball falls into the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

  In addition, the hitting ball launching device 650 is configured such that the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the firing control unit 4120 with a driving strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580 is used. It is made to drive in synchronism with the drive. Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hit ball launcher 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball, and the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven from this state. When is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 is sent to the ball hitting device 650 side, so that the ball launching solenoid 654 of the ball feed unit 580 is driven almost simultaneously. By turning on (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting ball cage 656. ing.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. 72 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit as seen from the exploded position. FIG. 78 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view showing a sphere circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

  The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores a game ball supplied from the island facility side to the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then gives a predetermined payout instruction. Is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1. The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank 720 which is attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receives and stores game balls supplied from the island facility side. And a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and a predetermined payout of the game balls arranged by the tank rail unit 730 The payout device 740 to be paid out based on the instruction, and the game ball paid out by the payout device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit, and the game ball to be paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of game balls And a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching to the lower plate 302 side.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding bracket for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the winning ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fastening and fixing the back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface thereof, and the back cover 900 on the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a in rear view. The back cover fastening hole 780b is formed (see FIGS. 73 and 75).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape so that the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 are along the front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are arranged on the upper side. In addition, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a reverse L shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view with the upper side of the main body frame base 600 as shown in the figure. And is integrally formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 has a peripheral wall portion 710a that extends rearward substantially along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and a predetermined width that extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a and is disposed in a substantially identical plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710 a is formed to extend backward from a position that is one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The award ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space that can accommodate the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

  The prize ball base 710 includes a tank attachment part 711 for attaching the prize ball tank 720 to the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall part 710a, and the side of the tank attachment part 711 (right side in the rear view). External terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the rear end of the upper side of the rear wall portion 710b, and the rear side of the vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b A prize ball apparatus mounting portion 714 for attaching the prize ball apparatus 740, a prize ball passage 715 for guiding a game ball paid out from the prize ball apparatus 740 downward adjacent to the prize ball apparatus attachment portion 714, and a rear wall. An attachment locking portion 716 for attaching the full tank branching unit 770 to the lower end of the portion 710b.

  Furthermore, the prize ball base 710 has a relief hole 717 for letting out a payout motor 744 and the like that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and projects forward from the prize ball device 740, and the like. And a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Although the detailed description is omitted, the mounting holes and mounting bosses for mounting the winning ball tank 720, the winning ball device 740, etc., or mounting to the main body frame base 600 are appropriately positioned on the winning ball base 710. Is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top opened, and is a bottom wall portion that is substantially rectangular in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and has only a right rear portion (open side rear portion) that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 710 in a rectangular shape in plan view, and an outer peripheral wall portion A discharge port 723 formed by a portion projecting rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 at the rear right side in 722 and a plate-like shape from the left side (axial support side) in plan view of the discharge port 723 to the left end of the prize ball tank 720 , A rod-shaped shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower left side in plan view of the flange portion 724, a baseball tank formed near the proximal end of the shaft portion 725 and at both front ends of the outer peripheral wall 722. 720 in the prize ball base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the spherical tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. The prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the spherical leveling member 727 is supported at one end side by a shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end side is suspended by its own weight. . The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, so that game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned. In addition, the collar portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that the game ball can be prevented from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730. It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) is lowered toward the right side in plan view, The right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) in plan view is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. Thereby, the flow of the game ball can be made smooth, and the occurrence of the ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720 can be suppressed, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game balls can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and extending in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl-like shape with a predetermined depth opened upward, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls can be aligned in two lines in the front-rear direction. The bottom is inclined so as to be low. The tank rail 731 includes a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) that opens downward at the left (shaft support side) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at a substantially center in the front-rear direction, and a front end lower surface And a plurality of locking protrusions 731c (see FIG. 74) that protrude downward and are locked to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710 from above.

  This tank rail 731 has an end on the right side (open side) when viewed from the front, which is positioned immediately below the discharge port 723 in the prize ball tank 720. After receiving, it rolls to the left and can be delivered from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the winning ball base 710 by locking the locking protrusion 731 c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the winning ball base 710. ing.

  The tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 when viewed from the front. A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper portion of the tank rail 731 and a ball stop piece that can be moved forward and backward in the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. 735, and a grounding plate 736 that is disposed in the tank rail 731 and that can contact a game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the drawing, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731 b of the tank rail 731. The ball retainer plate 734 includes an attachment portion 734a to which a ball stop piece 735 is attached at an upper portion, and two slits 734b that penetrate in the vertical direction and into which the protruding piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 can be inserted.

  In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported on the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above into the upstream side (open side) of the ball presser plate 734. The game balls discharged from the outlet 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and aligned in two rows along the partition wall 731b. It can be done. Further, the ball presser plate 734 is for forcibly making the game balls that have not been made one level by the ball leveling member 727, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. It is attached to the tank rail 731.

  As shown in the drawing, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game balls flowing down the tank rail 731 flow down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls arranged in two rows are alternately awarded one by one. To the device 740.

  A narrow groove penetrating vertically is formed at the bottom of the tank rail 731 so that foreign matters such as dust rolling along with the game ball in the tank rail 731 fall downward from the narrow groove. It has become. The ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is not shown in detail, but is grounded to the outside via the grounding metal fitting 782 and the grounding connector of the power supply board 851. In addition, when the game ball comes into contact with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

  Further, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stop piece 735 rotatably attached to the attachment portion 734a of the ball retainer plate 734, and the protrusion 735a of the ball stop piece 735 passes through the slit 734a in the tank rail 730. , The two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the protruding piece 735a, and the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 can be stopped. Yes.

  Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the state of a game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 is for paying out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. Is. As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the prize ball device 740 includes a unit base 741 extending in the vertical direction attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the drawing, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is provided on the rear surface side with a supply passage that opens to the upper end and extends to a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b having a predetermined space communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a, and a lower left side (open side) lower end of the distribution space 741b in communication with the lower left side (open side) and bent substantially in a letter shape. A prize ball passage 741c that opens to the left side surface and a ball extraction passage 741d that communicates with the lower right side (axial support side) bottom of the distribution space 741b and extends downward and open to the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a back cover 742 that is shorter in the vertical direction than the unit base 741 and a plate-like motor support disposed below the back cover 742. A plate 743, a discharge motor 744 disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotation shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor support plate 743, and a rotation shaft 744a of the discharge motor 744 are integrated. A first gear 745 that is rotatably fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and meshes with the second gear 746. A third gear 747 that is pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and a payout circuit that rotates together with the third gear 747 and is disposed in the distribution space 741c of the unit base 741. The body 748 and the payout rotating body 748 are fixed to the opposite side so as to be integrally rotatable with the third gear 747 interposed therebetween, and have a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. 749.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and the number of game balls attached to the unit base 741 and circulating in the prize ball passage 741c. A counting sensor 751 for measuring the rotation angle, a rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 that is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. A sensor board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball break switch 750, a counting sensor 751, and a prize ball relay board 754 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 by relaying the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110. I have.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a board cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay board 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (rotation detection board 749). ), And a gear cover 756 that covers the sensor substrate 753 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 interposed therebetween, and a supply passage ground that can contact a game ball that circulates in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741 The metal fitting 757, the screw 744 for fixing the payout motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween, and the back cover 742 are detachably supported with respect to the unit base 741. A detachable button 759.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example has a rear cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d are opened at the rear end. Is supposed to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a is once bulged rearward, so that the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be reduced. It can be done. Further, the unit base 741 is partially cut out at one side (left side in the rear view) of the lower side of the supply passage 741a from the position bulged rearward and outside the position where the supply passage 741a is cut out. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball break switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a front and rear direction penetrating below the prize ball passage 741a. A motor insertion hole 741g that is formed and into which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By attaching the ball break switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operation piece of the ball break switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the playing ball, the presence or absence of the playing ball in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the cut ball switch 741e. In a state where the game ball in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball break switch 741e (out of ball state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and it is determined that the ball is out of the player or the hall. It is notified to the side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between the bearing portion 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotary body 748), and between the switch mounting portion 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. An earth metal fitting attaching portion 741i for attaching the supply passage earth metal fitting 757, and a button support hole 741j for supporting an attaching / detaching button 759 for attaching / detaching and supporting the back cover 742 arranged on the upper portion of the unit base 741. I have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 to the ground metal fitting attachment portion 741i. The front surface of the supply path grounding metal fitting 757 is in contact with the rear surface of the lower end of the U-shaped earthing metal fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game balls flowing through the supply path 741 a is removed via the supply path grounding metal fitting 757. Can be done.

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape, and its upper end bulges backward. The upper part of the back cover 742 has a button insertion hole 742a through which the detachable button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and the relay board mounting. The sensor board attaching part 742c which is arrange | positioned under the part 742b for attaching the sensor board 753, and the through-hole 742d which the paying-off | rotation body 748 can pass are provided. The relay board mounting portion 742 b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located on the rear side of the ground metal mounting portion 741 i of the unit base 741.

  In addition, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and comes into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, and generates heat generated by the payout motor 744. It is possible to facilitate heat dissipation.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotator 748 of the prize ball device 740 includes three recesses 748a each having a size that can accommodate one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are stored one by one in the recess 748a and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d. The three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotate integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the spaces between the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748, respectively. By detecting, the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

  The award ball apparatus 740 of this example has a payout motor when a payout command from the main control board 4100, a loan command from the CR unit 6 or the like is input to the payout control board 4110, or the ball removal switch 860b is operated. 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is driven to rotate, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744a rotates, and at the same time, the second gear 746 engaged with the first gear 745 rotates, and further the second gear 746. Is rotated. The third gear 747 has a payout rotator 748 on the front side and a rotation detection board 749 on the rear side so as to be able to rotate integrally therewith. It is designed to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 78, in the prize ball device 740, a payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported at the approximate center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the prize ball passage 741c, and the payout rotation The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotator 748 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the ball removal passage 741d. The game balls paid out to the side of the ball extraction passage 741d are discharged from the lower end of the ball extraction passage 741d into a ball extraction passage 778 of a full tank sorting unit 770 described later, a main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, and a substrate unit. It can be discharged outside the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 in 800 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply board box holder 840.

  Note that the unit base 741 in the prize ball apparatus 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled in the main body frame 3, the award is given from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d and the like of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and a defect such as a ball clogging can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75, and 79. The full tank sorting unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710 and guides the game ball paid out to the prize ball path 741c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300. In addition, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game ball can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 so as to be paid out.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is fixed to the rear surface of the lower end of the prize ball base 710 at the upper part of the rear end and the latching part 770a latched to the attachment latching part 716 of the prize ball base 710 at the substantially upper center in the front-rear direction. Fixing portion 770b. The full tank branching unit 770 is suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branching unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at a substantially horizontal center in the upper part of the rear end. A prize ball receiving port 771 for receiving a game ball flowing down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710 and a branch space 772 arranged below the prize ball receiving port 771 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79). And a normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball from directly under the prize ball receiving port 771 to the front side in the branch space 772, and a game ball that has circulated through the normal passage 773 forward and the front end of the front end. A normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end of the view and a full passage 775 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball toward the front side from a position on the right side of the rear view rather than just below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772. A), a fill-up passage 775 game ball that has flowed through the discharge forward a full sphere outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774, a.

  Further, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball outlet 777 that opens upward at the left end of the rear end upper part when viewed from the front and receives the game ball flowing down the ball extraction passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, A ball extraction passage 778 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball received at the opening 777 to the front side, and a game ball flowing through the ball extraction passage 778 is discharged forward, and a normal ball outlet 774 and And a ball outlet 779 opened at a position behind the full tank outlet 776.

  When the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are respectively the first foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and communicates with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c. The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 and discharged from the full tank outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. The ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right side of the main body frame base ball outlet passage 622 in the main body frame base 600 so that the game ball released from the ball outlet 779 is released from the main body frame base 600. It is delivered to the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is configured such that a game ball delivered to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 is received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. The game ball that has flowed into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and passes through the first ball outlet 544a to the top of the dish unit 300. It will be supplied to the plate 301.

  By the way, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (the prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 is full of game balls, the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540 is provided. The game balls that can no longer come out from the 544a toward the upper plate 301 stagnate in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540 and eventually fill up the normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branching unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, starts to move laterally in the branch space 772, and moves laterally. A game ball enters into the full tank passage 775, and from the full ball exit 776 through the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, below the dish unit 300. It is supplied to the dish 302.

  The full tank branch unit 770 of the present example is formed entirely of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, foreign matter such as dust and debris that has entered the full tank branch unit 770, the occurrence of clogging, etc. can be easily found without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. .

  In this way, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example automatically plays the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the game balls are full in the upper plate 301 until the game balls are full. Since the upper plate is full like the conventional pachinko machine, the game ball is not supplied to the ball hitting device by operating the ball pulling button on the upper plate. It is possible to avoid interruption of game ball driving, and it is possible to eliminate the annoyance during the game and suppress the interest in the game from being reduced.

  In addition, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example branches the path of the game ball to be paid out immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear part of the pachinko machine 1, when the upper plate 301 becomes full. Since the game ball staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branching unit 770 is paid out to the upper plate 301, the game ball in the upper plate 301 and the game ball in the normal passage 773 are used as a ball hitting device. A game ball that can be directly struck by 650, and the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is made smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as in the conventional case are stored in the upper plate 301. Can do. Accordingly, by reducing the size of the upper plate 301, the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 can be relatively enlarged (widened), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider gaming area 1100 can be obtained. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player, and the player can be entertained by the wide game area 1100.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening / closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 80 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 81 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 82 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to an attachment portion 624 formed in the vicinity of the upper left end of the main body frame base 600 in the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 moves to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of game balls.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-like opening / closing shutter 792 slidably held on the shutter base 791, an opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the up-down direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 ascending through the opening / closing crank 793. And an open / close spring 794 for urging.

  The shutter base 791 of the bulb outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a pair of slide grooves 791a extending in the vertical direction for holding the open / close shutter 792 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction so as to protrude upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b that penetrates between the pair of slide grooves 791a in the front-rear direction, and a crank that is disposed in front of the left end portion in front view and supports the open / close crank 793 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side of the opening 791b in front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed in the vicinity of the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in front view.

  The opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a flat shutter body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. And a horizontally elongated drive hole 792b that is disposed between the pair of sliding protrusions at a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

  Furthermore, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a that is supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 so as to be rotatable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a right-side outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a. From the front end of the opening 791b and projecting rearward from the front end of the driving lever 793b and slidably inserted into the driving hole 792b of the opening / closing shutter 792. A driving pin 793c, a contact portion 793d extending downward from the outer periphery on the lower side in front view of the shaft portion 793a, and a spherical shape at the tip, and the other end (lower end) of the open / close spring 794 formed on the upper surface of the driving rod 793b. And a spring locking portion 793e for locking.

  In this example, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is configured such that the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are disposed on the rear side through the opening / closing shutter 792 even when the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised. A normal sphere outlet 774 and a full sphere outlet 776 in the full tank branching unit 770 are visible.

  In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the driving pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates in the vertical direction at the same time as the opening / closing crank 793 rotates about the axis extending in the front-rear direction. The open / close shutter 792 is slid in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b in which the is inserted. In the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 contacts the opening / closing operation piece 542 g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 with the contact portion 793 d of the opening / closing crank 793. The contact portion 793d is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered so that the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 on the door frame 5 is released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is released. Is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised to close the normal bulb outlet 774 and the full bulb exit 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. Be able to.

  As described above, in response to opening / closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 automatically switches the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game ball remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, the game ball is prevented from spilling from the normal ball exit 774 and the full tank exit 776. Can be done.

[1-3F. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. FIG. 83 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 84 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the front. Furthermore, FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the exploded position. FIG. 87 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the standing wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. 88A is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 88B is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. FIG. 89A is a front view of the launch power supply board box, and FIG. 89B is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG.

  The board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the rear left side of the board unit base 810, and a board unit base. Of the power supply board box 830 attached to the rear face of the right end of the front view 810, the power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear face of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the fired power supply board box 830 from the rear side, and A power supply board box 850 that is attached to the rear face and has a rear end that is substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear face of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820. And the payout control board box A terminal board box 840 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end portion of the front view of 860, and a main-side relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 attached to the front face of the board unit base 810. I have.

  As shown in the figure, the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of the present example is configured to extend in the left-right direction, and the substantially central portion in the left-right direction is stepped downward and gradually tilted upward as it goes to the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding forward from the front surface, an opening portion 812 that is disposed above the position of the shielding wall portion 811 that is one step lower in the center in the left-right direction, penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the lower side of the shielding wall portion 811 And a board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, which is formed on the front surface in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, and a rectangular shape that is horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting portion 813 when viewed from the front. A plurality of vertically long slits penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the tubular duct portion 814 that penetrates and the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface. A hole 815, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  The board unit base 810 is formed such that the shielding wall portion 811 is along the lower side of the main body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600. The game ball can be prevented from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622, and the strength of the board unit base 810 can be increased. Further, the board base unit 810 sends the game ball flowing down the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 disposed on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. Be able to.

  The board unit base 810 has a board mounting portion 813 for attaching the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. In the state where the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are located on the front side from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It comes to face. Further, the board unit base 810 can transmit sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side satisfactorily by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Further, the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing portion 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 in which the box housing portion 816 is disposed on the rear side. The box housing portion 816 and the front box housing portion 843 are formed. Thus, a housing recess for housing the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be formed.

  The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 is literally provided with a speaker 821 attached facing the front side. The speaker box 820 has a horizontally elongated opening 822 formed on the left side of the speaker 821 when viewed from the front, while covering the rear side of the speaker 821 in a sealed manner. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinth-like passage, thereby inverting the phase of the sound behind the speaker 821 and moving forward. The bass-reflex type speaker box is capable of emitting a deep bass to the diameter of the speaker 821. Note that the duct portion 814 in the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that sound radiated from the opening 822 can be transmitted well forward. ing.

  The launch power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with the rear open, and includes a launch power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. This launching power supply board box 830 accommodates various electronic components attached to the launching power supply board 831, and heat from the electronic parts etc. through slits 830a formed on the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to the outside.

  This launching power supply board box 830 is detached from above into an accommodation recess opened upward by a box accommodation part 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box accommodation part 844 of a power supply board box holder 840 described later. It is designed to be accommodated as possible. Thereby, in the state where the main body frame 3 is assembled, if a problem occurs in the launch power supply board box 830, the launch power supply board box 830 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3 to be replaced or repaired. (See FIG. 63).

  Further, the launch power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 89, the launch power supply board 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging power from the DC / DC converter 831a. The combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 and driven. This launching power supply board box 830 is formed with slits 830a as heat dissipation holes on the upper and lower surfaces in order to release the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the launching power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

  In addition, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the launch power supply board box 830 on which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed is provided as a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, the launching power supply board box 830 has a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. And the bottom inner wall are integrally formed from the bottom surface to the end opening edge. Accordingly, when the launch power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830 and the internal space of the launch power supply board box 830 is closed, the internal space of the launch power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Two spaces, an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a, and an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are formed. , Functioning as a heat insulating wall that blocks heat from entering and exiting the housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a.

  The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat radiation hole formed in each of the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicates the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. By being discharged to the outside via 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is a heat radiation hole formed in the upper surface and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830d with the outside air, respectively. As a result, the released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is stored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a combined current that flows to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 are not provided on the power board 851, but are fired separately from the power board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the launch power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, it becomes easy to handle by reducing the size of the launch power supply substrate 831 and the replacement work of the launch power supply substrate 831 is facilitated, which contributes to shortening the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement operation, the launch power supply board box 830 can be exchanged in a state where the launch power supply board 831 remains attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830, that is, the launch power supply board box 830.

  Further, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life and the driving firing by the launching solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to launch and the game has to be interrupted, the replacement work of the launching power supply board 831 is not performed. By being able to do easily, the interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the impossibility of firing due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 very easily, and it is possible to eliminate the interruption of the game due to the impossibility of firing at an early stage and resume the game, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 deteriorates and reaches its lifetime due to repeated charging and discharging, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time driving firing by the firing solenoid 654 is performed. On the other hand, the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of an island facility such as a game hall, but is not repeatedly charged and discharged at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831. Compared with the launch power supply substrate 831, its lifetime is extremely long. In other words, the fired power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration associated with charging / discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, while the power supply board 851 reaches the end of its life due to secular change. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the launch power supply board 831 separate from the power supply board 851. Thus, electronic components accompanying long-term aging can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic component accompanying a long-life change over time from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life.

  Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 receives a game ball that is opened upward and discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 to the lower left side of the left and right center in front view. A discharge ball receiving portion 841, a discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game balls received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward, and the front side of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) The front box housing portion 843 that is open forward and upward and can accommodate the rear side of the launch power board box 830, and the entire rear surface of the power board box holder 840 are formed so as to be recessed forward. A rear box accommodating portion 844 that can be accommodated.

  In the power supply board box holder 840, the opened front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is located at a desired position to the discharge passage 842. The rear side of the substrate unit base 810 passes through the opening 812 of the substrate base unit 810 through the main body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The game ball that has flowed down and the game ball that has been discharged from the out-ball discharge unit 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving unit 841, which will be described in detail later, pass through the discharge passage 842 to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1. Can be discharged.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodation part 816 of the board unit base 810, and the box accommodation part 816 and the front box accommodation part 843 accommodate the emission power supply board box 830. A recess can be formed.

  Furthermore, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the front open, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally transfers heat from the electronic parts and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released. As shown in FIG. 86, a power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

  The power supply board box 850 is a standing wall that protrudes rearward along the lower side of the opening where the power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) attached to the lower side of the power switch 852 in the power supply board 851 faces the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protruding portion 850c protruding rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 disposed on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a large gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece to be locked with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece. And the connector terminal 855 is prevented from being detached from the power supply terminal 853.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the power board box 850 has a standing wall 850b slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power terminal 853 of the power board 851. It is formed so as to protrude. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 is turned from the lower front side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be hooked to the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. A terminal 855 is connected.

  By the way, when the connector terminal where the wiring cord extends is connected to the connection terminal attached to the board, and then the wiring cord is pulled to the board side, the connector terminal is connected by the tension from the wiring cord. Since it is in a state of being pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the front end side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even when pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed around the connector terminal 855 so as to turn (turn back) from the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent a force from pressing the terminal 855 toward the power supply terminal 853 side, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 includes the protruding portions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, The protrusions 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

  Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b can be moved toward the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 is drawn from the standing wall portion 850b. Since the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b and the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d, a series of operations are continuously performed. This can be performed, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified.

  The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board holder 840 are formed so that the dimensions in the front-rear direction in the assembled state are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

  Also, the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and opened rearward, and a thin box-shaped cover that is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and opened forward. 862 and a dispensing control board 4110 (see FIG. 110) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in the rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862, and are provided at one location of the plurality of separation cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 must be cut so that the box base 861 and the cover 862 cannot be separated. When the dispensing control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been opened and closed illegally. In this example, the dispensing control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  In the payout control board box 860, an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, and the like attached to the payout control board 4110 face rearward through a cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). The payout control board box 860 has various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like facing rearward through the cover 862.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and includes a board mounting portion 871a formed on the upper rear surface on the left side in the rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface on the right end in the rear view. The board base 871 is provided, the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 is attached to the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and the peripheral panel relay terminal 872a is attached to the rear surface, and the board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871 A connection terminal plate cover 873 having an opening portion 873b that is attached from the rear side and extends in the vertical direction on the rear wall portion 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a that faces rearward from the opening portion 873a of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. CR unit connection terminal plate 8 supported in the connected terminal plate cover 873 And 4, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871, together with the connection joint terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. The board base 871, the connection terminal board cover 873, and the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 are each formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and from the outside, the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the CR unit connection terminal inside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, when a defect such as ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency indicator or the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side is displayed. The displayed status display sticker 876 is pasted.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the board base 871 in the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with the rear end opened. The board base 871 is formed on the inner upper part of the board mounting part 871a and a fixing piece (not shown) for fixing the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, and is formed on the inner lower part of the board mounting part 871a. A locking claw 871c for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

  The substrate base 871 is formed in a thin box shape in which the substrate cover mounting portion 871b is opened to the rear side, and the size of the inner periphery thereof is set such that the outer periphery of the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be inserted. In addition, the inner peripheral wall is an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The substrate base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b and contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 through a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece portion 871c on the right side when viewed from the back. Two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided on the left outer side in back view of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b. The protrusion 871e on the substrate base 871 is in a state in which the amount of backward protrusion is slightly less than that of the outer piece 871c, and as much as possible on both side ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, as shown It is arrange | positioned so that it may become a position near.

  Further, the substrate base 871 is arranged on the rear right side rear surface of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b so as to be spaced apart in the vertical direction, and a pair of bearing portions 871g for pivotally supporting the substrate box cover 875, And a rectangular tube-shaped locking portion 871h disposed on the rear surface in the vicinity of the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting part 871b surrounded by the outer piece part 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a for closing the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening portion 873b penetrating the rear wall portion 873a and extending in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner periphery of the opening portion 873b An inner wall portion 873d extending forward (from the substrate base 871) from 873a, and the upper and lower outer wall portions holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 so that the front end of the inner wall portion 873d contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And a pair of claw-like substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

  Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is arranged at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating through the rear wall portion 873a, and an approximately vertical direction. A box-shaped protective portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is opened on the left side when viewed from the back side, and extends outward (rightward) from the right side end when viewed from the back side of the outer wall portion 873c. A pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing hole 871d, and an elastic claw-like engagement that is formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c when viewed from the back and can be locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. A pawl piece 873i. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the inner wall part 873d extended ahead also in the upper and lower sides of the inner periphery in the center opening part 873f provided with the protection part 873g is formed.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape whose front side is opened by an outer wall portion 873c and a rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is configured to restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 rearward by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. In addition, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving forward, and thus the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be detachably held. It has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 has the fixing piece 873h inserted into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871, and the locking claw piece 873i is locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871, thereby The base 871 can be detachably attached to the board cover attaching portion 871b.

  The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front side (rear side). In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown in the figure, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. Yes.

  Further, the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape that covers the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and is opened to the front side, and is disposed on the right side surface as viewed from the rear side. A pair of shaft portions 875a pivotally supported by the bearing portion 871g, a through-hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873, penetrating in the front-rear direction, and forward from both left and right ends of the through-hole 875b And a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

  The board box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the board base 871 so as to be openable and closable together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft parts 875a on the bearing part 871g of the board base 871. Yes. Further, the board box cover 875 has a length in which a wall 875c on the side close to the shaft portion 875a (side supported) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and a wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective barrier walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear surfaces of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It is like that.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a D-sub connector, the CR unit is connected to the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Further, the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 is a square two-piece connector, and is attached so that it can be fitted and connected from the rear as shown in the figure.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the terminal board box 870 of this example has an outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and a board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the assembled state. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece 871c of the connecting terminal plate cover 874 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874 are the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the shaft portion 875a of the board box cover 875. Since the barrier wall 875c on the side exists, a barrier wall is formed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, even if an unauthorized tool having excellent flexibility is to be inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal It is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from the direction along the surface of the plate 874, and to reliably prevent an illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit attached as a CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if a D-sub connector in which a gap is formed between the connection terminal plate 874 and the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, illegal acts can be prevented. It is like that.

  The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft portions 875a on the shaft portion 875a side of the through-hole 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a to the substrate box cover 875 pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. A barrier wall 875c having a length in between is provided, and the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier wall 875c. Therefore, a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the board box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the gap from being formed. It can be made expensive.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 of this example is configured so that the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, an illegal act of inserting the needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord in a state where the connection terminal on the wiring cord side is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b formed as a two-piece connector. However, the protection part 873g and the board box cover 875 can prevent the insertion of the electrode, and can also prevent an illegal act on the internal connection terminal 874b.

  Further, the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 in the board unit 800 include a peripheral control unit 4140 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. This is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 include a plurality of connection terminals for connection to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and are formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals face the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600.

  The main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are covered with a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIGS. In addition, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 30).

  Further, the main relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a remaining loan display portion 363, and a rotational position detection sensor of the handle device 500 in the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. 512, the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the connection of the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side is relayed. Further, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 is attached to each decoration unit 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each decoration board 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 or the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. This relay relays the connection between the provided dial drive motor 414 and sensors 432a, 432b, and 432c and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Next, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90A is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and FIG. 90B is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. FIG. 91 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover as seen from the rear side. The back cover 900 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. . The back cover 900 has a plate-like main body portion 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body portion 902, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of juxtaposed vertical rows that protrude downward and are pivotally supported by the back cover pivotal support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600 and the upper and lower left sides of the main body portion 902 as viewed from the front. An engagement piece 908 that engages with the back cover engagement groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engagement groove 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780 respectively, and the back cover 900 is placed in the vicinity of the lower engagement piece 908. 3 is provided with a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in a non-openable / closable manner.

  The fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the left in the rear view of the lower locking piece 908 in the main body 902 of the back cover 900, as shown in FIGS. 921, a vertically long rectangular locking port 922 that is arranged at a predetermined distance on the left side in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking that is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a strip 923a on one end side and a horizontally long slot 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and inserted into the slot 923b of the guide member 923 from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921 and a guide member 923 on the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 Includes a retaining member 925 attached so as to sandwich, the. Note that the guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is formed of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

  The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked in a loosely fitted state with respect to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. You can play with. Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is in a state in which the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. It can be slid in the left-right direction and is not dropped from the long hole 923b. When the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, the fastening mechanism 920 has a fastening member 924 that protrudes forward through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

  The back cover 900 of this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 on the back cover shaft supporting portion 623 of the main body frame base 600. By engaging the engagement pieces 908 with the main body frame base 600 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, the engagement pieces 908 can be closed. Note that when the back cover 900 is in a closed state, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially aligned.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male thread portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side into the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the front end of the male screw portion 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923b of the guide member 923 locked to the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off from the back cover 900. A state of being positioned on the rear side of the main body 9002 is maintained.

  Then, from this state, by inserting the tip of the male screw part 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b and rotating the fastening member 924, the male screw part 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screwed). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. It should be noted that the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example allows the fastening member 924 to be fastened even when the guide member 923 that supports the fastening member 924 is inclined with respect to the main body portion 902 when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male thread portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be satisfactorily moved to the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  Further, in this example, the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by a single fastening mechanism 920, so that it can be easily fastened or fastened only by operating one fastening member 924. The maintenance work can be improved by simplifying the labor involved in opening and closing the back cover 900.

  The back cover 900 includes a connection notch 910 that is cut upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 when viewed from the front, and a confirmation opening that penetrates the connection cutout 910 in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. 912 and a notch portion 914 for confirmation cut out in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body portion 902 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, through the connection notch 910, the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4, the test terminal 4100f, and the like. Comes to the rear. Further, the back cover 900 has a confirmation opening portion 912 through which a board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 101) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 faces the rear side. The sealing part 1176 of the main control board box 1170 faces through the notch part 914. Thereby, even if the back cover 900 is not opened with respect to the main body frame 3, it is possible to perform operation confirmation, appearance confirmation, management state confirmation, etc. of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100.

  Further, the back cover 900 has a plurality of slits 916 that are elongated through the main body 902 and the side portion 904, and heat generated in the game board 4 and the like through the slits 916 is generated in the main body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged outside the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through-holes 918 are provided at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction that are wide and extend long in the up-down direction at a position slightly to the left in front view from the center. These through holes 918 are in a state where the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 is accommodated and held in the main body frame 3, and the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4. It is located on the rear side of the cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided in the apparatus so that the heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be exhausted satisfactorily. It has become. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

[1-3H. Side security board]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the figure, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side security plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 that is extruded in a shallow U shape in plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 that is fixed to the top and bottom near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. A positioning member 956 that is fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engages with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

  A main body 952 of the side security plate 950 includes a side plate piece 952a having a length substantially the same as the height of the main body frame base 600 and extending in the vertical direction and having a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a right side when viewed from the front end of the side plate piece 952a. A front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c that is disposed so as to form a predetermined amount of gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and has a smaller protruding amount than the front end piece 952b, and a front face from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d extending longer than the front end piece 952b in the right direction of view (see FIG. 106). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U-shape by a side plate piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, and a rear end piece 952d, and the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 is interposed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d. A left side portion in front view with the game panel 1150 is inserted (see FIG. 106).

  The side security plate 950 of this example is configured such that the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. When the side security plate 950 is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 is connected to the shaft side of the shaft side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the U-shaped projecting piece 166 and to prevent the insertion of a tool for performing an illegal act between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side when viewed from the front. (See FIG. 106). The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is made of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion mold material, and has a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, and a middle piece 952c arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 are increased, so that the overall strength of the main body frame 3 can be increased to favorably support the game board 4, the door frame 5, and the like. It has become.

[1-3I. Locking device]
Next, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97. FIG. 93A is a left side view of the locking device in the main body frame, and FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the locking device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 94A is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 94B is a glass door slide rod and a body frame slide rod provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a rear perspective view which shows these, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device as seen after disassembling, and FIG. 96 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the sliding door for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame in the locking device. FIG. 97 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the tamper-proof member in the lock device.

  The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the right side (open side) of the front end frame part 602 in the main body frame base 600 and a lock locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and a peripheral wall in the main body frame base 600 A plurality of lock mounting portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame that is slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The U-shaped sliding rod 1040, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be illegally slid. Fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and includes a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a main body frame sliding rod 1050. Are slidably arranged. Note that the U-shaped base 1001 has an extremely thin lateral width as compared to a conventional locking device integrated into a base having an L-shaped cross section. Thereby, the horizontal dimension of the locking device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased. 1100 wide game board 4 can be provided.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 is attached in a state in which the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 are formed on the U-shaped substrate 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. It is in a completely covered state, and has a fraud prevention structure in which it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate vertically on the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through opening 1002, a screw fixing portion 1003 projecting outward in the upper part and middle of a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and a screw fixing part 1003 protrudes forward from the open side (front side) upper and middle portions of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the projections 1003 are provided, and from the lower ends of the open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The locking protrusion 1004 is provided.

  Screw fixing portions 1003 and locking protrusions 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking protrusions 1004 are attached to the door hook holes 620 of the main body frame base 600. When the screw locking portion 1003 is inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side and moved upward, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other. By screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3).

  The locking device 1000 is attached not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and the cylinder lock through hole 611. The lock attaching portion 625 is also fixed to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower portion of the lock device 1000 is also attached.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three locations on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001 are connected to the upper and lower door hook holes 620 and the locking locking holes. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame base 600 with a very simple structure. It can be firmly fixed to (main body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by the locking and fixing of the front side and the rear side of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projection 1004 constituting the front locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) protrudes from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear side fixing structure projects from the side surface 1001b close to the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 to the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. The locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared with the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b which is dense with the main body frame 3.

  The U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating left and right in the upper, middle, and lower sides of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are inserted inside the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 with the body frame sliding rod 1050 stored. Can be slidably mounted in the vertical direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 formed at the upper, middle and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. As shown in (B), a rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end portions of long holes 1055 and 1061 for rivets formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 respectively for the body frame sliding rod 1050. The door frame sliding rod 1040 can be moved upward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved downward.

  Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 protrudes from the front end of the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the open-side main body frame base 600 and protrudes laterally. Then, a lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention notch 1007 of the U-shaped base body 1001 will be described later in detail, but the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is advanced and retracted. Further, the lock mounting piece 1008 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is located on the side surface 1001b so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is mounted on the back surface of the main body frame base 600. Projecting from the front end to the side, the lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and the mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 are mounted at two locations on the top and bottom. A mounting hole 1014 drilled in the screw and a screw stopper 1003 drilled to mount the lower part of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

  The U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 that urges the second tamper-proof member 1032 upward, and a clearance lateral hole 1022 that forms a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034; It has.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting substrate 1011 for fixing to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 1011. At the same time, an engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side is a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The end side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating.

  This cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion inserted into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 from the rear side, and attachment holes 1013 formed at two positions on the lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008.

  The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base body 1001 of the lock device 1000 do not rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key, but fraudulently for the main body frame with a piano wire, a wire, etc. It is for preventing lowering. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034 as shown in FIG. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is supported by the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be swingable about the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. More specifically, the first tamper-proof member 1023 is positioned together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 through the swing shaft hole 1025. A lower insertion hole 1005 and a rivet 1006 are attached.

  In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 opens vertically in the plate-like surface at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. The protruding piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. The second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 passes through the projection piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. The raised engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 are engaged with each other. Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined obliquely on the outer front side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 so as to be able to contact the rear surface side of the first engaging protruding piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated. The inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 97 (B).

  Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 that protrudes toward the U-shaped base 1001 side from an obliquely lower lower side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. A regulation protrusion 1031 that protrudes downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 that pass through the front side of the regulation protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction and are arranged vertically. The stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is intruded into and engaged with the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 and the engagement cutout portion 1066 of the main body frame slide rod 1050 when the main body frame slide rod 1050 is locked. Thus, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be prevented from sliding illegally. Further, the restricting protruding piece 1031 of the first fraud preventing member 1023 abuts on the second fraud preventing member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud preventing member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). The movement can be restricted.

  Further, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. Can be done. Further, the connecting hole 1030 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is for connecting the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 in a pivotable manner by a connecting pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted “te” -shaped plate material, and has a connection hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 at the lower end. The second fraud prevention member 1032 can be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be relatively rotatable by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. It can be done. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. Thus, the spring 1035 is biased upward. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is configured such that the abutting portion 1037 abuts on the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001 and is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member. The door sliding rod 1040 includes door frame hook portions 1041 projecting forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding rod 1040 protrudes forward from the open side of the U-shaped substrate 1001 in a state where the door sliding rod 1040 is housed in the U-shaped substrate 1001. When the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame 5 protrudes forward from a door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 63 and 68) formed in the main body frame base 600. It can be locked to a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the cover. The door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the figure, and thereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are lifted by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

  Also, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed in the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces, and has a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, below the uppermost rivet slot 1042, and for the door frame. A guide protrusion 1043 protruding in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided at the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040. In the rivet slot 1042 of the door sliding rod 1040, a rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is inserted into the door frame sliding rod. It is formed in a vertically long shape so as not to interfere with the upward movement of 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 is in contact. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted such that the guide projection 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050. Thus, the sliding movement between the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed with a spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of the spring 1048 at the upper end portion. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the spring 1048 slides the door frame. The collar 1040 is biased downward and the body frame sliding collar 1050 is biased upward, respectively. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is stamped from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be prevented from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is like that.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 is provided at the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. This constitutes a space in which the part can move. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the rising engagement hole 1045 and rotated, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation of the engagement cam 1016. It is for engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049 that is notched larger in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007 at the lower rear of the vertical side. The escape notch 1049 is obstructed by the door frame sliding rod 1040 so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is reliably engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066. The corresponding part is notched so as not to become.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and It has. That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not formed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at the upper end portion, and a long rivet hole 1055 penetrating in a horizontal direction in a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 that passes through the rivet long hole 1055 in the left-right direction, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at the lower end of the vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057 And a contact hole 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper part on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward.

  Further, the rivet slot 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state in which the rivet 1006 has penetrated, the rivet 1006 has penetrated the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1055 so that the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The upper hook member 1051 has a protruding piece moving hole 1056 into which the guide protruding piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1040. The mutual movement with 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. Further, the connection hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is inserted with the upper end of the connection wire rod 1053 bent. Further, the abutting portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001, and in the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051. There is no backlash and it can slide smoothly.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is for the rivet penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052 and the hook portion 1065 projecting rearward from the lower end portion. A long hole 1061, a downward engagement hole 1062 arranged below the long hole 1061 for rivets, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engagement hole 1062, and a lower part of the free hole 1063 A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed in the vicinity of the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 drilled in the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement formed in the lower part of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. A joint notch portion 1066 and a contact portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward. The rivet slot 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet slot 1061 has a rivet. In a normal state in which 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061. As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

  Further, when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotates, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. It is for engaging. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 has a second engagement protrusion 1018 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It is possible to form a space in which the distal end portion of the can move. Further, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding plate are inserted. The mutual movement with the palpit 1050 can be guided.

  The lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the abutting portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be smoothly slid without play.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described. To assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by a connecting wire rod 1053, and the guide projection of the door frame sliding rod 1040 in that state is connected. The piece 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped. In the combined state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame slide are inserted. After inserting the pallet 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005.

  When the rivet 1006 is inserted, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet long holes 1055, 1061, 1042. When the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 and attach the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001 at the same time. Further, before attaching the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are coupled by the coupling pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is coupled to the pin hole. It is necessary to insert the guide pin 1028 into the opening at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after it is fixed at 1029 with a screw (not shown).

  Furthermore, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with a screw 1012. At this time, the distal end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the assembled locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 in this way, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While being inserted, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding in a bowl shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in this state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is provided. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by matching the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b that contacts the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, the front locking structure contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as not to be loose.

  Next, the operation of the locking device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. Further, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the door frame 5 The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to depress the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and is connected thereto. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and lowered. As a result, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is released. The frame 2 can be opened.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are lifted by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lifted position as in the state shown in FIG. 96A). , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is formed on the closing plates 24, 25 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since it contacts the lower end, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again, thereby sliding the main body frame. The hook 1050 is raised and returned to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 rotates in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upwardly against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, the hook state 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released, so that the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. The main frame 3 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as in the state shown in FIG. 96A). Since the lower side of the hook part 1041 for the door is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined part of the hook part 1041 for the door frame is hooked to the hook cover 165 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised upward, and the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are re-engaged with each other. The pail 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the full length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from the inside. The act cannot be performed.

  Thus, the locking device 1000 of the door frame 3 of this embodiment releases the locking of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. The door frame 5 can be unlocked with respect to the main body frame 3 by rotating. Further, the locking device 1000 of this example performs an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and lowering it without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010. Can not be. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 are in contact. It has become a state. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the stopper piece 1027 is intrusion prevention notch. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. As a result, even if the piano frame or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is properly unlocked by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the clockwise direction shown in the figure, and also moves so as to be retracted from the tamper-proof notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the hooked state of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2 Can be done.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97 (A) is obtained. Thereby, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the above-described first fraud prevention structure, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the internal The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided in the housing are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, and are completely covered. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to pull down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, both side surfaces 1001a, 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 Since the intruder is prevented from entering the closed space, the structure is such that it is not possible to easily perform the illegal act.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment has the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame in the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 whose width is extremely thin as compared with the conventional lock device concentrated on the L-shaped base. The body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided and the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 is attached to the U-shaped base 1001 at a position below the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 is placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be attached firmly.

  Moreover, since the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered by the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is not possible to easily perform an illegal act such as pulling down a main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided by inserting a piano wire or the like.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. The structure is such that the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. With this structure, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

  In the locking device 1000 of this example, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 as a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 with screws. Although the structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is attached to the lock. It is good also as a structure which forms the lock attachment hole penetrated through the piece 1008 and the cylinder lock penetration hole 611 up and down. Even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 at the rear of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed sufficiently firmly on the back surface of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped substrate (tablet substrate) and the first side wall 540. It is good also as a structure which accommodates 1050, and there can exist an effect similar to the locking device 1000 mentioned above.

[1-4. Basic configuration of game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 98 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear. FIG. Further, FIG. 102 is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit in the game board in a state attached to the pachinko machine. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the game panel of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 and the like, as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of a board. FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction.

  As shown in the figure, the game board 4 according to the present embodiment has a front configuration in which an outer periphery of the game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven by a player operating the handle device 500 is substantially rectangular in shape. A member 1110, a plate-like game panel 1150 that is arranged on the rear side of the front component member 1110 and defines the rear end of the game area 1100, a board holder 1160 that is arranged on the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a board holder 1160 A main control board box 1170 that houses a main control board 4100 that controls the game content that is attached to the rear surface of the game ball 1100 and controls the game content that is performed by driving the game ball into the game area 1100. A function display unit 1180 capable of displaying the game status and attached to a predetermined position of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible to the player. To have. The game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 that is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, it is provided (see FIGS. 108 and 109).

  The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by a front component member 1110, a game panel 1150, a board holder 1160, a main control board box 1170, and a function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. A detailed configuration characterizing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4) is formed by the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170. Here, a basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and a detailed configuration will be described later.

[1-4A. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component member 1110 in the game board 4 of this example has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 1100 is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1110 has an outer rail 1111 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left end toward the left side from the center in the left-right direction in a front view and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction in the front view. An inner rail 1112 that is arranged substantially inside the outer rail 1111 along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view so as to smoothly continue from the lower end of the inner rail 1112 An inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the counterclockwise circumferential direction when viewed from the front, and the end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111 , The inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, which can be contacted with the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111. Is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 at the boundary of the outer area, and is supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to be rotatable, and closes between the outer rail 1111. In this way, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position where the outer rail 1111 is opened by rotating in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. And a backflow prevention member 1116 biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side.

  When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front component member 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 as shown in FIG. It is positioned on the extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660, a space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and a game ball launched along the firing rail 660 of the hitting ball launcher 650 is Then, it jumps over the space and is driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is used. The player can enter the game area 1100 by rotating it toward the open position against the urging force.

  In addition, when the game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball that rolls along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the stop portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed by the game ball coming into contact with the stop 1114, and the game ball rolls continuously from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It can be prevented from moving. In addition, even if the game ball that has entered (injected into) the game area 1100 attempts to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

  In addition, when the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is not received in a starting port 2101, 2102, a winning port 2103, 2104, 2201, etc., which will be described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100 Then, it is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, and discharged from the out port 1151 downward to the rear side of the game board 4. ing.

  On the other hand, when the game ball launched from the hitting ball launcher 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 A foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is opened from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. It falls and is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the foul space 626 and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  Note that the outer rail 1111 in the front component member 1110 has a metal plate attached to the surface thereof, so that the wear resistance due to rolling of the game ball is enhanced, and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, the stopper 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin on the surface, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is reduced. The game ball can be repelled inward.

  Further, the front component member 1110 includes a wall-shaped crime prevention projection 1117 protruding forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111, and a substantially center in the vertical direction along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from the lower side of the out port guide surface 1115. And a groove-shaped rail crime prevention groove 1118 that is recessed from the front end by a predetermined amount. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the security protrusion 1117 in the front structural member 1110 overlaps with the rear end protrusion piece 183 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 in the vertical direction. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot support side (left side in front view), the unauthorized tool can reach the game area 1100. Can not be.

  Further, when the front structural member 1110 of the present example is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the post-crime protruding piece 182 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118. The post-crime protruding piece 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface of the inner rail 1112 (opposite to the game area 1100). Even in the inner rail 1112 and the rail crime prevention groove 1118 and the post-crime projection piece 182, unauthorized equipment such as a piano wire that has entered from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

  Further, the front component member 1110 is spaced apart in the vertical direction at the left end in the front view and is recessed from the front to the rear and opened to the left end, and is spaced in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120, a fixed recess 1121 which is disposed on the left side of the front view of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and opened downward, and has an arc shape on the upper side and is recessed from the front side. In the vicinity of the left end portion of the lower end, there is provided a spherical passage cutout portion 1122 that is cut out in a rectangular shape extending long in the left-right direction upward from the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted with a positioning member 956 attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 is viewed from the front. However, it is possible to restrict movement in the front-rear direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 is attached to the game board. By being locked by the locking portion 608, the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

  Further, the fixing recess 1121 of the front component member 1110 is a front view of the game board fixture 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. When rotated clockwise, the fixed piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the lower end of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward by the game board fixture 690. It is like that. Further, the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 is formed with the same ball passage cutout portion 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is connected to the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the inserted state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the notches 1122 and 1152 for the ball passage.

  Further, the front component member 1110 has a horizontally long through-hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end of the front end at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction from the center in the left-right direction on the lower side of the through-hole 1123 to the left side of the front view. A fastening portion 1124 formed thinly and a certificate sticking portion 1125 disposed on the left side of the through hole 1123 as viewed from the front is attached. Although the detailed illustration of the fastening portion 1124 in the front component member 1110 is omitted, when the game board is attached to the conventional main body frame, a predetermined fastening band is attached to the fastening hole formed in the conventional main body frame. By wrapping and fastening each other, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4 and to prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4.

  Further, in the front component member 1110, a display unit 1181 of a function display unit 1180 described later is disposed on the outer right side of the rail security groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and in the lower right of the front view. The front component member 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 projecting rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing it, the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160. Further, the positioning protrusion 1127 can be fitted into an inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150 to fix the inner rail 1112 at a predetermined position of the game panel 1150.

[1-4B. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and the outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. This gaming panel 1150 is horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side in front view of the lower end in front view and the out-port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-out guide surface 1115 in the front component member 1110 at the lower part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front , And is opened downward and has a spherical passage cutout portion 1152 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110, and a rearward projecting portion of the function display unit 1180 that penetrates the lower right corner when viewed from the front. An insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted.

  Further, in the gaming panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110 and the positioning protrusions 1127 of the front component member 1110 are inserted and fixed near the lower left and right ends. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1156 which is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and whose lower end side is opened downward (see FIG. 101). And a notch 1157 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. In addition, the game panel 1150 includes a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 of this example can partition the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110, and although not shown, A plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a corresponding range, and a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the gaming panel 1150 is formed so that the out port 1151 is positioned at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100, and is formed at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100 in the front component member 1110 when assembled to the gaming board 4. The game ball guided rearward by the out port guide surface 1115 thus made enters the out port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front. The substrate holder 1160 has an out sphere discharge portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall portion at the approximate center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion is the out sphere A game ball that is formed so as to become lower toward the discharge unit 1161, is discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit or the back unit, and is supplied (discharged) to the bottom upper surface of the substrate holder 1160. The ball is discharged from the out ball discharge unit 1161 downward. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge section 1161 is positioned directly above the discharge ball receiving section 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3. All the game balls discharged from the board pass through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800 and are discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixed bosses 1162 that protrude forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 11520 and then fitted to the rear ends of the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110. In a state of being fitted to the boss 1126, a predetermined screw is screwed to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162 from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160, so that the substrate holder 1160 is attached to the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the substrate holder 1160 includes a fixing portion 1163 in which a fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the lateral side to the left end portion of the rear wall in the rear view when viewed from the rear. And a locking portion 1164 that is disposed so as to face 1163 and that can lock the elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 from the rear. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the board holder 1160 by the fixing part 1163 and the locking part 1164 of the board holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 includes a thin horizontal box-shaped board base 1171 with the rear side opened, and a thin horizontal box shape with the front side opened to cover the rear surface of the board base 1171 and is fitted into the board base 1171 from the rear side. A board cover 1172 to be combined, and a main control board 4100 having electronic components and terminals mounted on the rear side at the front end of the board cover 1171 are provided. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left side end of the board base 1171 when viewed from the back and is fitted to the fixing part 1163 of the board holder 1160 and from the right side of the board cover 1172 when viewed from the right side. And an elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 101 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is disposed at the right end of the back view two times up and down across the elastic fixing piece 1175 and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing portion 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) pasted between the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal that covers the surface of the hermetic seal A protective cover 1177 and a substrate management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 1172 are provided. The sealing part 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation cutting part 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and caulking is fixed in any one of the four sealing parts 1176. Has been. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the caulking-fixed sealing portion 1176 so that the main control board box 1170 remains open and closed. It has become. Thus, it can be clearly determined from the outside whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been opened illegally.

  In this example, four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided, so that the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. Further, the main control board box 1170 of this example has a hermetic seal applied across the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, and when the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated, the hermetic seal is cut. It is necessary to peel off or peel off, and even in this hermetic seal, traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified or replaced with an illegal main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such illegal acts from being performed.

  The main control board box 1170 has an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction of the board cover 1172 at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening, Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like face the rear side. The main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170 by connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f facing the rear surface of the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-described sealing portion 1176 and the sealing seal are cleverly crafted, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 can be confirmed other than visually, and the pachinko machine 1 having high crime prevention performance is obtained. Be able to.

[1-4E. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110. The display unit 1181 is disposed on the front surface of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible from the player side. A rear projecting portion 1182 projecting rearward from the rear surface.

  In the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 102, a game state that is changed by a game ball driven into the game area 1100 is displayed at the left end of the front view. A game status indicator 1183 consisting of one LED and a second number for displaying the number of suspensions related to the acceptance of game balls to the first start port 2101 consisting of two LEDs arranged vertically on the right side of the game status indicator 1183. One special symbol memory display 1184 and a first special lottery result placed on the right side of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and drawn by receiving a game ball at the first start port 2101 are displayed as a first special symbol. The first special symbol display 1185 consisting of one 7-segment LED and the first special symbol display 1185 are arranged diagonally to the right of the first special symbol display 1185 to the second start port 2102 A second special symbol display 1186 composed of one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball as a second special symbol, and up and down on the right side of the second special symbol display 1186 A second special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying the number of reserves related to the reception of game balls to the second start port 2102, which is composed of two LEDs arranged in the direction.

  In addition, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 displays the number of reserves related to the passage of the gate unit 2350 by the game ball that is arranged in an arc shape substantially along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from directly above the second special symbol display 1186. A normal symbol memory display 1188 composed of four LEDs for display, and a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball passing through the gate portion 2350 arranged below the normal symbol memory display is displayed as a normal symbol. The normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED to be arranged, and the normal symbol storage display 1188 are arranged side by side diagonally to the upper right side, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit”, the big prize opening A round indicator 1190 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (round number) of the open / close pattern 2103.

  The game status indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange. Various game states (for example, a probability variation state, a time shortening state, a probability variation short state, a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, etc.) can be displayed by the combination.

  Also, the first special symbol memory display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball at the first start port 2101 when the first special symbol display 1185 cannot display the first special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the first special symbols on which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol memory indicator 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b made of predetermined LEDs, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. More specifically, for example, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on when the number of holds is 1, and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is turned off. When the number of holdings is three, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a flashes and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are both It is blinking. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  In addition, the second special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball in the second start port 2102 when the second special symbol display 1186 cannot display the second special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the second special symbol that is suspended (stored) is displayed (stored). The second special symbol memory indicator 1187 includes a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b made of predetermined LEDs, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on when the number of holdings is one, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is turned off, and the second special symbol memory display lamps 1187a, When the number of holdings is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. Both are now flashing. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  Further, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are selected by the first special lottery that is drawn by receiving the game balls to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102. The result and the second special lottery result are displayed. The 7-segment LED stops after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first 7-segment LED light emission pattern (special symbol) is stopped. The player can recognize the special lottery result and the second special lottery result.

  Further, the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange, and a combination of the emitted emission color and lighting / flashing. Thus, it is possible to display a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing a game ball through the gate portion 2350. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after being displayed for a predetermined period of time, like the special symbol.

  In addition, the normal symbol memory display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 holds the start of the variable display when the game symbol passes through the gate portion 2350 when the normal symbol cannot be displayed in the normal symbol display 1189. The number of stored ordinary symbols (stored) is displayed. The normal symbol storage indicator 1188 includes four normal symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from below, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol storage lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of holds. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved normal symbols. In this example, up to four normal symbol fluctuation displays are held (stored).

  Furthermore, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes a two-round display lamp 1190a and a 15-round display lamp 1190b made up of predetermined LEDs. Numbers can be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 102, the function display unit 1180 of this example can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1. Yes. In addition, the game status indicator 1183, the first special symbol memory indicator 1184, the first special symbol indicator 1185, the second special symbol indicator 1186, the second special symbol memory indicator 1187, the normal symbol memory of the function display unit 1180. The display 1188, the normal symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 110). Further, a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

  In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, the function display unit 1180 has a function as compared with the case in which the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 300 attached to the game panel 1150. The display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or The position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 that is embodied by the back unit 3000 and can characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1 is different. The store clerk in the hall can recognize the position of the display unit 1181 without being confused. To have.

[1-4F. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a gaming panel 1200 having a form different from the gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. The front component member 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 103 to 105 have the same configuration as described above, and a detailed description thereof is omitted here. The gaming panel 1200 of the present embodiment is thinner than the gaming panel 1150 described above, and has a plate shape that can partition the rear end of the gaming area 1100 that is partitioned by the front component member 1110 from the outer shape of the front component member 1110. The panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-like panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110.

  The gaming panel 1200 panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the gaming area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, glass, metal, etc. It is formed of an inorganic plate. The thickness of the panel plate 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary that can be sufficiently held even if a failure nail (not shown) is installed on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. The thickness is 8 to 10 mm. In this example, panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of fitting holes 1211 formed of round holes arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, a long hole 1212 disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction, It has. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100 and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 1213 whose front sides are recessed at both ends of the upper side and the lower side, respectively. The engagement step portion 1213 is cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed outside the game area 1100 in the same manner as the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 to the inner rail fixing hole 1214.

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the gaming panel 1200 has a size that includes the panel board 1210 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is substantially the same thickness as the gaming panel 1150 made of the above-described wood board (in this example, about 20 mm) of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1220 includes a holding step portion 1221 that holds the panel plate 1210 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the game area 1100 inside the holding step portion 1221. It mainly includes a through-hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction.

  The holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is designed to be almost the same surface. In addition, the holding step portion 1221 has a front inner peripheral surface of a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. A plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engaging claw 1224 and an engaging piece 1225 that engage with the engaging step portion 1213 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engagement claw 1224 is disposed on the upper holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engagement step portion 1213 on the panel plate 1210, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. It protrudes toward the end and is elastically engaged with the engaging step 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is disposed on the lower holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and is positioned between the front surface of the holding step 1221. It is configured such that a predetermined amount is extended toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220 in a state where a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed. The panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220 by engaging the engagement step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engagement claws 1224 and the engagement pieces 1225.

  The panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which the mounting boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 can be inserted. By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component member 1110 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 104, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side, which is recessed by a predetermined amount on the front side so as to leave the center in the vertical direction slightly below and the outer peripheral edge. ing. The mounting support portion 1227 causes the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 to be recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the rear outer peripheral portion protruding rearward, and the amount of the depression ( The depth (depth) is about 2.5 mm that can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 3001a (see FIG. 109) of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 1227. And preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3001a from projecting to the rear side of the panel holder 1220. The pachinko machine 1 can be securely installed and mounted in the game board holding port 601.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in a predetermined arrangement in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and on the upper side of the housing recess 630h and capable of screwing a predetermined screw. ing. In addition, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion (illustrated) protruding forward from a fixing portion 3001a formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 3001 in the back box 3001. Is omitted))). In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) when viewed from the back.

  It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, the inner diameter of the hole is mixed with a large diameter and a small diameter so that the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size or weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 1228 may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the thinned portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 103, these thinning portions 1230 are not formed in the predetermined range from the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 becomes a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component member 1110 disposed on the front surface becomes a substantially flat surface, and the game ball launched from the ball hitting device 650 However, it is guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a thinned portion 1230 so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and supports the panel holder 1220 and maintains the strength of the panel holder 1220. For this reason, a box-like rib is formed.

  The panel holder 1220 is formed with a positioning unit 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) or an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 1150 on the obstacle nail planting device. Can be set in the state. Further, at the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guide surface 1115 of the front component member 1110, and penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front. The ball passage cutout portion 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 and the rear protrusion portion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front lower right corner portion when viewed from the front are inserted. An insertion hole 1234.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out sphere discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 104) which is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and is opened downward at the lower end side. And a notch portion 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. The panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The out-ball discharge groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is formed in the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600) when the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. The game board 4 is moved relative to the main body frame 3 in the left-right direction when the out-ball discharge groove 1235 is fitted with the positioning protrusion 607. Being regulated.

  In the gaming panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engagement claw 1224, the engagement piece 1225, and the engagement step portion 1213 are engaged. By combining them, the panel holder 1220 can hold the panel board 1210, and the front side of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. Even if the installation device is not modified, it is possible to set the panel plate 1210 to the conventional obstacle nail planting device with the panel holder 1220 held, and to suppress the cost for planting the failure nail. Can be done.

  In addition, although not shown in the drawing, the gaming panel 1200 of this example has a plurality of obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the gaming area 1100 on the front surface of the panel board 1210. At the same time, a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thereby, since the thin panel plate 1210 supports only the front unit, it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1210 from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

  Furthermore, since the gaming panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220, even if the panel board 1210 is a transparent board, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the gaming panel 1200 as a whole. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 can be seen by the player through the board 1210 can be realized, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained.

  In addition, since the gaming panel 1200 is divided into a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 whose position such as an obstacle nail or a winning opening changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 including the game board 4 that can be used for various models can be obtained by replacing only the panel plate 1210.

  Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, the mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the rear unit 3000 that are mounted and fixed on the rear side of the panel holder 1220 according to the model. Even if the positions are different, the panel holder 1220 can be made a common part of the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of the various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228. It has become.

[1-5. Security structure of pachinko machine]
Next, the crime prevention structure in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 106 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a security structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 107 is a perspective view seen from the rear side in a state where the game board is accommodated.

  First, as shown in FIG. 106, the crime prevention structure on the pivot support side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example is a side surface on the pivot support side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of the synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. The metal crime prevention side plate 950 attached to the door frame 5 and the metal reinforcing unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 formed of the synthetic resin in the door frame 5 are configured.

  As described above, the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of an extrusion mold material made of metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and the vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction in which the front component member 1110 and the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 are combined. This side crime prevention plate 950 extends in the vertical direction, extends in the front-rear direction, and forms a side surface of the main body frame 3, and a front end extending from the front end of the side piece 952a to the inner side (open side) in a substantially right angle direction. A piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending along the front end piece 952b from the side piece 952a so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance on the rear side of the front end piece 952b, and extending inward from the rear end of the side piece 952a in a substantially perpendicular direction. And a rear end piece 952d. Thus, the front end of the security side plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

  Further, the side security plate 950 (main body 952) has the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 by the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. The strength of the main body frame 3 is increased and the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be favorably supported.

  On the other hand, the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed in a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 using spot welding, rivets, or the like, as described above. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the shaft support side is provided with a shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opened outward (the shaft support side). In the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased by the support-side U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. .

  By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the door frame 5 on the shaft support side. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased. There is a risk of cheating. On the other hand, in the security structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the security side face plate 950 are provided. A rear piece of a pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952a is pivotally supported. The side U-shaped projecting piece 166 is sandwiched. Accordingly, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft-supporting U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. Since the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 can be prevented from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3, the closed door frame 5 can be prevented from being opened, and the main body frame can be prevented. It is possible to prevent a fraudulent act such as opening the door frame 5 with respect to 3.

  In addition, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is set. Since the strength and rigidity of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made difficult to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, the crime prevention performance can be improved.

  Further, since the rear end of the side piece 952a in the security side plate 950 extends rearward from the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is assumed. Even if the player is destroyed, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire cannot be entered from the rear end of the side piece 952a into the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game board 4 (game panel 1150). Can be surely prevented. In addition, as shown in FIG. 106, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the outside of the security side plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. It can be fully countered against the destruction of the. In general, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed within the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side From the (front side), it is almost impossible to allow an unauthorized tool to enter the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952c, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further improved.

  Subsequently, as a crime prevention structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 107, a prize ball base 710, a tank rail 731 and a prize ball device 740 in the main body frame 3 for housing the game board 4 are provided. Since the unit base 741, the full tank branch unit 770, and the back cover 900 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, the game board 4 is connected to the rear side or the side of the game board 4 accommodated in the main body frame 3. Even if it is not removed from the main body frame 3 or the back cover 900 is not opened, it can be viewed from the rear side of the main body frame 3. As a result, even if an unauthorized device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily discovered and illegal acts can be prevented. Further, since it is possible to easily find an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach an unauthorized device, and it is possible to increase deterrence against unauthorized acts. ing.

  In addition, since the rear side and the side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc., the main body frame can be used for maintenance and model change. When the game board 4 is attached to or detached from the board 3, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the main body frame 3 and the game board 4, remove them. Therefore, it is possible to prevent any trouble from occurring, and to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed configuration of game board]
Next, the detailed structure of the game board 4 in this embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIG. 108 and FIG. FIG. 108 is a detailed front view of the game board. FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 108 as seen from the front.

  The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and an outer periphery of a game area 1100 into which a game ball as a game medium is driven when the player operates the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component member 1110 that forms a section, and a position that is visible from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when attached to the pachinko machine 1 at the lower right corner of the front component member 1110 when viewed from the front. The function display unit 1180 and a plurality of openings 1158 (see FIG. 109) that are attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110 so as to close the game area 1100 and penetrate the front and rear in a predetermined shape at positions corresponding to the game area 1100. And a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 from the front side. , And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1150, the.

  In addition, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example is arranged between the game panel 1150 and the back unit 3000, and the game panel 1150 against the light-emitting decorative holes that are perforated so as to penetrate the game panel 1150. A panel lens member 2500 inserted from the rear side, and a liquid crystal display device that is detachably attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 and can display a predetermined effect image that is visible from the player side according to the gaming state And a board holder 1160 attached to the lower rear part of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower part of the back unit from the rear side, and a main control board box 1170 attached to the rear face of the board holder 1160.

[2-1. Table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is arranged at an approximately lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 above the out port 1151 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and on the left side of the attacker unit 2100, the game area A side prize opening member 2200 disposed along the outer periphery of 1100 and supported by the front surface of the gaming panel 1150; a frame-shaped center accessory 2300 disposed at a substantially central portion of the gaming area 1100 and supported by the gaming panel 1150; It has.

  The front unit 2000 is inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 formed at a position corresponding to the gaming area 1100 in the gaming panel 1150, and is attached to the front surface of the gaming panel 1150. A portion protruding forward from the game panel 1150 is positioned in the game area 1100. As a result, the front unit 2000 comes into contact with the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 at an appropriate position, and together with the obstacle nail implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1150, Can be changed. The table unit 2000 can decorate the game area 1100.

[2-1A. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 of this example has a plurality of entrances (winning ports) through which game balls that have been driven into the game area 1100 can be received. The first start port 2101 disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction, the second start port 2102 disposed below the first start port 2101, and the first start disposed below the second start port 2102 A rectangular prize-winning port 2103 that extends greatly in the left-right direction from the mouth 2101 and the second start-up opening 2102, and a general prize-winning port 2104 that is arranged slightly on the left and right sides of the prize-winning port 2103 are provided. The game balls received in the first start port 2101, the second start port 2102, the big winning port 2103, and the general winning port 2104 are guided from the front side of the game panel 1150 to the rear side.

  The first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open on the upper side, so that game balls can always be received (winning). On the other hand, the second starting port 2102 disposed below the first starting port 2101 is a pair of movable pieces 2106 that can be expanded by the starting port solenoid 2105 (see FIG. 110) between the second starting port 2101 and the first starting port 2101. In the state where the pair of movable pieces 2106 rises substantially vertically, the first start port 2101 and the pair of movable pieces 2106 make it impossible to receive the game ball into the second start port 2102. Thus, in a state where the pair of movable pieces 2106 are expanded in the left-right direction, the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2102. That is, the second starting port 2102 is a variable winning port by the pair of movable pieces 2106. The pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened and closed by driving the start opening solenoid 2105 based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the gate sensor 2352 of the gate portion 2352 in the center accessory 2300 described later.

  Further, the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing member 2107 that can close the opening. The opening / closing member 2107 is pivotally supported at its lower side, and in a substantially vertical state, the big prize opening 2103 can be closed to make it impossible to receive a game ball, and the upper side can move forward. When it is rotated, the special winning opening 2103 is opened so that a game ball can be received. The opening / closing member 2107 is in a state in which the big prize opening 2103 is closed in a normal gaming state, and lottery is performed when a game ball is received (start winning prize) into the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102. In response to the special lottery result (when the special lottery result is “big hit” or “small hit”), it is opened and closed by driving the attacker solenoid 2108 (see FIG. 110).

  Further, as shown in the drawing, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward so that game balls can be received (winned) at all times.

  Although not shown in detail, the attacker unit 2100 detects a second starting port sensor 2109 that detects a game ball received in the second starting port 2102 and a gaming ball received in the grand prize winning port 2103. The game ball detected by the second starting port sensor 2109 and the count sensor 2110 is discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160. Note that a first start port sensor 3022 for detecting a game ball received in the first start port 2101 and a general winning port sensor 3020 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning port 2104 are provided in the back unit 3000 described later. Is provided.

[2-1B. Side prize opening member]
The side prize opening member 2200 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is an opening 1158 formed on the left side of the opening 1158 into which the attacker unit 2100 is inserted and fixed, at the lower part of the game panel 1150 in the left-right direction from the center in the left-right direction. On the other hand, after being inserted from the front side, it is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and is back-to-back along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 so as to line up with the general winning opening 2104 on the left side when viewed from the front in the attacker unit 2100. Two general winning ports 2201 are provided so as to face each other. These two general winning holes 2201 are opened upward so that gaming balls can be received (winning) at all times. The gaming balls received in the general winning holes 2201 are guided from the front side of the gaming panel 1150 to the rear side. After that, it is detected by a general prize opening sensor 3020 provided in the back unit 3000 described later.

  Further, the side prize opening member 2200 is arranged at a position where the left end is substantially in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 1100 at the upper left end of the side prize opening member 2200, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right end. The shelf portion 2202 and the first shelf portion 2202 are arranged on the opposite side and the lower side with the two general winning holes 2201 in between, and are located in the middle in the horizontal direction of the gaming area 1100 (the second start opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 and the big prize) A second shelf 2203 that decreases toward the mouth 2103 side), and the first shelf 2202 brings the game balls that have flowed down along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 toward the center of the game area 1100. Can be done.

  Note that the two general winning ports 2201 are arranged on the right side of the right end of the first shelf 2202, and even if the game balls are drawn toward the center of the game area 1101 by the first shelf 2202, There is a possibility of winning a prize in the general winning opening 2201. In addition, a third shelf 2204 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the center side of the game area 1100 is also provided on the upper side between the two general winning ports 2201.

  The side prize port member 2200 is formed so as to have a light-transmitting property as a whole, and although detailed illustration is omitted, a side prize port decoration board is provided on the rear side of the second shelf 2203. At the same time, a side lamp decorative board 3014 in a back unit 3000, which will be described later, is arranged on the rear side of the side prize opening member 2200. Can be decorated with light emission.

[2-1C. Center character]
Further, the center accessory 2300 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is inserted from the front side into the opening 1158 that is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1150, and then the game panel 1150. As shown in the figure, it is fixed to the front surface and is formed in a frame shape with a size that occupies most of the game area 1100. It is formed in an arc shape so that a gap slightly larger than the diameter is formed, and the left outer peripheral surface is a substantially straight line that hangs down so as to form an area of a predetermined width with the outer periphery of the game area 1100. Is formed.

  The center accessory 2300 is an upper shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the left side from the position slightly on the right side in the center in the left-right direction on the outer peripheral surface on the upper side of the front wall portion located on the front surface of the game panel 1150. When a game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 flows down to the upper shelf 2301, it flows down through the left side of the center accessory 2300 and to the right of the upper shelf 2301. The game ball that has flowed down (entered) passes through the right side of the center bonus 2300 and flows down to the lower part of the game area 605 at once. That is, if the game ball is driven so that the game ball enters the right side of the upper shelf 2301 in the center accessory 2300, the chance of enjoying the flow of the game ball is reduced. It is possible to appropriately adjust the length, and to maintain a sense of tension and to suppress a loose game.

  Further, the center accessory 2300 has entered the warp inlet 2302 in which a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150 and the warp inlet 2302. A warp exit (not shown) that releases the game ball into the frame, and a game ball released from the warp exit rolls in the left-right direction, and then releases it into the game area 1100 above the attacker unit 2100. And a stage 2310 formed on the upper surface of the lower side in the frame in 2300.

  Although the detailed illustration of the stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 is omitted, the game ball released from the warp outlet is supplied, and the game ball is placed on the front side of the first stage from the first stage. A second stage that is supplied and is capable of releasing a game ball into the game area 1100. This stage 2310 is formed in a curved surface shape such that the approximate center in the left-right direction is lowered. In addition, a chance entrance 2313 through which a game ball can enter is formed at the rear side of the first stage at a substantially central position in the left-right direction. The game is discharged from the exit 2314 into the game area 1100. As shown in the figure, this chance exit 2314 is arranged immediately above the first start opening 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game balls released from the chance exit 2314 are received into the first start opening 2101 with a high probability. (Wins).

  It should be noted that the stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 of this example is formed of a transparent member, and through this stage 2310, the decorative body arranged below the stage 2310 in the back unit 3000 is visually recognized from the player side. It can be done.

  Further, the center accessory 2300 is a transparent member extending leftward so as to be substantially in contact with the inner rail 1112 above the warp entrance 2302 on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150. An arch portion 2315 is further provided. The arch portion 2315 extends in a thin plate shape from a substantially front end of the front wall portion, and forms a space through which a game ball can pass between the arch portion 2315 and the front surface of the game panel 1150. As a result, the game ball that is driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 and guided to the left side of the center accessory 2300 by the upper shelf 2301 flows down to the downstream side through the rear side of the arch part 2315.

  Further, the center accessory 2300 includes a gate portion 2350 that detects the passage of a game ball in the vicinity of the arch portion 2315 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150. This gate portion 2350 detects a gate entrance that is placed on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion above the arch portion 2315 and allows a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 to enter, and a game ball that has entered the gate entrance. A gate sensor 2352 for discharging the game ball detected by the gate sensor 2352 from the outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion to the game area 1100. Although detailed illustration is omitted in this example, the gate outlet of the gate portion 2350 is formed at the same height as the arch portion 2315, and the game ball detected by the gate sensor 2352 is the arch portion. It looks as if 2315 was diving.

[2-2. Panel lens member]
The panel lens member 2500 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of this example is circular or X-shaped in the front-rear direction at a position outside the opening 1158 in which the center accessory 2300 is inserted in the game area 1100 of the game panel 1150. A plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed so as to penetrate through the light is decorated with light emission. The panel lens member 2500 includes a transparent upper panel lens 2510 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed on the upper left side of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a plurality of light emitting decoration holes disposed on the rear side of the upper panel lens 2510. An upper panel lens substrate on which the LED is mounted, a transparent lower panel lens 2520 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed on the lower left side of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a rear side of the lower panel lens 2520. And a lower panel lens substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

  The upper panel lens 2510 and the lower panel lens 2520 in the panel lens member 2500 protrude forward from the plate-like lens base portion, and have a plurality of rod-shaped insertion light guides that have substantially the same shape as the light emitting decoration hole to be inserted. Department. In a state where the insertion light guide portion 2502 is inserted into the light emitting decoration hole of the game panel 1150 from the rear side, the tip is formed so as to substantially coincide with the front surface of the game panel 1150, and flows down the front surface of the game panel 1150. The game ball is not affected as much as possible.

  The panel lens member 2500 of this example causes the LED of the upper panel lens substrate and the lower panel lens substrate to emit light appropriately, so that the area where the game ball flows down is decorated even if an opaque game panel 1150 such as a veneer plywood is used. It is possible to show the player the decoration of the game panel 1150 that has never been seen before, and to make the pachinko machine 1 stand out so that it can be differentiated from other pachinko machines.

[2-3. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 4 of the present embodiment is attached and fixed to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and supports the liquid crystal display device 1900 at a position away from the game panel 1150 by a predetermined distance rearward as shown in the figure. In the back box 3001, the upper unit 3002 disposed above the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001, the character unit 3400 disposed on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001, and the back box 3001 A gear decoration body unit 3500 disposed on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is mainly provided.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is arranged at a position corresponding to the side prize opening member 2200 in the front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 in the vicinity of the lower left front end of the back box 3001, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface. A side lamp decoration board 3014 and a game ball attached to the lower front end of the back box 3001 and received in the general winning port 2201 of the side winning port member 2200, and a game received in the left general winning port 2104 in the attacker unit 2100 A left guide member 3016 that guides the ball downward, and a game ball that is disposed on the right side of the left guide member 3016 and received in the first start port 2101 and the right general winning port 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is guided downward. A right guide member 3018.

  Further, although not shown in detail, the back unit 3000 has a horizontally long rectangular lamp drive board box that is disposed in the lower rear portion of the back box 3001 and accommodates a lamp drive board 4160 (see FIG. 110), and a back box. Panel relay terminal board 4161 (see FIG. 110) fixed to the rear side of 3001 and arranged on the left side of the lamp driving board box in the rear view, and a horizontally long rectangular upper resistor arranged on the upper rear side of back box 3001 And a lock member attached to the rear side of the back box 3001 and detachably holding the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  In this example, the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2300 in the front unit 2000, and each unit 3100, 3400, The concept of the pachinko machine 1 can be characterized by 3500 or the like. In addition, the back unit 3000 is configured such that each unit 3100, 3400, 3500 can move independently or in conjunction with each other depending on the game state, and the change of the game state to the player due to the movement. It is possible to suggest the arrival of a game or a chance, and to entertain the player.

[2-3A. Back box]
The back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and is provided with a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 3001a protruding outward at the front end, and the gaming panel 1150 is provided via the fixing portions 3001a. It is fixed to the rear side. Further, the back box 3001 is formed with a rectangular opening substantially at the center of the rear wall, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 supported on the rear side through this opening can be viewed from the player side. Further, the back box 3000 is provided with mounting portions at appropriate positions for mounting and fixing the units 3100, 3400, 3500, the substrates 3014 and the like.

  Although not shown, the back box 3000 is a liquid crystal that inserts and locks one fixing piece 1902 that protrudes outward from the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the right of the opening in the rear view (right side in the rear view). A support member is provided, and a lock member is attached to the left side of the opening in the rear view. The other fixing piece 1902 (left side in the rear view) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is supported by the lock member. A device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 3001.

[2-3B. Guide member]
The left guiding member 3016 in the back unit 3000 guides the game balls received in the general winning port 2201 of the side winning port member 2200 and the general winning port 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 downward through different flow paths. A general winning opening sensor 3020 for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided in each flow path. On the other hand, the right guide member 3018 guides and discharges the game balls received in the first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and the general winning port 2104 on the right side through different flow paths to the lower end. The first starting port sensor 3022 is provided in the flow path corresponding to the first starting port 2101, and the general winning port sensor 3020 is provided in the flow path corresponding to the right general winning port 2104. The right guide member 3018 is provided with a magnetic detection sensor 3024 capable of detecting magnetism.

  The game balls guided downward by the left guide member 3016 and the right guide member 3018 are discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160, and are discharged downward from the game board 4 from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the substrate holder 1160. It has become so.

[2-3C. Upper unit]
The upper unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is formed in a horizontally long shape, and is attached and fixed to the upper side of the opening facing the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001. The upper unit 3100 is disposed on the front surface at a substantially central position in the left-right direction and is circular in a front view, and a lifting mechanism that moves up and down the rotational decoration body unit 3200. 3250, a swing decorative body unit 3300 disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the lifting mechanism 3250, and a movable ceiling unit 3350 disposed on the left and right sides of the swing decorative body unit 3300. ing.

  The rotating decorative body unit 3200 of the upper unit 3100 is moved up and down by an elevating mechanism 3250 between an ascending position located above the liquid crystal display device 1900 and a descending position located substantially at the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Can be done. The rotating decorative body unit 3200 is configured such that a rotating decorative body formed in the shape of a shuriken arranged on the front surface is rotated, and by rotating, the rotation radius of the rotating decorative body is increased by the centrifugal force. It is like that.

  In this rotary ornament body unit 3200, not only the rotary ornament body rotates at the end but also protrudes outward in the radial direction, so that the rotation radius of the entire rotary ornament body is enlarged and the appearance is greatly changed. It is possible to have a strong impact on the player, to entertain the player, to suppress the interest in the game, and to attract the player's interest strongly Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine that is greatly differentiated from other pachinko machines.

  Further, the swing ornament body unit 3300 of the upper unit 3100 includes swing ornament bodies arranged on the left and right sides of the rear so as to be adjacent to the rotary ornament body unit 3200 positioned at the ascending position. Thus, the left and right swing ornaments can be swung simultaneously in the left-right direction. Furthermore, the movable ceiling unit 3350 of the upper unit 3100 is provided with plate-like ceiling decoration bodies that extend in the horizontal direction at both left and right ends of the upper unit 3100. This ceiling decoration body is formed so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction with the front end side as a center, so that the rear end side of the ceiling decoration body is lowered in a descending direction according to the gaming state. It has become.

[2-3D. Character unit]
As shown in the figure, the character unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 includes a character body that is shaped like a ninja and is three-dimensionally shaped. It is possible to move to the right and left direction. Further, when the character body of the character unit 3400 moves in the left-right direction, the character body 3400 is rotated by a predetermined angle around an axis extending in the up-down direction along with the movement.

  Further, the character body of the character unit 3400 can reciprocate around an axis in which the head extends in the left-right direction, and can reciprocate around the axis in which the right arm extends in the up-down direction. Can be done. Thus, by reciprocating the head, it is possible to perform an action as if the character is scolding. Further, by reciprocating the right arm in the horizontal direction, it is possible to perform an action as if the character is throwing a shuriken.

[2-3E. Gear decoration body unit]
The gear decoration body unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 includes a plurality of gear-shaped gear decoration bodies that are rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction and are arranged in the vertical direction. The body rotates all at once.

[2-4. Liquid crystal display device]
The liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this example is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 so that a predetermined effect image can be displayed according to the game state. It has become. The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixed piece 1902 that protrudes outward from the left and right sides, and is attached to the back box 3001 via the fixed piece 1902.

  Although not shown in detail, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral control board box that houses the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 on the rear side thereof, and an inverter board 1411 that supplies power to the liquid crystal display device 1900. And an inverter board box containing the housing.

[3. Various substrates]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of main boards 4000 includes a main control board 4100 that controls game operations (game progress) and a payout control board 4110 that controls payout of game balls and the like. The peripheral control board 4010 group includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 for controlling the display of the effect image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 110, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a which is a microprocessor in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are incorporated. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100g, and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing information stored in a RAM 4100e built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in RAM 4100e”). . The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in ROM 4100d”) and a main control built-in RAM 4100e, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and to prevent fraud. These functions are also built in.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 includes a first start port sensor 3022 for detecting a game ball received in the first start port 2101 and a second start port sensor for detecting a game ball received in the second start port 2102. 2109 and detection signals from some of the general prize opening sensors 3020 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, or attached to the gate sensor 2352, the general prize opening sensor 3020, the count sensor 2110, and the back unit 3000, respectively. The detected signal from the magnetic detection sensor 3024 is input via the panel relay terminal plate 4161 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g, so that the start port solenoid 2105 and the attacker are connected via the panel relay terminal plate 4161. A drive signal is output to the solenoid 2108, and the first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, the first special symbol display 1186 via the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay terminal plate 4161, and the function display board 1191. A drive signal is output to the special symbol memory display 1184, the second special symbol memory display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol memory display 1188, the game state display 1183, and the round display 1190.

  In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3022, the second start port sensor 2109, the gate sensor 2352, and the count sensor 2110 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches. The general winning opening sensor 3020 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2350, so that the first start port sensor 3022, the second start port sensor 2109, and The detection of game balls by the gate sensor 2352 also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used for the first start port sensor 3022, the second start port sensor 2109, and the gate sensor 2352. In addition, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the game winning ball 2103 is opened and game balls are frequently entered, so that the detection of the game balls by the count sensor 2110 also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch having a long life is also used for the count sensor 2110. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3020 does not occur frequently at the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 where game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, the general winning opening sensor 3020 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to games (game information) and various commands related to payouts to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown)). The main control MPU 4100a, which will be described in detail later, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, and shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from a power supply board 851 as described in detail later. The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. (It is described.) BC0 (see FIG. 111) is provided. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851 and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning voltage when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, the power failure notice signal is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 110, a payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of game balls and the like performs a discharge control by a payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls relating to payout, a launch solenoid 654, and a ball feed by a ball feed solenoid 585. A launch control unit 4120 for controlling, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an error cancel switch 860a for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball tank 720, a tank rail 731 and a ball removal switch 860b for discharging the game balls in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[3-2A. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 110, a payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. The payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and an external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4111c” for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4111a is operating normally. And a payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. It is equipped with. The payout control MPU 4111a includes a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”) and RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), in order to prevent fraud. Functions etc. are also built-in.

  The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4111b. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from 4100 being input via the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, or the ball break switch 750 Detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input via the prize ball relay board 754.

  A ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the base unit 741 are detected. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the prize ball relay board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first sent via the sensor board 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay board 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first supplied as a payout control input circuit. 4111e and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 that detects whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full is stored in the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880 and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4120b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an error LED. A signal to be displayed on the machine 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is sent to the payout control I / O port 4111b. Or the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by ascertaining the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1, game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 4130 is a segment display and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and graphics. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is notified that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it indicates that it is “connection abnormality” (specifically, with the main control board 4100). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, a notification is made that there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and when the number “2” is displayed, (Specifically, on the basis of the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotating body 748 at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740. The game ball engages in the vicinity of the entrance thereof to notify that the payout rotating body 748 is difficult to rotate), and when the number “3” is displayed, it indicates that it is a “counting switch error” (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751, a notification is made that the counting sensor 751 is malfunctioning. When the number “5” is displayed, a “retry error” (specifically, a payout) That the number of operation retries has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number “6” is displayed, it indicates that the operation is “full” (specifically, from the full-tank detection sensor 550). Based on the detection signal, it notifies the fact that the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it indicates that “CR is not connected” (payout) That the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the control board 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the numeral “9” is displayed, it is “in stock” (specifically, , That the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are first sent via the frequency display board 365, the main relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Are input to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in a serial manner, and this signal is the payout control I / O. It is received at the port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU 4111a. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining number display 365c. It outputs to the board 874, the main side relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input into the remaining frequency display 365c.

[3-2B. Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 110, a launch control unit 4120 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 is a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on this clock signal, and this firing A firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse are provided. Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b, the firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 gaming balls are launched toward the gaming area 1100 per minute and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

  A touch sensor 516 that detects whether or not a palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, and a firing stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal is first input to the launch control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880, and then input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit 4120a and is input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. The signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 in accordance with the rotational position of the front of the rotational handle body 506 is the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal. The signal is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d through the plate 880.

  This firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d emits a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength that matches the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle based on a signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512. When the reference pulse is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e generates a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input. When the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 by the output and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the constant current is obtained. By stopping the output, the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the ball hitting device 650 side. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 111) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. . With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 110, the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 for performing drawing control.

[3-3A. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 110, a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs presentation control on the peripheral control board 4010 performs a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. A sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, each peripheral board of the game board 4 is received based on these various commands. The game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to the lamp driving board 4170, or the gaming board Game board side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in 4 is sent from the motor drive board serial I / O port to the motor drive board 4165. Door-side motor for transmitting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 Door-side motor-driven light emission composed of motion data and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 A screen for transmitting data from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board to the door frame base board 194 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, or for displaying on the liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition to transmitting control data (display command) to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d is sent to the sound source IC 4140c. Or output.

  Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting original positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the motor drive board 4165. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided in the door frame 5 and the pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are door frame base substrates. 194, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on the operation signal. doing.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on control data (sound commands) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided in the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. The speaker 821 is controlled so that music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects flow, and is provided in the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194. Control is performed so that music, sound effects and the like according to various effects flow from the speakers 130, 222, and 262.

  In addition to the watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”) built into the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the peripheral control unit 4140 is not shown, and an external watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external”). The peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT together to diagnose whether or not its system is running out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, a plurality of serial inputs different from the initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, movable body driving command, and display command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp driving board 4160 and the motor driving board 4165. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The lamp driving board 4160 sends a lighting signal or a blinking signal to the decorative boards 214, 216, 254 provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command. 256, 286, 320, 322, 430, 432, etc. are output to the LEDs such as 256, 286, 320, 432, 432, etc., and based on the received game board side lighting flash command, the lighting signal or the flashing signal of each game board side decorative board provided in the game board 4 Or output to LED. It should be noted that a plurality of lamp effects patterns are also prepared for such lamp effects including the lamps on the frame side, and the plurality of these lamp effects patterns are prepared on the basis of a command indicating a winning or fluctuation pattern received from the main control board 4100. A specific lamp effect pattern of the lamp effect patterns is selectively executed over a predetermined time. In addition, as the plurality of lamp effect patterns, for example, a plurality of display effect patterns prepared to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are prepared so as to be paired with each other. When a specific display effect pattern appears, it is desirable that the specific lamp effect pattern associated with the display effect pattern is selectively executed so as to match the display effect of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The motor drive board 4165 is provided on the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 or the game board 4 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 based on the received drive command of the movable body. Also output to motors and solenoids (not shown) of the units 3100, 3400, 3500.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the press operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are driven by the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 and the lamp drive. Or input via the substrate 4160.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the side speaker 130 and the upper speaker 222 of the door frame 5 through the lamp driving board 4160 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. 262, or from the speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 through the lamp driving substrate 4160, control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow. In this example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged on the upper side of the gaming window 101, and the lower part of the main body frame 3 are provided. By sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal added with a lower speaker 391, which will be described later, or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) to the low-frequency speaker 821. In addition, it is possible to present a sound effect (sound production) with a sense of reality more than before.

[3-4. LCD controller]
Next, as shown in FIG. 110, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the peripheral control board 4010 stores a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, various commands, and various data. A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, a VDP (abbreviation of video display processor) 4150c for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, a character ROM 4150d for storing various screen data displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the character ROM 4150d. And a character RAM 4150e to which various stored data are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP 4160c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to draw on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Control is in progress. If the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an execution signal (to be described later) from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010, its control data (display command), and A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constituted by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e. In this non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in advance is defined for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c, and then the screen data following the top screen data. Extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the head screen data, and outputs it to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, when the VDP 4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c outputs a running signal indicating that fact to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer system”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900. This is the output method.

  The character ROM 4150d stores a very large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. If the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, if the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the drawing speed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as a unit. For example, when displaying various persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. Thus, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 with the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter referred to as “sprite superposition sequence”) set.

  Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in 2 × 3 horizontal, for example. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 repeats the main scanning in which the display state for each pixel is set in one direction along the pixel and the direction crossing the one direction sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1900, the main scanning is performed sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the data are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  Further, the liquid crystal display device 1900 has a built-in backlight (cold cathode tube) that is turned on by an inverter board 4162 (see FIG. 110).

[3-5. Power system]
Next, the power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. First, the power supply board 851 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board will be described. FIG. 111 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 112 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. Note that the grounds of the various substrates and the grounds of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground of the power supply substrate 851 although not shown.

[3-5A. Power supply board]
The power supply board 851 is electrically connected to the power cord, and the plug of the power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the island facility. When the power switch 852 is operated, the power supplied from the island facility is supplied to the power supply board 851 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 111, the power supply board 851 has a full-wave rectification circuit 851a, a power factor correction circuit 851b, a smoothing circuit 851c, a + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, a + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, a + 12V creation circuit 851f, and a + 24V creation. A circuit 851g is provided. The full-wave rectification circuit 851a performs full-wave rectification of AC 24 volts (AC 24V) supplied from the island facility and supplies the rectified current to the power factor correction circuit 851b. This power factor improvement circuit 851b improves the power factor of the full-wave rectified power to generate DC + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 851c. The smoothing circuit 851c smoothes + 37V by removing the input + 37V ripple, and + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, + 12V creation circuit 851f, + 24V creation circuit 851g, payout control board 4110 and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872. The + 5.2V creation circuit 851d creates a direct current + 5.2V (DC + 5.2V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5.2V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c.

  The + 5.25V creation circuit 851e creates a direct current + 5.25V (DC + 5.25V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5.25V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The + 12V creation circuit 851f creates a direct current + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The + 24V creating circuit 851g creates DC + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The voltages created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, the + 12V creation circuit 851f, and the + 24V creation circuit 851g are supplied to the payout control board 4110, and the + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, the + 12V creation circuit 851f, and the + 24V creation circuit 851g. The generated voltage is supplied to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872. Note that AC24V supplied from the island facility is also supplied to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 via the power supply board 851 in addition to the full-wave rectifier circuit 851a.

  The power supply board 851 includes capacitors BC0 and BC1. The capacitor BC0 is a backup power source of a RAM (main control built-in RAM 4100e) built in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 in the payout control board 4110. This is a backup power source for RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

  As described later, + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d is supplied to the payout control board 4110 and is also supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. + 5.2V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4111a and also to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. + 5.2V supplied to the main control board 4100 is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e via the diode MD0.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 851 (hereinafter referred to as “the negative terminal of the capacitor BC1”) is grounded, and the positive terminal (hereinafter referred to as “the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1”). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the payout control board 4110. That is, as for the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d, a current flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4111a, the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM that is forward by the diode PD0, the + terminal of the capacitor BC1; An electric current flows toward.

  In this way, the capacitor BC1 has an electrical connection method in which + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d returns to the payout control board 4110 and then from the payout control board 4110 back to the power supply board 851. 2V can be applied and charged. As a result, when the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d is not supplied to the payout control board 4110, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control MPU4111a does not operate, but the stored contents are retained by applying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has come to be.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 (hereinafter referred to as “the negative terminal of the capacitor BC0”) is grounded, and the positive terminal (hereinafter referred to as “the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0”). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 4100. That is, the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e that is forward by the diode MD0, the + terminal of the capacitor BC0, An electric current flows toward. As described above, the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply board 851 from the supply control board 4110 and the supply control board 4110 again from + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d. Depending on the connection method, + 5.2V is applied and charging is possible. As a result, when the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d is not supplied to the main control board 4100, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 4100 as the main VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e. It has become so.

[3-5B. Voltage supplied to each control board]
Next, an outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied mainly to the payout control board 4110, the main control board 4100, and the firing power supply board 831 will be described.

  Three types of voltages, + 5.2V, + 12V, and + 24V, created by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the payout control board 4110 as shown in FIG. 111, and the main control board is passed through this payout control board 4110. 4100 is also supplied. In addition, four types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V created by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, and the peripheral control board is provided via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872. On the other hand, among the four types of voltages, three types of voltages of +5.25 V, +12 V, and +24 V are supplied to the peripheral relay terminal plate 882. As shown in FIG. 112 (a), four types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V supplied to the peripheral control board 4010 are + 5.25V, + 12V, and Three kinds of voltages of + 24V are supplied to the lamp driving circuit 4160a of the lamp driving board 4160, and various signals such as a lighting signal, a flashing signal, and a gradation lighting signal are output from the lamp driving circuit 4160a to various decorative boards of the game board 4. The four types of voltages are supplied to the drive source drive circuit 4165a of the motor drive board 4165, and drive signals are output from the drive source drive circuit 4165a to an electrical drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the game board 4. Of the four types of voltages, two types of voltages of +24 V and +37 V are supplied to the liquid crystal display device 1900. The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a liquid crystal module 1900a that is controlled for drawing, and a backlight power source that is a power source for the backlight of the liquid crystal module 1900a. + 24V is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1900a, and + 37V is a backlight. Power is being supplied. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), three types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the door frame base substrate 194. Of these three types of voltages, + 12V is supplied to the + 9V creation circuit 194a to create DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”). In addition to the three types of voltages, the door frame base substrate 194 supplies four types of voltages including +9 V generated by the +9 V generation circuit 194 a to various decorative substrates of the door frame 5.

[3-5C. Voltage supplied to dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 111, the payout control board 4110 includes a payout control filter circuit 4110a and a power failure monitoring circuit 4110b in addition to the payout control MPU 4111a. The payout control filter circuit 4110a is supplied with + 5.2V from the power supply board 851, and removes noise from the + 5.2V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 through the diode PD0, this + 5.2V is supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851, and monitors these + 12V and + 24V signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure. When the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b detects signs of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at + 12V and + 24V, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 as a power failure warning. This power failure warning signal is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010 via the main control board 4100, and as shown in FIGS. 112A and 112B, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is transmitted via the peripheral control board 4010. The backlight power supply 1900b is transmitted to the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194, and the various decorative substrates of the door frame 5 through the door frame base substrate 194. Etc. are to be transmitted.

  In addition to + 12V and + 24V being supplied to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b, + 12V is also supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 4111e of the payout control unit 4111, and + 24V is, for example, payout of the payout control unit 4111 It is also supplied to the motor drive circuit 4111d and the like. Further, +37 from the power supply board 851 is not used at all in the payout control board 4110 and is supplied to the launch power supply board 831 as it is via the payout control board 4110. The firing power supply substrate 831 creates a predetermined voltage, which will be described later, from the supplied + 37V and supplies it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d of the firing control unit 4120.

[3-5D. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 111, the main control board 4100 includes a main control filter circuit 4100h in addition to the main control MPU 4100a and the like. The main control filter circuit 4100h is supplied with + 5.2V from the payout control board 4110, and removes noise from this + 5.2V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 through the diode MD0, this + 5.2V is supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 4100a. For example, + 12V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control input circuit 4100f and the like, and + 24V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g and the like, for example.

[3-5E. Voltage supplied to launch power board]
As shown in FIG. 111, launch power supply substrate 831 includes DC / DC converter 831a and electrolytic capacitor SC0 (capacitance: 4700 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The DC / DC converter 831a steps down + 37V from the payout control board 4110 to create a direct current + 35V (DC + 35V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 35V”) to drive the firing solenoid of the launch control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110. This is supplied to the circuit 4120d.

  The negative terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (hereinafter referred to as “−terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0”) is grounded, while the plus terminal (hereinafter referred to as “positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0”). Is electrically connected to the + 35V output terminal of the DC / DC converter 831a. That is, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is charged by applying + 35V output from the DC / DC converter 831a. In the present embodiment, the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 flows to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d of the dispensing control board 4110. It has become. Detailed description thereof will be described later.

[3-6. Driving solenoid drive method]
Next, a method for driving the firing solenoid 654 will be described. First, the drive system of the firing solenoid 654 will be described, and then the input / output current, output voltage, signal logic and waveform, etc. at predetermined points of the drive circuit will be described. FIG. 113 is a block diagram showing a driving circuit for a firing solenoid, FIG. 114 is a circuit diagram showing a shunt regulator circuit, an amplifier circuit, and an operational amplifier circuit group, and FIG. 115 is a diagram showing characteristics of the DC / DC converter. 116 is a timing chart of predetermined points in the drive circuit for the firing solenoid of FIG.

[3-6A. Launch solenoid drive system]
As shown in FIG. 113, the drive system of the firing solenoid 654 is mainly composed of a firing control input circuit 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b, a firing timing circuit 4120c, a firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d, and a ball in the dispensing control board 4110. The feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e, the DC / DC converter 831a of the firing power supply board 831, the electrolytic capacitor SC0, the power factor improvement circuit 851b of the power supply board 851, and the smoothing circuit 851c are configured.

  When the CR unit 6 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the launch control input circuit 4120a receives power (AC24V) from the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the CR unit 6 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110. Is output to the firing timing circuit 4120c as a CR connection signal, and a detection signal from the touch sensor 516 that detects whether a palm or a finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle is input. When the detection signal from the firing stop switch 518, which is output as a touch detection signal to the firing timing circuit 4120c and detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped according to the player's will, is input. The stop detection signal is output to the launch timing circuit 4120c.

  The launch timing circuit 4120c permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 based on the CR connection signal, the touch detection signal, and the launch stop detection signal from the launch control input circuit 4120a. Specifically, the firing timing circuit 4120c has a first state that the CR connection signal is not input because the CR unit 6 is not electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Case, touch detection signal is the second case that the palm or finger is not touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, the firing stop detection signal tells that the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped Among the third cases, when one of the cases is applicable, the launching of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is prohibited, while when not all of the cases, the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is permitted.

  The firing timing circuit 4120c is input with the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b. When the launching solenoid 654 is permitted to launch a game ball, 100 game balls per minute are played based on this clock signal. A firing reference pulse is generated so as to be launched toward 1100 and output to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d, and a ball feed reference pulse is generated by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number of times (5 times in this embodiment). It outputs to the feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e. The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d drives the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 by a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e drives the ball feeding solenoid 585 by + 24V from the power supply board 851.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d mainly includes a shunt regulator circuit 4121a, an amplifier circuit 4121b, a voltage comparison circuit 4121c, and a switching circuit 4121d. The shunt regulator circuit 4121a is supplied with + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d of the power supply board 851. The + 2.5V stabilized from this + 5.2V (DC + 2.5V, hereinafter “ + 2.5V ”) and is supplied to the amplifier circuit 4121b.

  As shown in FIG. 114A, the shunt regulator circuit 4121a mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0. The shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 has a reduced temperature drift due to the ambient temperature, and can create and supply a stabilized power supply that is held at a constant voltage with respect to the load. The REF terminal that is the reference voltage input terminal and the K terminal that is the cathode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 are electrically connected to + 5.2V via the resistor PR2, and the resistor PR2 connects to the REF terminal. The input current is limited. The K terminal outputs +2.5 V to the amplifier circuit 4121b. This +2.5 V is smoothed by removing ripples (AC component convoluted with voltage) by the capacitor PC0 connected to the ground (the capacitor PC0 also serves as a low-pass filter). The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Returning to FIG. 113, the amplifier circuit 4121 b amplifies +2.5 from the shunt regulator circuit 4121 a by a factor of 2 to create DC +5.0 V (DC +5.0 V, hereinafter referred to as “+5.0 V”). Then, it is supplied to the rotational position detection sensor 512 in the handle device 500 via the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192.

  As shown in FIG. 114A, the amplifier circuit 4121b mainly includes an operational amplifier PIC1. The operational amplifier PIC1 is configured as a non-inverting amplifier circuit, and + 2.5V from the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 of the shunt regulator circuit 4121a is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC1, and the operational amplifier PIC1. One end of the inverting input terminal (− terminal) is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR3 whose ground is grounded, and the other end of the resistor PR4 whose one end is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC1. And are electrically connected. The resistance values of the resistors PR3 and PR4 are set so that the amplification factor (flat loop gain) of the operational amplifier PIC1 is doubled. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC1 is, as described above, + 5.0V obtained by amplifying + 2.5V applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC1, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the handle. The rotation position detection sensor 512 in the handle device 500 is supplied via the device relay board 192. This +5.0 V is smoothed by removing ripples (AC component convoluted with voltage) by the capacitor PC2 connected to the ground (the capacitor PC2 also serves as a low-pass filter). Note that + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC1 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC1 grounded to the ground.

  Returning to FIG. 113, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a three-terminal variable resistor. One fixed terminal at both ends is supplied with +5.0 V from the above-described amplifier circuit 4121b, and the other fixed terminal at both ends is a handle. It is electrically connected to the resistor PR0 of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d in the payout control board 4110 via the device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal board 880. The other end of the resistor PR0 is grounded. From the variable terminal, which is a terminal different from the fixed terminals at both ends of the rotational position detection sensor 512, it is possible to take out the divided voltage of the voltage applied to both ends according to the variable resistance value. The voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is connected to resistances PR5 and PR6 (described later) in the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d of the payout control board 4110 via the handle device relay board 192 and the main side relay terminal board 880. 114 (b)), and the divided voltage of the resistor PR6 is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the firing intensity target voltage.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (b), the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the rotational position detection sensor 512 of the handle device 500 is passed through the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880 as described above. The ripple (the AC component convolved with the voltage) is removed and smoothed by the grounded and grounded capacitor PC3 (the capacitor PC3 also serves as a low-pass filter), and the firing solenoid of the dispensing control board 4110 The voltage is applied to an operational amplifier circuit group configured as a voltage follower of the drive circuit 4120d. As shown in FIG. 114 (b), this operational amplifier circuit group mainly includes an operational amplifier PIC2 at the first stage and an operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage. The voltage from the handle device 500 is a voltage on the order of volts, and is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC2. The inverting input terminal (− terminal) of the first stage operational amplifier PIC2 is electrically connected to the output terminal of the first stage operational amplifier PIC2. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC2 in the first stage outputs the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC2 by a factor of 1, that is, as it is as a voltage on the order of volts. The first-stage operational amplifier PIC2 simply outputs the input voltage, which is a voltage in the order of volts, but outputs the voltage to the first-stage input-side circuit for applying the voltage from the handle device 500 and the subsequent-stage operational amplifier PIC3. Therefore, circuit separation from the first stage output side circuit is realized. Thereby, the voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the first stage input side circuit to the first stage output side circuit, and the influence of the first stage output side circuit can be prevented from being given to the first stage input side circuit. The + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC2 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC4 grounded to the ground.

  The output terminal of the first operational amplifier PIC2 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR5 in addition to its own inverting input terminal (− terminal), and the other end of the resistor PR5 is a non-inverting input terminal ( + Terminal). The non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC3 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR6 whose one end is grounded, in addition to the other end of the resistor PR5. As a result, the voltage from the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC2 in the first stage is a voltage in the order of volts because it simply outputs the input voltage, which is a voltage in the order of volts as described above, and is divided by the resistors PR5 and PR6. The voltage of the divided resistor PR6 is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage as a voltage on the order of millivolts. The inverting input terminal (− terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage doubles the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC2, that is, the voltage in the millivolt order is output to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the firing intensity target voltage. To do. The operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage simply outputs the input voltage, which is the voltage of the resistor PR6 in the millivolt order divided by the resistors PR5 and PR6, but the resistor in the millivolt order divided by the resistors PR5 and PR6. Circuit separation is realized between a rear-stage input side circuit for applying a voltage that the PR6 takes on and a rear-stage output side circuit for outputting the voltage to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c. Thereby, the voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the rear stage input side circuit to the rear stage output side circuit, and the influence of the rear stage output side circuit can be prevented from being given to the rear stage input side circuit. The + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC3 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC5 grounded to the ground.

  Returning to FIG. 113, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 flows through a resistor PR1 whose one end is connected to the ground, so that a voltage in the millivolt order that this resistor PR1 takes is used as a firing control voltage. 4121c. The voltage comparison circuit 4121c is also applied with the firing intensity target voltage, which is the voltage in the millivolt order described above. As described above, the firing control voltage and the firing strength target voltage to be compared by the voltage comparison circuit 4121c are resistances from the voltage in the order of volts to the voltage in the order of millivolts in the payout control board 4110 (the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d). The voltage is stepped down by the voltages that PR1 and PR6 handle. That is, since the wiring pattern is applied through the wiring pattern formed on the payout control board 4110, the wiring pattern is not easily affected by noise, and the voltage comparison circuit 4121c has a firing control voltage and a firing strength target voltage at a voltage in the millivolt order. Can be compared with each other, between the board device of the payout control board 4110 and the hitting ball launching device 650 and between the board devices of the payout control board 4110 and the handle device 500 via the wiring. Since the wiring is easily affected by noise, the influence of noise between the substrate devices is suppressed by using a voltage in the order of volts.

  The voltage comparison circuit 4121c is an inverting circuit that compares the firing control voltage with the firing strength target voltage, and outputs the comparison result to the switching circuit 4121d. The comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is a logical output of HI or LOW, and when the launch control voltage is greater than the launch intensity target voltage, it becomes LOW (hereinafter referred to as “L”), while the launch control voltage. Is smaller than the firing intensity target voltage, it becomes HI (hereinafter referred to as “H”). Thus, since the output logic is H or L depending on the comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4121c, the output signal is input to the switching circuit 4121d as an ON / OFF signal.

  The switching circuit 4121d receives the current from the DC / DC converter 831a included in the firing power supply board 831 according to the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c each time the firing reference pulse from the firing timing circuit 4120c is input. A combined current obtained by combining the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC <b> 0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650. Specifically, when the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is input, the switching circuit 4121d generates a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. On the other hand, when the OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is input while flowing to the firing solenoid 654, the current flowing to the firing solenoid 654 is cut off. In other words, the switching circuit 4121d receives the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c, and supplies the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. If the voltage divided by the resistor PR1 becomes larger than the firing intensity target voltage as the firing control voltage, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4121c becomes L and OFF A signal is output to the switching circuit 4121d, and the switching circuit 4121d cuts off the constant current flowing through the firing solenoid 654. By this interruption, the current does not flow to the firing solenoid 654, so that the firing control voltage becomes smaller than the firing strength target voltage, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4121c becomes H again, the ON signal is output to the switching circuit 4121d, and the switching circuit As described above, 4121d supplies the firing solenoid 654 with a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. As described above, in accordance with the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c, the switching circuit 4121d generates a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 with the firing solenoid 654. Therefore, the switching circuit 4121d performs control to cause the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c to self-oscillate and flow the current to the firing solenoid. That is, the switching circuit 4121d functions as a “self-excited oscillation constant current circuit”, and brings the firing control voltage close to the firing intensity target voltage. Thereby, the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is rotated, and the launch solenoid 654 can be driven with a launch intensity corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 to launch a game ball toward the game area 1100.

  When the player touches the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and is at the original rotational position where the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is not rotated, the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is applied to the resistor PR0. The applied voltage is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as the voltage follower described above, and is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the firing intensity target voltage. In this case, when the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is output to the switching circuit 4121d, the switching circuit 4121d combines the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. The merged current is passed through the firing solenoid 654. The current output from the DC / DC converter 831a is the minimum output current. At this time, the firing intensity of the firing solenoid 654 is at least over the firing rail 660. That is, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR0 is the firing intensity target voltage, the current commensurate with the voltage (the minimum output current output from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are combined). When the merged current) flows to the firing solenoid 654, the game ball launched by the firing solenoid 654 reaches the game area 1100 along the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 even if the game ball can jump over the firing rail 660. Therefore, the foul balls are collected by the foul cover unit 540. In other words, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR0 is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as a voltage follower and applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the firing intensity target voltage, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 is the minimum current. However, even if this minimum current flows to the firing solenoid 654, all the game balls that have been launched are collected as foul balls. Thereby, since it can prevent overlapping with the game ball sent to the firing rail 660 by the ball feeding solenoid 585, the firing solenoid 654 is prevented from launching the overlapping game ball toward the game area 1100. In addition, it is possible to prevent the firing solenoid 654 from being overloaded and to prevent failure.

  In this embodiment, by adopting the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 for the shunt regulator circuit 4121a, the firing intensity target voltage applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is a constant voltage from the shunt regulator circuit 4121a + 2.5V. Is amplified by the amplifier circuit 4121b and is divided by the rotational position detection sensor 512 of the handle device 500, so that the rotational position of the front part 506 of the rotary handle body is the same as that of the divided voltage. When held at the position, no fluctuation occurs and the voltage is held constant. As a result, the switching circuit 4121d causes the firing control voltage to be close to the launch intensity target voltage by causing the combined current to flow to the launch solenoid 654 of the ball hitting device 650, so that the launch control voltage becomes the same as the launch intensity target voltage. When the rotational position of the front handle body 506 is held at the same rotational position, the combined current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 does not change, and a constant current flows. Therefore, the firing solenoid 654 causes the game ball to play the game area 1100. The firing strength launched towards the same is the same. Therefore, “flying unevenness” of the game ball due to the drive firing of the firing solenoid 654 can be prevented.

  In addition, the island facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed has a game ball circulation system in which game balls discharged from a plurality of pachinko gaming machines are ground and supplied to the pachinko gaming machine again. For this reason, the temperature in the island facility is extremely high due to heat generated by polishing of the game balls, heat generated by collision and friction between the game balls, and heat generated by the power supply board of the pachinko gaming machine and various electric decorations. In this embodiment, as described above, by adopting the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 for the shunt regulator circuit 4121a, + 2.5V can be stabilized even in an environment where heat is trapped in the pachinko facility. It can be output. As a result, since the fluctuation of +2.5 V due to temperature is suppressed, the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the rotational position detection sensor 512, that is, the “fluctuation” of the firing intensity target voltage can be suppressed. The voltage comparison circuit 4121c can output a control signal to the switching circuit 4121d without including the minute voltage. In other words, when the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle is the same rotational position, “unevenness” can be suppressed in the firing strength at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 1100, so that “unevenness” of the game ball is suppressed. be able to.

[3-6B. Input / output current and output voltage of DC / DC converter]
Next, the input / output current and output voltage of the DC / DC converter 831a will be described with reference to FIG. 115 with respect to the input current at the point TA and the output current and output voltage at the point TB shown in FIG. The TA point is a point for referring to the input current Iin of the DC / DC converter 831a, and the TB point is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a. The output voltage Vout is a potential difference from the ground.

  First, as shown in FIG. 115A, the relationship between the output voltage Vout at the point TB and the output current Iout is such that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases from + 35V. Specifically, in the section A where the output voltage Vout is from + 35V to + 30V, the output current Iout is constant at about 360 mA, and in the section B where the output voltage Vout is from + 30V to + 20V, the output voltage Vout decreases as the output voltage Vout decreases. In section C in which the current Iout increases from 360 mA to 400 mA and the output voltage Vout increases from +20 V to +10 V, the output current Iout increases from 400 mA to 660 mA by approximately 260 mA and the output voltage Vout increases by +10 V as the output voltage Vout decreases. In the section D from 1 to +5 V, the output current Iout increases from 660 mA to 1010 mA by about 350 mA as the output voltage Vout decreases. In the vicinity of +5 V to zero V, the output current Iout is approximately 1010 mA.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (b), the relationship between the input current Iin at the point TA and the output current Iout at the point TB is that the input current Iin decreases and the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases from + 35V. It has become a relationship. Specifically, in the section A where the output voltage Vout is from + 35V to + 30V, the output current Iout is constant at about 360 mA, whereas the input current Iin is reduced by about 80 mA from 400 mA to 320 mA. In this section A, when a current corresponding to the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle flows through the firing solenoid 654 and the input current Iin is larger than the output current Iout, the game ball launched toward the game area 1100 is still a game. While the firing intensity is difficult to reach the region 1100, when the current corresponding to the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle body flows through the firing solenoid 654 and the input current Iin begins to become smaller than the output current Iout, The game ball launched toward the area 1100 has a launch intensity that reaches the game area 1100. In section B where the output voltage Vout is from + 30V to + 20V, the output current Iout increases from 360 mA to 400 mA by about 40 mA, while the input current Iin decreases from 320 mA to 260 mA by about 60 mA, compared with the output current Iout. Thus, the input current Iin is completely reduced. In the section C where the output voltage Vout is from + 20V to + 10V, the output current Iout is increased by approximately 260 mA from 400 mA to 660 mA, whereas the input current Iin is decreased by approximately 50 mA from 260 mA to 210 mA. The input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout. In section D where the output voltage Vout is from +10 V to +5 V, the output current Iout is increased by about 350 mA from 660 mA to 1010 mA, whereas the input current Iin is decreased by about 35 mA from 210 mA to 175 mA. Similar to C, the input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout.

  When the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 360 mA, the combined current obtained by combining 360 mA and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the minimum current, that is, the player is in front of the rotary handle body. The current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 when the rotating handle main body front 506 is not rotated is touched 506, whereas the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 1010 mA. In some cases, the combined current of 1010 mA and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the maximum current, that is, the player touches the front of the rotary handle body 506 and rotates the front of the rotary handle body 506 clockwise. Thus, the current flows through the firing solenoid 654 when it is at the limit rotational position. Thus, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a minimum output current value of 360 mA and a maximum output current value of 1010 mA. When the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a exceeds 1000 mA, the firing intensity of the firing solenoid 654 is that the game ball that has already jumped to the game area 1100 along the outer rail 1111 collides with the stop 1114. Then, it rolls downstream along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and is strong enough to be collected at the out port 1151 without entering the various winning ports. For this reason, the range of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a that can be taken when the player turns the front of the rotary handle body 506 clockwise to play a game is larger than 360 mA and smaller than 1000 mA. (360 mA <value of output current Iout <1000 mA), which is a milliampere order current.

[3-6C. Relationship between input / output current and output voltage of DC / DC converter and firing reference pulse from firing timing circuit]
Next, at a constant rotational position in front of the rotary handle body 506, the output current Iout and output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a at the point TB shown in FIG. 113, and the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c Will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the TB point is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout (potential difference from the ground) of the DC / DC converter 831a, and the TC point is a firing reference pulse from the firing timing circuit 4120c. This is a point for referring to T0.

  As described above, when the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c allows the launching of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654, 100 game balls per minute, that is, 60000 ms, are directed toward the game area 1100. Since it is set so as to be ejected, as shown in FIG. 116 (a), its pulse width is 30 ms, and its period T is 600 ms.

  Here, when the player touches the rotary handle body front 506 and rotates the rotary handle body front 506 to reach the limit rotational position, the DC / DC in the original rotational position not rotated. A waveform of the output voltage Vout of the converter 831a will be described.

  If the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c is input to the switching circuit 4121d of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d when the front of the rotary handle body 506 is at the limit rotational position, the state shown in FIGS. As described above, the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-described maximum current and starts to flow to the firing solenoid 654 (timing t0). ). When this maximum current is flowing to firing solenoid 654, the voltage of DC / DC converter 831a (the voltage of electrolytic capacitor SC0) drops to +5 V in accordance with the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a shown in FIG. The value of the output current Iout of 831a is 1010 mA which is the maximum output current described above. Then, when the input is stopped after 30 ms has elapsed after the input of the firing reference pulse T0, the discharge proceeds until the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches near zero V (timing t1). When the maximum current to the firing solenoid 654 is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a gradually recovers to + 35V. Accordingly, charging of electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a. Specifically, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases as shown in FIG. Immediately after the maximum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is close to zero V, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is equal to the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a. When charging starts with a certain current of 1010 mA and the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a recovers to near +35 V, charging is continued with a current of 360 mA, and then the charging is completed. This charging is already completed before the next firing reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). That is, charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from the time when the current firing reference pulse T0 is input and 30 ms elapses until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input.

  On the other hand, when the firing handle front pulse 506 from the firing timing circuit 4120c is input to the switching circuit 4121d of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d when the front of the rotary handle body 506 is in the original rotational position, FIG. As shown in (d), the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-described minimum current, and is supplied to the firing solenoid 654. The flow starts (timing t0). When this minimum current is flowing to firing solenoid 654, the voltage of DC / DC converter 831a (the voltage of electrolytic capacitor SC0) slightly decreases in accordance with the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a shown in FIG. The value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 360 mA, which is the minimum output current described above. Then, after the input of the firing reference pulse T0, when 30 ms elapses and the input is stopped, the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is slightly advanced (timing t1). When the minimum current to the firing solenoid 654 is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a gradually recovers to + 35V. Accordingly, charging of electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a. Specifically, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases as described above. Immediately after the minimum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 slightly falls, but belongs to the section A, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is output from the DC / DC converter 831a. Charging is started by a current of 360 mA that is the current Iout, and then the charging is completed. This charging is already completed before the next firing reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). That is, charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from the time when the current firing reference pulse T0 is input and 30 ms elapses until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input.

  As described above, even when the maximum current and the minimum current flow through the firing solenoid 654, due to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a, the charge discharged from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 within the discharge time of 30 ms when the current firing reference pulse T0 is input. Can be completed within the remaining 570 ms charging time until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input.

  Here, consider a case where the DC / DC converter 831a adopts a control method in which a current flows through the firing solenoid 654 alone in a state where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 does not exist within a period of 30 ms after the firing reference pulse T0 is input. In this control method, since the current that the DC / DC converter 831a independently flows to the firing solenoid 654 is about 2 A to 3.5 A, this current is supplied from the power supply board 851. When the firing solenoid 654 is driven, a large current larger than 2 A to 3.5 A flows instantaneously. Then, every time the firing reference pulse T0 of 30 ms is generated with a period T of 600 ms, the load on the power supply board also increases with this period T. In other words, the power supply board supplies a predetermined current to electronic components, decorations used for decoration, etc. in addition to the instantaneous large current that flows when the firing solenoid 654 is driven. If the power supply upper limit is exceeded, the power supply is cut off for safety.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the DC / DC converter 831a independently drives the firing solenoid 654 without the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the period of 30 ms which is the pulse width after the firing reference pulse T0 is input. The amperage-order current supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the DC power supply of +37 V on the power supply board 851 is extended to a period of 600 ms from when the firing reference pulse T0 is inputted until the next firing reference pulse T0 is inputted. When the firing solenoid 654 is driven by the combined current of the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0, the “first current” in the order of milliamperes supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the DC power supply of + 37V of the power supply board 851. And electrolytic When the power supply SC0 is charged with the power from the DC / DC converter 831a, it is distributed to the “second current” of the milliampere order supplied from the DC power supply of + 37V of the power supply board 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a. it can. As a result, the amperage order of the amperage order supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the + 37V DC power supply of the power supply board 851 in the period of 30 ms which is the pulse width after the firing reference pulse T0 is input in the absence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. The current is supplied from the DC power source of + 37V of the power supply board 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a during a period of 600 ms from when the firing reference pulse T0 is input in the presence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input. It can be averaged by the “first current” and the “second current” in the order of milliamperes supplied. Therefore, a load for supplying an instantaneous large current by driving the firing solenoid 654 can be eliminated from the power supply board 851. Further, it is possible to eliminate the time spent on designing the operating conditions of the safety device when the power supply board 851 is overloaded.

[3-6D. Relationship between firing reference pulse from launch timing circuit and ball feed reference pulse]
Next, the firing reference pulse T0 and the ball feeding reference pulse T1 from the firing timing circuit 4120c will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the TC point is a point for referring to the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c, and the TD point shown in FIG. 113 refers to the ball feeding reference pulse T1 from the firing timing circuit 4120c. It is a point to do.

  The ball feed reference pulse T1 is set to 150 ms (= T0 (30 ms) × 5) which is five times 30 ms which is the firing reference pulse T0. When the firing reference pulse T0 is input to the switching circuit 4121d of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d, as shown in FIGS. Input to the circuit 4120e (when timing t0, 150 ms elapses, the input is stopped (timing t3). Thereby, the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven to perform ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585. Thus, the next set of game balls to be launched can be completed before the next firing reference pulse T0 is input. Each time the firing reference pulse T0 is input, the game ball is moved to the game area 1100. It can be launched continuously toward.

[3-7. Control processing on main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 129. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing in the main control board. FIG. 118 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing upon occurrence of power interruption. FIG. 119 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. FIG. 120 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special control process. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the start opening winning process. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the change start process. FIG. 123 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process. FIG. 124 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process.

  FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game start process. FIG. 126 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit game start process. FIG. 127 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit game process. FIG. 128 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit game process. The timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment) by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100. FIG. 129 is an explanatory diagram showing a table configuration in the special symbol random number storage means.

  As shown in FIG. 117, in the main process, when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes a process at power-on (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM 4100e is normal (is a set value when a power failure occurs). If normal, the backup data stored in the RAM 4100e is used. Executes processing to return to the power outage (power recovery processing), and if the backup data is abnormal, clears RAM 4100e and performs CPU peripheral device settings (normal initial settings, interrupt timing settings, etc.) Do.

  When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored as backup data in the RAM 4100e. If the RAM clear switch 4100c that instructs to clear the backup data stored in the RAM 4100e during the power-on process is on, the RAM 4100e is cleared and normal initialization is performed. In addition, when the backup data is not stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 during the power-on process, the RAM 4100e is cleared and normal initialization is performed.

  In the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has been activated to the peripheral control unit 4140 when normal initialization is executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control unit 4140 that the main control board 4100 has been activated. Note that backup data is also stored in the RAM 4100e even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is again stored. When the supply is started, a power-on process is executed.

  When this power-on process is completed, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process in which each game process is repeatedly executed. At the start of this loop processing, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board 851. That is, since a plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, after the power supply voltage supplied to the pachinko machine 1 from an external power supply is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage by the power supply board 851, Supply to each device. Accordingly, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board 851 is equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, the power failure notice indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 851 to the main control board 4100 is stopped. A signal is transmitted. Then, when a power failure notice signal is detected by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 in step S2, a process at the time of occurrence of power interruption is executed (step S4).

  The process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption is performed when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board 851 after the power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery). In order to start from the state, the state when the power failure occurs is stored as backup data in the RAM 4100e. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the processing at the time of power-off occurrence is not an interrupt processing, but a branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  By the way, when the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the random number update process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S2). S3). The random number updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118, the process at the time of power-off occurrence is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main process. First, the main control MPU 4100a performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM 4100e is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 4100e (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the content of the RAM 4100e before the power failure is retained at the time of power recovery.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 4100e (step S4c). When the above processing is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM 4100e (step S4d) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. In this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power interruption”), the process at the time of the occurrence of a power interruption has started. Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, there is a possibility that it is impossible to return from the infinite loop in the above processing. In order to avoid such adverse effects, the main control MPU 4100a of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed. However, the watchdog timer enters the process when the power is cut off and is not updated. As a result, even when a power interruption occurs due to a momentary power failure and an infinite loop is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the main control MPU 4100a is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

  Next, in the timer interrupt process, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 during the execution of the main process. As shown in FIG. The control MPU 4100a executes the processing from step S11 to step S18 after executing the register saving process (step S10). In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signal of the above-described switches (gate switch, start port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 in step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the random number update process 2 may be updated in the random number update process 1 as well. In the payout operation process in step S13, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is set on the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

  Further, in the normal control process in step S14, the normal symbol is changed based on the progress of the game, and the normal electric accessory (that is, the movable piece 2106 that opens and closes the second start port 2102 by the start port solenoid 2105) is controlled. Then, a process of changing the open / close state of the second start port 2102 is executed. In the special control process in step S15, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed on the special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186 based on the progress state of the game, or a special prize is obtained by the special electric accessory (that is, the attacker solenoid 2108). The opening / closing member 2107) that opens and closes the mouth 2103 is controlled to execute a process of changing the open / closed state of the special winning opening 2103.

  In the subsequent output data setting process in step S16, a process for outputting a state signal indicating a gaming state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer), and a drive signal is output to a special figure start memory display (not shown). The process to perform is performed. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting the effect command to the peripheral control unit 4140 is executed. In the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) to the peripheral control unit 4140 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the process from step S11 to step S17 is executed, a register restoration process (step S18) is executed, and the process ends.

  Here, various random numbers that are updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) described above will be described. In this embodiment, as the various random numbers used in the game, the big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state (including “small hit” described later) (big hit determination), the big hit determination A random number for a big hit symbol used to determine whether or not to make a promiscuous big hit when it is determined that a big hit gaming state is to be generated in (), a special symbol when it is determined that a big hit gaming state is to be generated in the big hit determination A jackpot symbol random number used to determine the stop symbol, a reach determination used to determine whether or not to lose with a reach mode when it is determined that a big hit gaming state does not occur in the jackpot determination (reach determination) Random number, used to determine the variation display pattern (variation time) of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186 Fluctuation display pattern random numbers (variation time random numbers), normal hit determination random numbers used for determination of whether or not the movable piece 2106 that opens and closes the second start port 2102 is controlled to be open (determination per normal lottery), etc. is there.

  In this example, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a small hit gaming state using a big hit determination random number. It is also determined whether or not to make a probability variation jackpot (the probability that a specific profit is given is set higher than usual) using a jackpot symbol random number. Note that the variable display pattern of the special symbol may be determined using the reach determination random number, and the variable display pattern of the decorative symbol controlled by the liquid crystal display device 1900 may be determined.

  Among these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, a jackpot determination random number related to the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, a jackpot symbol random number, and a normal symbol determination random number related to whether or not the movable piece 2106 is controlled to be opened. Update. That is, the random number used for the determination relating to the occurrence of the big hit gaming state and whether or not to control the movable piece 2106 to the open state is updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing in this way, the probability (probability to determine that a big hit gaming state is generated, probability to determine that the movable piece 2106 is controlled to be opened) in a predetermined period with each random number can be made constant. It is possible to prevent the person from becoming disadvantaged. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the generation of the big hit gaming state and the reach determination random number not related to the normal lottery and the variable display pattern random number are updated.

  Next, in the special control process, the main control MPU 4100a executes the processes from step S20 to step S90 as shown in FIG. In the start opening winning process of step S20, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the first start opening 2101 and the second start opening 2102, and a process of updating the lottery hold state is executed when winning. In the variation start process of step S30, the number of stored (holding number) in each big hit lottery is confirmed, and if the number of held (total number of stored) is not 0, the variation display of the corresponding special symbol is started. Set up. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a big hit gaming state (profit granting state) is to be generated (winning determination means), and if a big hit gaming state is to be generated, whether or not to be a promising big hit is determined. . In the variation pattern setting process in step S40, settings related to variation display of each special symbol and each decorative symbol are performed. Specifically, the variation display pattern of each special symbol is determined, and the variation time set corresponding to the variation display pattern (after the variation display of the special symbol is started by the special symbol display devices 1185 and 1186) Set the timer to the time until stop.

  In the changing process of step S50, the timer set with the changing time is monitored in the changing display pattern setting process (step S40), and the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display is displayed based on the time-out of the timer. The special symbol display on the display 1186 (corresponding to the special symbol display 1185, 1186) is stopped. At this time, if it is determined in any one of the big win lotteries in the variation start process (step S30), the processing selection flag is updated to “3”, and the small win game state is set in the same lottery. If the determination is made, the process selection flag is updated to “4”, and if it is not determined to be the big hit or small hit gaming state, the process selection flag is updated to “0”.

  In the big hit game start process (profit granting state control means) in step S60, settings for starting the big hit game state are performed. Although specifically described later, the number of times of opening / closing the opening / closing member 2107 and the opening time are set according to the type of jackpot. In addition, in the small hit game start process in step S70, setting for starting the small hit game state is performed. Although specifically described later, the number of times of opening / closing the opening / closing member 2107 at the small hit, the opening time, and the like are set. In the big hit game process of step S80, the winning prize opening 2103 is opened and the opening / closing member 2107 is closed when a predetermined number of game balls have won the winning prize opening 2103 or when a predetermined period has elapsed. Process. In addition, if the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state has not reached the predetermined number, a process for opening the opening / closing member 2107 is performed again. When the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state has reached the predetermined number, a processing selection flag Is updated to “5”. In addition, after the number of rounds reaches a predetermined number, processing for generating a probability variation state and a short-time gaming state is executed (special gaming state control means).

  In the small hit game process of step S90, the big winning opening 2103 is opened and the opening / closing member 2107 is closed when a predetermined number of game balls have won the big winning opening 2103 or when a predetermined period has elapsed. Perform the process. Although details will be described later, the opening of the big prize opening 2103 in the small hit game process is set so that the profit to the player is extremely low compared to the big hit game process (step S80). Next, specific processing in steps S20 to S90 will be described.

  Next, in the start port winning process, as shown in FIG. 121, first, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 2109, and the detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 2109. In this case, it is determined that the game ball has won the second start port 2102 (YES in step S201), and if the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2109 is not output, the game ball is input to the second start port 2102. Is determined not to win (NO in step S201). When it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has won the second starting port 2102, various random numbers for the second big hit lottery (random numbers for big hit determination, random numbers for big hit symbols, etc.) are acquired and provided in the RAM 4100e. It is determined whether or not the value of the second pending number counter is less than 4 which is the upper limit value (step S202). If the second hold number counter is less than 4 in step S202, the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are executed. These processes will be described later. If the value of the second hold number counter is 4 in step S202, the second start hold storage process and the hold history update process are not executed.

  On the other hand, when the detection signal is not output from the second start port sensor 2109 in step S201 (NO in step S201), or when the value of the second hold number counter is 4 (NO in step S202). Determines whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 2101 (step S205). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 3022. When it is determined in step S205 that the game ball has won the first start port 2101 (YES), various random numbers for the first big hit lottery are acquired, and the value of the first holding number counter provided in the RAM 4100e is the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the value is less than 4 (step S206). If the first hold number counter is less than 4 in step S206, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are executed. If the value of the first hold number counter is 4 in step S206, the first start hold storage process and the hold history update process are not executed.

  Subsequently, in the variation start process, as shown in FIG. 122, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is “0”. If it is “0” (YES in step S301), the process after step S302 is performed. If the process is not “0” (NO in step S301), the variation start process is terminated. In step S302, it is determined whether or not the values of the two reserved number counters (the first start memory number and the second start memory number) corresponding to the special symbol indicators 2390a and 2390b are “0”. Since the sum of the values in the two pending number counters indicates the number of random number values stored in the start memory storage area (special symbol random number storage means 4515, 2940 (see FIG. 129)), in step S302 If the value of any of the holding number counters is both “0” (YES), it is determined that the start condition regarding the first big hit lottery and the second big hit lottery is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S317.

  On the other hand, if the value of any of the number-of-holds counters is not “0” in step S302 (NO), the start memory transfer process is executed (steps S303 to S311). As shown in FIG. 129 (a), the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 is provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [4] 4515d). Each is associated with the value of the stored number (“1” to “4”). In addition, as shown in FIG. 129 (b), the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 is also provided with four storage areas (storage areas [1] 4532a to [4] 4532d). The two start memory numbers (“1” to “4”) are associated with each value. Each of the storage areas 4515a to 4515d and 4532a to 4532d includes a big hit determination random number storage area 4580 in which a big hit determination random number is stored, and a big hit symbol random number storage area 4581 in which a big hit symbol random number is stored. .

  In the start memory transfer process, first, whether or not the value of the hold number counter (second start memory number) corresponding to the second special symbol display 1186 is “0”, that is, the second special symbol random number memory. It is determined whether or not random numbers are stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the means 4532 (step S303). If random numbers are stored (NO), each of the nth storage areas (n is a natural number of 2 or more) Processing for shifting various random numbers stored in (storage area [2] 4532b to storage area [4] 4532d) to the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [3] 4532c), respectively. (Step S304) and processing for obtaining a random number related to the second special symbol stored in the storage area [1] 4532a (Step S305) are executed. In addition, “1” is set to the special symbol variation flag (step S306), and a process of subtracting “1” from the holding number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is executed (step S307).

  On the other hand, when the random number is not stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532, that is, when the value of the hold number counter corresponding to the second special symbol display 1186 is “0”. (YES in step S303), stored in each of the nth storage areas (storage area [2] 4515b to storage area [4] 4515d) of the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 (n is a natural number of 2 or more). Stored in the storage area [1] 4515a and the process of shifting the various random numbers to the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [3] 4515c), respectively. A process of acquiring a random number related to the first special symbol (step S309) is executed. Further, a process of subtracting “1” from the number-of-holds counter corresponding to the first special symbol (step S311) is executed.

  That is, regarding the first special symbol, when holding, as in the case of the second special symbol, the value of the holding number counter (first start memory number) is increased by “1”, and the extracted random number is It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the value of the first start memory number, but when the first special symbol starts to change, only when the second start memory number is “0”, that is, the first special symbol Each random number is read from the first storage area “1” 4515a of the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 only when one process is waiting and the second processing by the second special symbol is not waiting. ing. This control enables the second process to be performed with priority over the first process.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, that is, whether or not the probability variation state has a high probability (step S312). If not the probability variation state (NO in step S312), the probability variation is not activated. Jackpot determination table, that is, a table set with a low probability of being a jackpot, on the other hand, in the case of a probability variation state (YES in step S312), the table at the time of probability variation operation, that is, the probability of being a jackpot Select a highly set table. In this example, the probability of winning a big hit is set to 6/499 when the probability variation is not activated (ie, normal), and the probability of being a big hit is 60 when the probability variation is activated (ie, when the probability is high). / 499.

  After any table is selected in step S313 or step S314, a random number related to a special symbol obtained in step S305 or step S309 based on that table is a random number corresponding to a big hit (big hit value) ) Is determined (step S315). If it is a big hit value (YES in step S315), the big hit flag is set to "ON" (step S316), and the process proceeds to step S317. On the other hand, if the acquired random number is not a big hit value (NO in step S315), it is determined whether or not the random number is a random number corresponding to a small hit (small hit value) (step S318). If it is a small hit value (YES in step S318), the small hit flag is set to “ON” (step S319), and the process proceeds to step S317. If it is not the small hit value (NO in step S318), the process proceeds to step S317 without going through step S319. In step S317, the process flag is updated to “1”, and the variation start process is terminated. Note that the ON / OFF states (set state and reset state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag are stored in the RAM 4100e. The OFF state (reset state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag means that a value of “0” is set, and the ON state (set state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag is a value of “1”. Is set.

  Next, in the variation pattern setting process, as shown in FIG. 123, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “1”. If it is “1” in step S317 (YES in step S401), The process after step S402 is executed, and if it is not “1” (NO in step S401), the variation pattern setting process is terminated. In step S402, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is “ON”. If the flag is “ON” in step S316 (YES in step S402), the probability variation jackpot or It is determined which of the big hits is a normal big hit (step S403). If it is a big hit with probability fluctuation (YES in step S403), it is determined whether or not it is a special hit (step S404). As will be described in detail later, any of the probability variation jackpots is “a probability variation state in which the probability that a specific profit is given in the subsequent lottery is set higher than usual, and any special symbol display 1185. When the special symbol changing time in 1186 is shortened (relatively shorter than normal time), and the ease of winning in the second starting port 2102 is increased more than usual, “Generating” is common, but it is set so that the degree of profit given to the player is greatly different between the probability fluctuation big hit that is a special hit and the general probability fluctuation big hit that is not a special hit.

  That is, in the general probability fluctuation big hit, the opening time per opening / closing member 2107 for opening and closing the big winning opening 2103 is set to a time that allows a plurality of (for example, ten) game balls to win with plenty of time. In addition, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2107 is controlled so as to perform many times (for example, 7 times) giving many benefits. On the other hand, in the probability variation big hit which is a special hit, the opening time per opening and closing member 2107 is set to a time that can barely win several (for example, one or two) game balls. The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2107 is controlled to be performed twice, for example.

  If it is determined in step S404 that it is not a special hit, that is, if it is determined that it is a general probability fluctuation big hit (NO), a probability variation big hit variation display pattern table is selected (step S405), while a special hit is determined. If it is determined that it is a hit (YES in step S404), the probability variation special hit fluctuation display pattern table is selected (step S406). If it is determined in step S403 that the probability variation is not big hit, that is, if it is decided that the normal big hit is made (YES), the normal big hit fluctuation display pattern table is selected (step S407).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S402 that the big hit flag is not “ON” (NO), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is “ON” (step S408), and “ON” is determined in step S319. If YES (YES in step S408), the small hit variation display pattern table is selected (step S409). When the small hit flag is not “ON” (NO in step S408), it is determined whether or not the acquired reach determination random number is a random number (reach value) corresponding to reach (step S410). ) If it is a reach value (YES in step S410), a change display pattern table for loss reach is selected (step 411). If it is not a reach value (NO in step S410), a change display for loss is displayed. A pattern table is selected (step S412).

  In this way, when a variable display pattern table is selected in any step, the variable display pattern is selected based on the variable display pattern table and the variable display pattern random number acquired in either step S305 or step S309. Is determined (step S413). Next, a selection value is set as an effect command for designating the variable display pattern determined in step S413 (step S414), and a timer (this implementation) provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 has a variable time corresponding to the variable display pattern. In this form, it is set to an effective period timer (step S415). In step S415, the variation time set in the variation display pattern determined in step S413 is set in the effective period timer.

  Note that the variable display pattern command set in step S414 is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in command transmission output processing. When a variable display pattern command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by command transmission output processing, a drive signal is output to the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186, and the special symbol variable display is started. Let Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S416), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  Subsequently, in the changing process, as shown in FIG. 124, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “2” (step S501), and when it is “2” in step S416 (step S501). If YES in step S502, the process after step S502 is executed. If it is not “2” (NO in step S501), the process under change is terminated. In step S502, the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 determines whether or not the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing. It is determined whether or not the variation time of the symbol or the second special symbol is up (step S503). When the variation time is up, that is, when the variation time is over (YES in step S503), the variation is stopped (step S504).

  If none of the special symbols has changed (NO in step S502), or if the change time has not ended (NO in step S503), the special symbols are changing without being stopped. The process ends.

  After stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol in step S504, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is “ON” (step S505). If the big hit flag is “ON”, the processing flag is updated to “3”. (Step S506). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not “ON” (NO in step S505), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is “ON” (step S507). If it is “ON”, the processing flag is set to “4”. Is updated to “0” (step S508). If it is not “ON”, the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S509). As described above, after the processing flag is updated in any of step S506, step S508, or step S509, the changing process is ended.

  Next, in the big hit game start process, as shown in FIG. 125, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is “3”. If it is “3” in step S506 (YES in step S601). ), The process after step S602 is executed, and if it is not “3” (NO in step S601), the big hit game start process is terminated. In step S602, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is operating, that is, whether or not it is in the probability variation state. If the probability variation state is present (YES), the operation of the probability variation function is temporarily stopped, and the process proceeds to step S604. To do. If the state is not the probability variation state, that is, if it is the normal low probability state (NO in step S602), the process proceeds to step S604 without executing the process of step S603. In step S604, it is determined whether or not the time saving function is operating, that is, whether or not the time saving gaming state is set. If the time saving gaming state is set (YES), the operation of the time saving function is stopped (step S605). The process proceeds to S606. On the other hand, if it is not the short-time gaming state (NO in step S604), the process proceeds to step S606 without executing the process in step S605.

  In step S606, it is determined whether the type of big hit is a general big hit or a special big hit. The conditions, that is, the number of big hits to be released, the opening time per one time, and the winning limit number to the big winning opening 2103 are set (step S607). On the other hand, when the big hit is a special hit (YES in step S606), the special winning opening number, the limited number of winnings, and the opening time per time are set in the big winning opening 2103 (step S608). Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “5” (step S609), and the big hit game start process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the small hit game start processing, as shown in FIG. 126, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “4”. If it is “4” in step S508 (YES in step S701). ), The processing of step S702 and step S703 is executed, and if the processing flag is not “4” (NO in step S701), the small hit game start processing is terminated without executing the processing of step S702 and step S703. To do. In step S702, the condition for opening the big prize opening 2103 in the case of small hits, that is, the number of small hits for opening the big prize opening 2103 by the opening / closing member 2107, and the opening time per one are set. It should be noted that the number of times of opening in the small hit, the limited number of winnings, and the opening time are set to be the same as the conditions (step S608) set in the case of special hit. That is, the special hit and the small hit are set so that they cannot be visually discriminated. Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “6” (step S703), and the small hit game start process is terminated.

  Next, in the big hit game processing, as shown in FIG. 127, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “5”, and if it is “5” in step S609 (YES in step S801). If the process after step S802 is not “5” (NO in step S801), the big hit game process is terminated. In step S802, it is determined whether or not the big prize opening 2103 is open. If it is open (YES), the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the big prize opening 2103 is a predetermined time set in advance. Is reached (step S803), and if it has elapsed (YES in step S803), the open / close member 2107 is operated to close the special winning opening 2103 (step S805).

  Even if the set opening time has not elapsed (NO in step S803), the number of game balls won in the big winning opening 2103 after the big winning opening 2103 is opened is set in step S607. If the limit number (for example, 10) is exceeded (YES in step S804), the process proceeds to step S805 to close the special winning opening 2103. If the opening time of the big winning opening 2103 has not reached the set time (NO in step S803) and the number of winning game balls has not reached the limit (NO in step S804), The jackpot game process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the big prize opening 2103 is not being opened in step S802 (NO), the number of times the big winning opening 2103 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107 is set in the number of big hits opened in step S607 or in step S608. It is determined whether or not the specified number of special hits has been reached (step S806). If not reached (NO in step S806), the open / close member 2107 is controlled to open the big winning opening 2103 (step S807), and the big hit game process is terminated. As a result, a large amount of game balls can be awarded to the big prize opening 2103.

  In step S806, when the number of times of opening of the big winning opening 2103 has reached the set number (YES), that is, when the big hit gaming state is finished, the processing of step S808 to step S813 is executed, and the subsequent lottery is performed. Set the game state for. Specifically, first, the jackpot flag is set to “OFF” (step S808), and it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a win that activates the probability variation function (step S809). That is, it is determined whether the probability variation big hit including the special hit or the normal big hit. If the winning is a probability variation jackpot (YES in step S809), the operation of the probability variation function is started and a probability variation state with a high probability is set (step S810). That is, in the subsequent lottery, the probability of winning a big hit is set higher than normal, and the time-shortening function is activated until the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol or the second special symbol due to the lottery reaches a predetermined number (a specified number). .

  If the big hit is a special hit (YES in step S811), it is determined whether or not the probability variation function or the short time function is in operation (step S814). If it is not a special hit, that is, if it is a general probability fluctuation big hit (NO in step S810), or if a special hit is won when the probability fluctuation function or the time reduction function is already activated, The operation of the time reduction function is started (step S812), and then the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S813). That is, the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 varies the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the variation time of the first special symbol display 1186 or the second special symbol display 1186 is shortened. Increase the ease of winning a prize. On the other hand, if the probability variation function and the time-shortening function are not in operation, that is, if the probability variation state and the time-saving gaming state have not occurred and the special win is won (NO in step S814), the time-shortening function The process proceeds to step S813 without operating.

  On the other hand, if it is not a win that activates the probability varying function in step S809, that is, if it is a normal big hit (NO), the operation of the time-shortening function is started and the specified number of times of operation in the time-shortening function is set (step S815). Then, the process proceeds to step S813. That is, the time-shortening function is operated until the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol or the second special symbol due to the lottery reaches a predetermined number (specified number).

  Next, in the small hit game processing, as shown in FIG. 128, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “6”. If it is “6” in step S703 (YES in step S901). ), The process after step S902 is executed, and if it is not “6” (NO in step S901), the small hit game process is terminated. In step S902, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls won for the grand prize opening 2103 has reached a preset maximum number of winnings (step S902). If the maximum number of winnings has not been reached yet (NO) ), It is determined whether or not the special winning opening 2103 is open (step S903). If it is determined in step S903 that the big prize opening 2103 is being opened (YES), the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the big prize opening 2103 reaches a predetermined time set in advance. In step S904, if it has elapsed (YES in step S904), the open / close member 2107 is operated to close the special winning opening 2103 (step S905). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of times the special winning opening 2103 has been opened has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) (step S906). It is updated to “0” (step S907), and the small hit game process is terminated.

  If the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 has not reached the predetermined time in step S904 (NO), or if the opening number has not reached the predetermined number in step S906 (NO), the process of step S907 is executed. The small hit game process is terminated without doing so. In step S903, if the big prize opening 2103 is not open (NO), the big prize opening 2103 is opened, and a game ball can be won (step S908). In step S902, if the number of game balls won for the big prize opening 2103 has reached a preset maximum number of prizes (YES), it is determined whether or not the big prize opening 2103 is open (step). S909) If it is open (YES), the special prize opening 2103 is closed (step S910), and the process proceeds to step S907. On the other hand, when the special winning opening 2103 is not open (NO in step S909), the process proceeds to step S907 without executing the process of step S910. In step S907, the processing flag is updated to “0”.

[3-8. Control processing at peripheral control unit]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control unit 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 134. FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-main processing, and FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of 16 ms steady processing. FIG. 132 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing (step S1100). FIG. 133 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process (step S1200). FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210).

  In the sub-main process, as shown in FIG. 130, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initial setting process (step S1001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the peripheral control RAM 4140e mounted on the peripheral control unit 4140 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S1001) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S1002).

  In this example, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, when 16 ms elapses, the 16 ms elapse flag is displayed. At the same time as T is set, the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). In this way, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S1002 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S1003), and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S1004).

  In the 16 ms steady process, the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, and 322 provided in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the door frame 5, and the game board 4 based on the effect command received from the main control board 4100. , 430, 432, 3014, etc., and processing for controlling the speakers 130, 222, 262, 821, etc. of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are executed. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S1002 again, and every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms, the above-described steps S1003 to S1004 are repeated. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S1002 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  Next, in the 16 ms steady process, the sub-peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the processes in steps S1100 to S1600 as shown in FIG. In the command analysis process in step S1100, the effect command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S1200, a control process related to the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed based on the variable display pattern command. Specifically, setting of a notice effect, determination of a stop symbol of a decorative symbol, and the like are performed.

  In the sound control process in step S1300, a control process related to the speakers 130, 222, 262, and 821 for generating a sound effect (for example, BGM) that promotes the effect is executed. In the light emission decoration control process of step S1400, the control process regarding the light emission decoration by each decoration board | substrate 214,216,254,256,286,320,322,430,432,3014 with which the door frame 5 or the game board 4 was equipped is performed. Run. In the information output process in step S1500, an effect command is transmitted to the lamp driving substrate 4160. In the random number update process of step S1600, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S1200) is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S1100 to step S1600 in the 16 ms steady process ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is started from the beginning immediately after the 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady process (in step S1100 described later). Do not execute (from command parsing process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set. When it is determined in step S1002 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms elapse process is performed. Start.

  In this example, the random number update process (step S1600) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. is not. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing in the sub-main processing and the 16 ms steady processing.

  Next, in the command analysis processing, as shown in FIG. 132, first, it is determined whether or not an effect command has been received from the main control board 4100 (step S1101). In this embodiment, when an effect command is received from the main control board 4100, other processing such as 16 ms steady processing is interrupted to generate command reception interrupt processing, and the received command is transmitted to the peripheral control of the peripheral control unit 4140. The received command storage area in the RAM 4140e is saved. The reception command storage area is provided with a plurality of areas corresponding to the reception order of the production commands, and in the command reception interrupt process, the reception command storage areas are stored in the respective areas corresponding to the reception order of the production commands. In step S1101, the contents of the received command storage area are confirmed, and if the effect command is stored, the effect command in the reception order of the reception command storage area is read (step S1102).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the read effect command is a variable display pattern command (step S1103). If the read effect command is a variable display pattern command (YES in step S1103), a variable display pattern reception flag is set. Then, it is stored in the variable display pattern storage area in the peripheral control RAM 4140e mounted on the peripheral control unit 4140 (step S1104).

  On the other hand, if the read effect command is not a variation display pattern command (NO in step S1103), it is determined whether the read effect command is a probability change jackpot command (step S1105), and the read effect command is a probability change jackpot command. If (YES in step S1105), a probability variation jackpot flag is set (step S1106). If the read effect command is not a probability change jackpot command (NO in step S1105), a flag corresponding to the received effect command is set (step S1107).

  Subsequently, in the effect control process, as shown in FIG. 133, any one of steps S1210 to S1230 is performed with reference to the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress state of the game.

  In the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, a setting is made to start the decorative symbol variation display if a variable display pattern command is received. Specifically, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined according to the variable display pattern command and the probability variation jackpot command, and the setting of the notice effect is performed.

  In the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220) executed when the processing selection flag is “1”, when the variation stop command is received, a control command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 to stop the decorative symbol variation display. Do.

  In the jackpot display process (step S1230) executed when the process selection flag is “2”, a display or jackpot indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state is given to the liquid crystal display device 1900 in accordance with the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control board 4100. Control is performed to display the game state (for example, round display).

  Next, in the decorative symbol variation start process, as shown in FIG. 134, first, it is determined whether or not the variation display pattern reception flag is set (step S1221). The variation display pattern reception flag is a flag that is set in step S1104 of the command analysis process (step S1100) described above and indicates that a variation display pattern command has been received from the main control board 4100. If the variable display pattern reception flag is not set in step S1221, (NO), it is determined that the variable display pattern command has not been received, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the variable display pattern reception flag is set (YES in step S1221), the variable display pattern reception flag is reset (step S1222), and the variable display pattern based on the received variable display pattern command generates a big hit. It is determined whether it is a variable display pattern (whether it is a hit pattern) (step S1223a).

  If the variable display pattern is not a winning pattern (NO in step S1223a), a stop symbol for the lost symbol is determined (step S1224). If the variable display pattern is a hit pattern (YES in step S1223a), it is determined whether the probability variation big hit flag is set (step S1223b). Is determined (step S1225). If the probability variation big hit flag is not set (NO in step S1223b), the stop symbol of the non-probable big hit symbol is determined (step S1226). The probability variation big hit flag is reset when the big hit gaming state is started in the big hit display process (step S1230). The time when the probability variation big hit flag is reset is not limited to this. For example, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped in the decorative symbol variation processing (step S1220), specifically, when the variation stop command is received, the reset is performed. Alternatively, it may be reset when the big hit gaming state is ended in the big hit display process (step S1230).

  In the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol corresponding 1: 1 with the first special symbol, the second decorative symbol corresponding 1: 1 with the second special symbol, the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol. A common decorative symbol sequence (hereinafter referred to as “common decorative symbol sequence”) corresponding to both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed. The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are composed of combinations of figures such as circles, crosses, sankaku, and the like. , And combinations that are lost are set in advance. In other words, if the variable display pattern is a winning pattern, stop any combination symbol from the multiple combinations set as the probable big hit symbol of the first decorative symbol or the multiple combinations set as the non-probable big hit symbol Determine as a symbol.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs a notice selection process for determining whether or not a notice effect is to be executed based on the notice determination random number (step S1227), and is then stored in the variable display pattern and the notice type storage area. A display command is set according to the notice pattern and the stop symbol of the common decorative symbol sequence determined in steps S1225, S1226, and S1227 (step S1228). Then, the process selection flag is updated to “1” and the process ends (step S1229). The display command set in step S1228 is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 in the information output process (step S1500), and the liquid crystal display is based on the reception of the display command by the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150. The apparatus 1900 starts executing the decorative symbol variation display.

  Further, when the notice pattern stored in the notice type storage area is read in step S1228, the contents of the notice type storage area are cleared after the notice pattern is read. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the notice effect based on the notice pattern determined when the change display of the previous decoration symbol is erroneously started in the next decoration pattern change display from being executed.

[4-1. Functional configuration for games on the main control board]
Next, a functional configuration relating to a game such as a special symbol controlled by the main control board will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 138. FIG. 135 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration related to the first big hit lottery on the main control board. FIG. 136 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration related to the second big hit lottery on the main control board. FIG. 137 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration relating to an advantageous gaming state generated according to the lottery results in the first big hit lottery and the second big hit lottery. FIG. 138 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration related to the normal lottery on the main control board.

  As shown in FIG. 135, the main control board 4100 includes a first hit determination table 4501, a first hit symbol table 4502, a first hit variation time setting table 4503, and a configuration related to the first big hit lottery. A first lose time variation time setting table 4504 is stored in advance. Based on these tables 4501 to 4504, whether or not the lottery is determined in the first big hit lottery, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 1185, and the variation time. Is determined. The first hit determination table 4501 shows the relationship between the big hit determination random number value and the success or failure of the big hit or the small hit, and the winning ratio is different between the normal time and the high probability. The first winning symbol table 4502 shows the relationship between the big winning symbol random value and the stop symbol in the first special symbol indicator 1185. Each of the big winning symbol random values divided into a plurality of groups. The range is associated with the lighting state of the two LEDs (first special symbol).

  The first hit time variation time setting table 4503 is used when the result of the first big hit lottery is a big hit or small hit, and the first random time random number and the first special symbol display 1185 extracted. The first lost time changing time setting table 4504 is used when the result of the first big lottery lottery is lost and is extracted. The relationship between the random time for fluctuation time and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1185 is shown. Note that the first lottery probability selection means 4505 performs a process of selecting one of the normal table and the high probability table based on the gaming state. Although not shown, the first hit symbol table 4502 includes a probability variation big hit table, a special hit table, a normal big hit table, and a small hit table, respectively. A table corresponding to the type of winning determined by the first winning / failing determining means 4506 described later is selected.

  Further, when a winning to the first start port 2101 is detected by the first start port sensor 3022 on the main control board 4100, a first hit determination for extracting a big hit determination random number from a random counter (random number generating means). Random number extracting means 4507 and first hit symbol random number extracting means 4508 for extracting big hit symbol random numbers are provided. Also, first variation time random number extraction means 4509 is provided for extracting variation time random numbers based on the determination random number and jackpot symbol random number. When the big hit determination random number is extracted by the first hit determination random number extracting means 4507, the first hit determination means 4506 for determining whether or not the big hit is determined using the first hit determination table 4501, and the first hit symbol When the big hit symbol random number is extracted by the random number extracting unit 4508, the first stop symbol determining unit 4510 for determining the stop symbol in the first special symbol indicator 1185 using the first hit symbol table 4502 is provided. Yes.

  Further, when the random time random number extraction means 4509 extracts the random time for variation time and the first hit / fail determination means 4506 determines that it is a big hit, the first variation time random time setting table 4503 is used. When the variation time of the first special symbol is determined and the random number for variation time is extracted and the first hit / fail determination means 4506 determines that the variation is lost, the first variation time variation time setting table 4504 is determined. The first variation time determination means 4511 is provided for determining the variation time of the first special symbol using.

  Further, on the main control board 4100, the first special symbol display 1185 starts the variation of the first special symbol, and after the variation time determined by the first variation time determination means 4511 elapses, the first stop symbol determination is performed. Special symbol fluctuation control means 4512 for causing the variable symbol to stop at the stop symbol determined by the means 4510, a success / failure command related to the presence / absence of the big hit determined by the first success / failure determination means 4506, and the first Command transmission means 4513 for transmitting a control command including a variation display command corresponding to the variation mode (time) of the special symbol is provided.

  Further, the main control board 4100 has a fixed number of balls (four times) when a winning to the first starting port 2101 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3022 during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. ) Is counted as an upper limit, and the first start memory number is counted and stored, and the first reserved digest means 4514 is provided for repeatedly displaying the first special symbol as many times as the start memory number. In other words, the first holding digesting means 4514 for waiting for the execution of the first process based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 3022 is provided. The first hold digesting means 4514 will be described in more detail. The first hold digesting means 4514 is provided with a first hold control means 4514a and a first digestion control means 4514b. If a winning at the first start port 2101 is detected by the first start port sensor 3022 during the change of the one special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start memory number must reach the upper limit value “4”. For example, the value of the first start memory number is increased by “1”, the first big hit determination random number and the first big hit symbol random number are extracted, and each of the extracted random numbers is used as the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 ( (See FIG. 139).

  On the other hand, if the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops changing and the first first special symbol can be changed, the first digestion control unit 4514b sets the start memory number related to the first special symbol to “ If not "0", the first big hit determination random number and the first big hit symbol random number are read from the storage area corresponding to the starting stored number [1], the first starting stored number is reduced by "1", and Each random number value stored in each storage area n is shifted to n-1 storage areas.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 136, the main control board 4100 includes a second hit determination table 4521, a second hit symbol table 4522, and a second hit variable time setting table 4523 as the configuration related to the second big hit lottery. , And a second loss time variation time setting table 4524 is stored in advance. Based on these tables 4521 to 4524, whether or not the lottery is selected in the second big lottery, the stop symbol in the second special symbol indicator 1186, and The variation time is determined. Since the configuration of each table is the same as the configuration of each table in the first big hit lottery, detailed description is omitted here.

  The main control board 4100 has second hit determination random number extraction means 4525 for extracting a big hit determination random number related to the second big hit lottery when the second start port sensor 2109 detects a winning at the second start port 2102. And second random number random number extracting means 4526 for extracting the big hit symbol random number for the second big hit lottery, and the second random number extracting unit for extracting the variable time based on the determination random number and the big hit symbol random number Means 4527 are provided. Further, when the big hit determination random number extraction means 4525 extracts the big hit determination random number, the second hit determination table 4521 using the second hit determination table 4521 and the second hit determination unit 4528 for determining whether or not the big hit is determined. When the big hit symbol random number extraction means 4526 extracts the big hit symbol random number, the second special symbol display unit 1186 uses the second special symbol display unit 1186 to determine the stop symbol in the second stop symbol determination unit 4529. Yes.

  Furthermore, when the random time for variation time is extracted by the random number extraction unit for second variation time 4527 and it is determined that the big hit is determined by the second success / failure determination unit 4528, the second variation time setting table 4523 is used. When the variation time of the second special symbol is determined, and when the variation time random number is extracted and the second hit determination unit 4528 determines that the variation is lost, the second variation time variation time setting table 4524 is determined. The second variation time determining means 4530 is provided for determining the variation time of the second special symbol using the. Note that the second winning / failing determining means 4528 includes a winning restriction means 4528a, and restricts the “special big hit”, which is a big hit that does not give a specific profit to the player, so as not to occur.

  The special symbol variation control means 4512 starts the second special symbol variation in the second special symbol indicator 1186, and after the variation time determined by the second variation time determination unit 4530 has elapsed, the second stop symbol variation is performed. Fluctuation is stopped at the stop symbol determined by the determining means 4529. Further, when a winning to the second start port 2102 is detected by the second start port sensor 2109 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the main control board 4100 has a fixed number of balls (four times). ) Is counted as an upper limit and the second starting memory number is counted and stored, and the second reserved digesting means 4531 is provided for repeatedly displaying the variation of the second special symbol by the starting memory number. In other words, the second holding digesting means 4531 for waiting for the execution of the second process based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port sensor 2109 is provided.

  The second hold digesting means 4531 will be described in more detail. The second hold digesting means 4531 is provided with a second hold control means 4531a and a second digestion control means 4531b. If the second start port sensor 2109 detects a winning to the second start port 2102 during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the second start memory number has reached the upper limit value “4”. If not, the value of the second start memory number is increased by “1”, the second big hit determination random number and the second big hit symbol random number are extracted, and the extracted random numbers are used as the second special symbol random number storage means 4532. (See FIG. 139) in the highest storage area. On the other hand, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops changing and the second second special symbol can be changed, the second digestion control unit 4531b sets the start memory number related to the second special symbol to “ If not “0”, the second big hit determination random number and the second big hit symbol random number are read from the storage area corresponding to the start memory number [1], the second start memory number is decreased by “1”, and Each random number value stored in each storage area n is shifted to n-1 storage areas.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 137, the main control board 4100 has five advantageous games that give a game state advantageous to the player based on the lottery result by the first success / failure determination means 4506 or the second success / failure determination means 4528. State control means is provided. Here, the advantageous game state includes opening the opening / closing member 2107 and allowing the game ball to be awarded to the big winning opening 2103. The opening / closing member 2107 is controlled to be opened by the attacker solenoid 2108 of the attacker unit 2100.

  More specifically, the predetermined profit granting unit 4541 sets the opening time per opening / closing member 2107 as the first predetermined time that allows several (for example, 1 to 2) game balls to barely win, By performing the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2107 at least once (in this example, twice), a predetermined profit is given to the player. As a result, a predetermined number of game balls can be won in the big winning opening 2103, but since the number that can be won is very small, the profit received by the player is relatively small. On the other hand, the specific profit granting means 4540 sets the opening time per opening / closing member 2107 as a second predetermined time that allows a plurality of (for example, 10) game balls to be awarded with a margin, and the opening / closing member By performing the opening / closing operation 2107 more times (seven times in this example) than the number of opening / closing operations in the case of giving a predetermined benefit, a specific benefit is given to the player. As a result, a large number of game balls can be awarded to the big prize opening 2103, and the player can obtain a large profit.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a first advantageous gaming state control means 4542 and a second advantageous gaming state control means 4543 as means for giving a specific profit by the specific profit giving means 4540, and a predetermined profit giving means 4541. As a means for giving a predetermined profit, a third advantageous gaming state control means 4544, a fourth advantageous gaming state control means 4545, and a fifth advantageous gaming state control means 4546 are provided.

  The first advantageous gaming state generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 4542 is a so-called “probability variation big hit”, and the lottery result of the first winning / failing determining means 4506 or the second winning / failing determining means 4528 is the first result. Occur. At this time, the specific profit is given by the specific profit granting means 4540, and the probability that the specific profit is given in the subsequent lottery is set higher than the normal time by the high probability state setting means 4547. That is, a probability variation state with a high probability is assumed. In this example, in the jackpot determination table at high probability, 60 jackpot determination values that are determined to generate a jackpot gaming state are set out of 499 jackpot determination random numbers from 0 to 498. The jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot, is 60/499. On the other hand, in the normal jackpot determination table, six jackpot determination values are set out of 499 jackpot determination random numbers from 0 to 498, and the jackpot probability is 6/499.

  In the first advantageous game state, the first special symbol display unit 1548 or the second special symbol display unit 1186 causes the first special symbol display unit 1548 or the second special symbol display unit 1186 to change the variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In addition to shortening the frequency, the frequency at which the movable piece 2106 of the second start port 2102 is opened and closed until the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol or the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number (that is, the probability of winning in the normal lottery) is increased. By doing so, the easiness of winning a prize to the second starting port 2102 is increased as compared with the normal time. In other words, the short-time gaming state is set.

  The second advantageous gaming state generated by the second advantageous gaming state control means 4543 is a so-called “ordinary big hit”, and occurs when the lottery result of the first winning / failing determining means 4506 or the second winning / failing determining means 4528 is the second result. To do. In this win, the specific profit is given by the specific profit granting means 4540 in the same way as in the first advantageous gaming state, but in this case, the probability that the specific profit will be given in the subsequent lottery. Remains a low probability. That is, the probability fluctuation state is not entered, and the normal probability is maintained. Even in the second advantageous gaming state, the time is reduced by the temporary short state setting means 4548 until the predetermined number of times the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed after the specific profit is given. It becomes a gaming state, shortens the fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and increases the frequency with which the movable piece 2106 is opened and closed (that is, the probability of winning in the normal lottery), thereby holding the game ball Suppress.

  The third advantageous gaming state generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means 4544 is a so-called “special big hit”, and occurs when the lottery result of the first winning / decision determining means 4506 is the third result. In this win, first, a predetermined profit is given to the player by a predetermined profit giving means 4541 (a profit having a lower advantage than a specific profit). For the subsequent lottery, the probability that a specific profit is given is increased. That is, as in the first advantageous gaming state, the probability variation state is set. However, the short-time gaming state is generated only when the gaming state before the advantageous gaming state is generated satisfies a predetermined condition. That is, when the third advantageous gaming state occurs when the state is not the probability variation state and is not the short-time gaming state, the short-time gaming state is not generated and the probability variation state is set. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the short-time gaming state and the third advantageous gaming state occurs, the second short-time state setting means 4549 is operated to generate the short-time gaming state. Yes.

  The fourth advantageous gaming state generated by the fourth advantageous gaming state control means 4545 occurs when the lottery result of the first winning / decision determining means 4506 is the fourth result. At this time, as in the third advantageous gaming state, a predetermined profit is given to the player by the predetermined profit giving means 4541. However, for the subsequent lottery, a new probability fluctuation state is not generated. Whether or not the short-time gaming state is added is determined based on the gaming state.

  The fifth advantageous gaming state generated by the fifth advantageous gaming state control means 4546 occurs when the lottery result of the first winning / decision determining means 4506 is the fifth result. At this time, giving a predetermined profit to the player by the predetermined profit granting means 4541 and giving a predetermined profit by the high probability state setting means 4547 are the same as in the third advantageous gaming state. In the advantageous gaming state, when the third advantageous gaming state is generated when not in the short-time gaming state, the short-time gaming state is not generated and the probability variation state is set. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the short-time gaming state, when the third advantageous gaming state occurs, the second short-time state setting means 4549 is operated to generate the short-time gaming state.

  In this example, the winning ratios in the respective big wins are distributed differently in the case of the first winning / failing determining means 4506 and the second winning / failing determining means 4528. Specifically, in the lottery result of the first winning / decision determining means 4506, the first big hit generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 4542, that is, the probability fluctuation state in which both the probability fluctuation state and the fixed number of short-time gaming states are given. The big hit is set to 22% of the total big hit, and the second big hit generated by the second advantageous gaming state control means 4543, that is, the normal big hit that is given a short time gaming state for a certain number of times without being given a probability variation state. It is set to 45%.

  Further, the third big hit generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means 4544, that is, the probability variation state and the special big hit to which the conditional short time gaming state is given is set to 11%, and the fourth advantageous gaming state control means 4545 is set. The fifth big hit generated by the fifth advantageous gaming state control means 4546 is set to 11%, which is a special big hit that is given a conditional short-time gaming state without being given a probability variation state. That is, the special jackpot to which the probability variation state and the conditional short-time game state are given is set to 11%.

  On the other hand, in the lottery result of the second win / fail determination means 4528, the first big hit generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 4542 is set to 44% of the entire big hit, and the second advantageous gaming state control means 4543 generates the first big hit. The two big hits are set to 56%. The second hit / fail determining means 4528 is set so as not to generate a special big hit, that is, the third big hit, the fourth big hit and the fifth big hit. For this reason, it is possible to reliably prevent the probability fluctuation state from being terminated without giving a specific profit, and to suppress a significant decrease in gaming motivation due to sudden demotion.

  In addition, the ratio of the first big hit or the fifth big hit that gives a specific profit to the first big hit or the second big hit is higher in the second winning / decision determining means 4528. In the jackpot lottery by the first hit / fail determining means 4506, it is possible to limit the occurrence of jackpots to which a specific profit is given to some extent while opening the opening / closing member 2107 in the attacker unit 2100 relatively frequently. On the other hand, in the jackpot lottery by the second winning / decision determining means 4528 that is substantially effective in the short-time gaming state, there is a high possibility that a specific profit will be given. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 138, the main control board 4100 has a structure related to the normal lottery (lottery for increasing the easiness of winning the second starting port 2102) as a normal hit determination random number extracting means 4551, A normal hit determination table 4552 and a normal hit determination unit 4553 are provided. The normal hit determination random number extraction unit 4551 extracts a normal hit determination random number from a random counter (random number generation unit) when the gate sensor 2352 detects the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2350. Further, the normal hit determination table 4552 is divided into a high probability table and a normal probability table. In the high probability normal hit determination table, 251 normal hit determination random numbers from 0 to 250 are stored. Of these, 250 determination values for normal hit are set, and the probability of normal hit is 250/251.

  On the other hand, in the normal normal hit determination table, one of the determination values for normal hit is set out of 251 normal hit determination random numbers from 0 to 250, and the probability of normal hit is 1/251. ing. In the normal lottery at high probability, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 13.56 seconds, the opening time of the movable piece 2106 by the start port solenoid 2105 is 1180 ms, the number of times of opening is 3, and the interval between opening is It is set to 512 ms. On the other hand, in the normal lottery at normal time, the average symbol variation time is set to 13.6 seconds on average, the opening time of the movable piece 2106 is set to 180 ms, and the number of times of opening is set once.

  When the normal hit determination random number extraction unit 4551 extracts the normal hit determination random number, the normal hit determination unit 4553 extracts the extracted random number and the normal hit determination value stored in the normal hit determination table 4552. Are determined to be normal hits if they match. At this time, the gaming state determination means 4554 determines whether or not the gaming state is a specific gaming state, that is, a short-time gaming state, and if it is a short-time gaming state, a table with a high probability is selected and the short-time gaming is selected. If not, the normal table is selected. For this reason, even in the case of the first big hit generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 4542, when the short-time gaming state ends for a certain number of times, the table at the high probability is switched from the table at the normal time. ing.

  In addition, when the normal lottery determination unit 4553 determines whether or not the normal lottery is determined on the main control board 4100, the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 in a variable manner, and the change time (about 14 seconds or about 1 second). After the elapse of time, a normal symbol variation control means 4555 for displaying the result of the success / failure is provided. Further, when the normal hit determination unit 4553 determines that the normal hit is determined, after the normal symbol fluctuation stops, the movable piece 2106 is opened, and the opening control unit 4556 that makes it easy to win the game ball in the second starting port 2102. Is provided.

[4-1A. Game contents by main board]
Next, game contents by the main board 4000 including the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is moved to the game panel 1150 when the player rotates the handle device 500 arranged at the lower right of the door frame 5. The game area 1100 is placed in front of the game area 1100, and a game with a game ball is started. A game ball that has been driven into the upper portion of the game area 1100 flows down in the game area 1100 on the left or right side of the center accessory 2300 depending on the strength of the game.

  The game ball driving strength is determined by detecting the amount of rotation of the handle device 500 with the rotation position detection sensor 512 and then using the shot control unit 4120 with the shot control unit 4120 based on the detection signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512. The driving strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled so that it can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Further, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1150 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game balls flow down. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

  When the game ball that has been driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2300 flows down from the left and right sides to the upper shelf 2301 of the center accessory 2300, the upper shelf 2301 moves to the left area of the center accessory 2300. It is induced. Then, when a game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2300 enters the gate portion 2350 disposed on the left side of the center accessory 2300 and is detected by the gate sensor 2352, it is used for a normal hit determination as a normal lottery result. A random number is extracted. Then, based on the normal hit determination random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is variably displayed (the normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED emits light in red, green and orange alternately. ), And a normal symbol based on a random number for normal hit determination (ordinary lottery result) extracted after a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) is stopped (normal symbol indicator 1189 is displayed in red or green) ). The normal symbol variation display is performed based on the normal symbol variation pattern selected from the ordinary hit determination table 4552 (ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table).

  Specifically, if the selected random number is a “normal hit” random number, the normal symbol indicating the winning is stopped (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits green light), and the selected normal random number is a “normal lose” random number. In the case of, stop display is performed with a normal symbol suggesting a loss (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits red light). Then, when a normal symbol suggesting a hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 2106 that close the second start port 2102 expands for a predetermined opening time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds). The game ball can be awarded to the second start port 2102 by repeating a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times).

  Note that the variation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time of the movable piece 2106 at the second start port 2102 are changed in accordance with the first hit determination random number or the second hit determination random number (special lottery result). As a result of special lottery, when “short time per hour (including normal short time per hour, high probability per short time, etc.)” is extracted, it is normal to change the fluctuation time and expansion time to a short time. The hit determination table 4552 can be replaced from a normal table to a high probability table.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, an area where a game ball can flow is provided on the upper side of the center accessory 2300 from the center in the left-right direction to the left side, but the right side from the center follows the outer periphery of the game area 1100. An arc-shaped area extending downward is provided, and when a game ball enters this area, the game ball is sent to the lower side of the center accessory 2300 without obtaining an opportunity to enter the gate portion 2350 or the warp inlet 2302. As a result, the chances are reduced and the movement of the game ball becomes less enjoyable. Accordingly, the player plays the game by appropriately adjusting the amount of rotation of the handle device 500 so that the game ball flows down from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the center accessory 2300 to the left side. It is possible to suppress the game operation that is strongly driven and to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by enjoying the game by the operation of the original handle device 500 of the pachinko machine 1.

  By the way, in this example, when the passing of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2352 while the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 while the normal symbol is fluctuating, the normal symbol that is fluctuating is stopped and the normal symbol generated and extracted first. Until the result of the random number is finalized, the random number for normal hit determination (including the normal symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2352 is temporarily stored and the display is suspended. The number of random numbers for determining normal hits (also referred to as the number of holds) is displayed on the normal symbol storage display 1188. This normal symbol memory display 1188 is composed of four LEDs, and suggests the number of memories by the number of each LED to be lit. In this example, up to four are stored and the number of pending is displayed. It is like that. In addition, when the number of holdings exceeds four, the random number for normal hit determination extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2352 is discarded.

  The game balls that have been driven into the game area 1100 and have flowed down the left side of the center prize 2300 are located below the center bonus 2300 by the shelves 2201, 2032, 2204 of the side prize opening member 2200 and on the center side of the game area 1100. It has come to be sent to. Then, when a game ball wins a general winning opening 2104, 2101 disposed below the center accessory 2300 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3020, the main control board 4100 performs payout control based on the detection signal. A predetermined payout command is transmitted to the board 4110, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 according to the payout command, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls The tray 301 is paid out.

  If a game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 does not win any of the general prize opening 2104, 2101, the first start opening 2101, the second start opening 2102, and the big prize opening 2103, the game area It is provided at the lower center in the left-right direction of 1100 and is discharged from the out port 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, regardless of whether the game ball wins any of the general winning ports 2104, 2101, the first starting port 2101, the second starting port 2102, and the big winning port 2103, the winning game balls are returned to the gaming area 1100. It is discharged to the lower rear side of the game board 4 without being discharged.

  On the other hand, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2300 enters the warp entrance 2302 that opens to the left side surface of the center accessory 2300, the game ball is supplied to the rear first stage of the stage 2310 of the center accessory 2300. It has become so. Then, the game ball supplied onto the first stage rolls left and right on the first stage, is released forward, and is supplied onto the second stage. Even in the second stage, the game ball rolls in the left-right direction and is released into the game area 1100 above the attacker unit 2100. When the game ball supplied to the stage 2310 enters the central chance entrance 2313 in the first stage, the game ball is released into the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2314 arranged immediately above the first start port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100. The game ball is received into the first start port 2101 with a high probability. When a game ball is received in the first start port 2101 and detected by the first start port sensor 3022, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls from the prize ball device 740 via the main control board 4100 or the like. Is dispensed to the upper plate 301.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the first starting port 2101, the second starting port 2102, and the big winning port 2103 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, so that the game balls released from the stage 2310 are The first starting port 2101 and the like are received with high probability, and when the second starting port 2102 and the big prize opening 2103 are acceptable, the game ball is received when it is released from the stage 2310 or the chance exit 2314. Since there is a high possibility, not only the first starting port 2101 but also the second starting port 2102 and the prize winning port 2103 can be expected to have a sense of expectation regarding the acceptance of game balls, and the interest can be enhanced. Yes.

  By the way, when the game ball enters the gate portion 2350 and is detected by the gate sensor 2352 and the “normal hit” is drawn as the normal lottery result, as described above, the pair of movable pieces that close the second starting port 2102 is closed. When the game ball is received by the second start port 2102 and detected by the second start port sensor 2109 when the 2106 spreads for a predetermined time and can be won, and the winning becomes possible, the main control board 4100 and the like are Accordingly, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball device 740 to the upper plate 301.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, when a game ball wins the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and is detected by the first start port sensor 3022 and the second start port sensor 2109, the first start port A predetermined first hit determination random number is extracted at the port 2101, and a predetermined second hit determination random number is extracted at the second start port 2102. Then, based on the extracted hit determination random number, after the special symbol variation display displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 1185 or second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 is started, The special symbol corresponding to the extracted winning determination random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second special symbol indicator 1186 in a manner suggesting “big hit”, the opening / closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened / closed in a predetermined pattern. A special advantageous gaming state (for example, a big hit game) occurs, and a game ball is awarded to the big prize opening 2103 during that time, so that more game balls can be obtained. When a single game ball wins the big prize opening 2103, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball device 740.

  Note that, in the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 as well, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display are displayed in the same manner as the normal symbol variation display by the entry of the game ball into the gate portion 2350. In 1186, when the special symbol is variably displayed, or when the special symbol such as the big hit game as the special advantageous gaming state cannot be variably displayed, the game ball is awarded to the starting ports 2101 and 2102 and the first starting port sensor 3022 is displayed. When detected by the second starting port sensor 2109, the first symbol extracted based on the detection signals from the first starting port sensor 3022 and the second starting port sensor 2109 until the special symbol variation display becomes possible. The random number for hit judgment and the random number for judgment of second hit are stored and the display is suspended, and the stored number of random numbers for hit judgment is stored in the first special symbol. So as to display in 憶 display 1184 and the second special symbol memory indicator 1187. The first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory indicator 1187 are each composed of two LEDs, so that the number of memories is suggested by the combination of the light emission state of each LED that is turned off / on / flashing. In this example, up to four each are stored and displayed. In addition, when the number of holdings exceeds four, the extracted random numbers for hit determination are discarded.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, the first hit determination random number extracted based on the detection of the first start port sensor 3022 and the second start port sensor 2109 or the second hit determination random number is determined in advance. By collating with predetermined predetermined hit determination tables 4501 and 4521 (also referred to as special symbol variation pattern tables), the hit determination random number is any one of “lost”, “small hit”, and “big hit”. In addition, it is also determined whether “big hit” is “2R big hit” or “15R big hit”. In addition, the hit determination tables 4501 and 4521 can also determine “short change-free hits”, “probable change hits”, “short-time hits”, “short wins during correct change”, and the like.

  Then, the first hit determination random number and the second hit determination random number extracted (lottery) triggered by the start winning of the game balls to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 (the special lottery result is), In the case of “small hit”, the main control board 4100 has an opening / closing pattern for closing the opening / closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 in an open state for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). It is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice).

  On the other hand, when the extracted first hit determination random number or second hit determination random number is “big hit”, the main control board 4100 opens the opening / closing member 2107 of the attacker unit 2100 and then opens a predetermined time (for example, , Approximately 30 seconds), or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls satisfy the winning prize opening 2103 and any of the winning conditions is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern that closes the opening / closing member 2107 (one opening / closing) The pattern is referred to as one round), and is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). When the “2R big hit” is repeated, two rounds are repeated. An advantageous advantageous gaming state is generated. For the “big hit” after the predetermined number of rounds, the hit determination table is changed to a high probability table according to the extracted hit determination random number. Further, the variable time setting tables 4503, 4504, 4523, and 4524 are appropriately changed in order to set the time-short state or cancel the time-short state according to the hit determination random number.

[4-2. Functional configuration for games on peripheral control board]
Next, a functional configuration relating to a game including a first decorative symbol, a second decorative symbol, and a common decorative symbol sequence on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration related to effects on the peripheral control board (mainly the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150).

  In the peripheral control board 4010 of this example, as shown in FIG. 139, when the control information command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is received by the command receiving means 4560, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled based on this command. Various functions are provided. That is, as a table for effects corresponding to the first big hit lottery, a first hit effect mode table 4561 and a first lose time effect mode table 4562 are stored in advance, and based on these tables 4561 and 4562, The production mode in the step production and the development production is determined.

  First, the production mode tables 4561 and 4562 will be described in detail. The first hit time effect mode table 4561 is used in the case of big hit (or small hit), and shows the relationship between the random number for determining the effect (described later) and the effect mode (in this case, the effect pattern in the step effect and the development effect). It is shown. In addition, the first losing effect mode table 4562 is a table used in the case of losing, and indicates the relationship between the effect determining random number and the effect pattern.

  This peripheral control board 4010 is provided with first effect random number extraction means 4563 for extracting effect determination random numbers from a random counter (not shown), and first effect mode determination means 4564 for determining effect patterns. . When receiving the control command via the command receiving means 4560, the first effect mode determining means 4564 extracts the effect random number by the first effect random number extracting means 4563 and the success / failure command included in the control command is a big hit (or In the case of indicating a small hit), an effect pattern is determined from the effect random number extracted by the first effect random number extraction means 4563 and the effect effect mode table 4561 at the time of first hit, while the success / failure command is determined. In the case of indicating a loss, the effect pattern is determined from the effect random number extracted by the first effect random number extraction means 4563 and the effect mode table 4562 at the time of the first loss.

  The effect pattern determined by the first effect mode determining means 4564 is extracted from the effect pattern storage means (not shown) and sent to the first effect display control means 4565. The first effect display control means 4565 reads out the images of those effects from the image storage means (character ROM 4150d) and derives them to the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  On the other hand, a first decorative symbol variation control means 4566 is provided as a functional configuration relating to the production of the first decorative symbol. Based on the control command received by the command receiving unit 4560, the first decorative symbol variation control unit 4566 reads and varies the stop symbol from the first decorative symbol storage unit (not shown), and includes variations included in the control command. The decorative design is stopped based on the time, the success / failure command, etc. (that is, the lottery result).

  In the above description, the effects related to the first big hit lottery have been described, but the peripheral control board 4010 is also provided with a functional configuration for performing effects related to the second big hit lottery. Specifically, a second winning effect mode table 4567 and a second lost effect mode table 4568 are stored in advance as the effect tables corresponding to the second big hit lottery. Based on this, the production mode in the step production and the development production is determined. Since the production mode tables 4567 and 4568 have the same configuration as the production mode tables 4561 and 4562 corresponding to the first big hit lottery, detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  In addition, on the peripheral control board 4010, corresponding to the second big hit lottery, the second effect random number extraction means 4569, the second effect mode determination means 4570, the second effect display control means 4571, and the second decorative symbol variation control. Although means 4572 is provided, these configurations also have the same function as the functional configuration corresponding to the first big hit lottery, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition, the peripheral control board 4010 is provided with decorative symbol sequence fluctuation display means 4573 and big hit display means 4574. The decorative symbol sequence fluctuation display means 4573 is based on the outputs of the first decorative symbol fluctuation control means 4566 and the second decorative symbol fluctuation control means 4572 or based on the control command received by the command receiving means 4560. While changing the symbol sequence, the common decorative symbol sequence is sequentially stopped based on the variation time and the success / failure command included in the control command (that is, the lottery result). In particular, a combination of decorative symbols (stopped symbols) that have already stopped on the active line at the stage before the last stopped symbol sequence that is stopped last among a plurality of common decorative symbol sequences is a specific decorative symbol When the above combination is satisfied, the reach state is established by using the already stopped decorative symbol as the reach formation symbol.

  The jackpot display means 4574 is related to the lottery when the lottery result of the first jackpot lottery or the second jackpot lottery is the first jackpot or the second jackpot, that is, when the “probable big hit” or “normal jackpot”. After stopping the variation of the common decorative design sequence, it is displayed that “big hit”. In addition, when the lottery result of the first big hit lottery or the second big hit lottery is the third big hit, the fourth big hit, or the fifth big hit, it is not displayed as “winning”, and the common decorative design column After the change is stopped, the effect related to the lottery is finished.

[4-2A. Game production using operation unit with peripheral control board]
Next, game effects using the operation unit 400 by the peripheral control board 4010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 to 157. FIG. 140 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the rotation detection piece of the driven gear and the two rotation detection sensors accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit in the rotation operation unit. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the rotation detection piece of the driven gear and the two rotation detection sensors accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation unit in the rotation operation unit. FIG. 142 (A) is a list showing ON / OFF of two rotation detection sensors accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit in the rotation operation unit, and FIG. 142 (B) is a counterclockwise direction of the dial operation unit. It is a table | surface figure which shows ON / OFF of two rotation detection sensors accompanying rotation of.

  FIGS. 143 (A) to 143 (F) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a display screen of the liquid crystal display device (production means, symbol display means) when the operation unit functions as the operation means. FIG. ) To (E) are explanatory views showing examples of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device when the operation unit functions as an operation means, and FIGS. 145 (A) to (F) show the selection operation by the dial operation unit. FIG. 146 is an explanatory diagram showing a display screen of the liquid crystal display device when determining whether to perform substitution, FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing a selection operation detection process by the effect control process, and FIG. 147 is a selection in the effect control process FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing a modification example 2 of the selection operation detection process in the effect control process, and FIGS. 149 (A) to (D) are flowcharts showing a modification example of the operation detection process. FIG. 150A and FIG. 150C illustrate an example of a display unit and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding to the operation unit. 151 (A) to 151 (C) are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of an operation unit and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding to the operation unit.

  Further, FIGS. 152A to 152D are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the operation unit and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device corresponding to the operation unit, and FIG. 153 shows the rotation advance notice control process in the effect control process. It is a flowchart. FIGS. 154 (A) to (D) are explanatory views showing examples of the operation unit and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device corresponding to the operation unit, and FIGS. 155 (A) to (D) show the operation unit, It is explanatory drawing which shows an example with the display screen of the liquid crystal display device corresponding to this. 156 (A) to 156 (C) are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of an operation unit that functions as an operation explanation unit and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding to the operation unit. FIGS. 157A to 157C are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of an operation unit that functions as an operation explanation unit and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding to the operation unit.

  First, detection of the rotation direction and rotation speed of the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 will be described. The rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the dial operation unit 401 by detecting the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates integrally with the dial operation unit 401. ing. In FIGS. 140 to 142, the rotation detection sensor 432a is described as “A” and the rotation detection sensor 432b is described as “B”. Steps 1 to 4 shown below are four types of rotation positions of the dial operation unit 401 with reference to the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, respectively. The rotational position sequentially shifts to step 2, step 3, and step 4, and after shifting to step 4, it returns to step 1 again.

  First, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates in the clockwise direction, as shown in FIG. 140, as shown in FIG. 140, both rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b detect the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410, and then the dial. The rotation detection sensor 432a detects the rotation detection piece 410c by the shift to step 2 accompanying the clockwise rotation of the operation unit 401, while the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection sensor 432b and moves to the rotation detection sensor. The process proceeds to a step in which 432b does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c. Thereafter, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and both the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b rotate. The process proceeds to a step where 410c is not detected. Then, due to the shift to step 4 accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection sensor 432a and the rotation detection sensor 432a does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c. The process proceeds to a step where the rotation detection sensor 432b detects the rotation detection piece 410c.

  On the other hand, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise, as shown in FIG. 141, as shown in FIG. 141, both the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b detect the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410, and then Due to the shift to step 2 accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection sensor 432a and the rotation detection sensor 432a does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c. The detection sensor 432b proceeds to a step of detecting the rotation detection piece 410c. Thereafter, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b and the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b both detect rotation. The process proceeds to a step where the piece 410c is not detected. Then, due to the shift to step 4 accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the rotation detection sensor 432a detects the rotation detection piece 410c, while the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection sensor 432b. Then, the process proceeds to a step where the rotation detection sensor 432b does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c.

  That is, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are turned on (with detection of the rotation detection piece 410c) / OFF (without detection of the rotation detection piece 410c). As shown in FIG. 4, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are both “ON” in Step 1, and the rotation detection sensor 432a continues to be “ON” in Step 2, while the rotation detection sensor 432b is “OFF”. Thereafter, after both the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are “OFF” in Step 3, the rotation detection sensor 432a continues to be “OFF” in Step 4, while the rotation detection sensor 432b is “ON”. Thereafter, the process returns to Step 1 again, and both the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are turned “ON”.

  On the other hand, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are turned on / off in step 1 as shown in FIG. 142 (B). In step 2, the rotation detection sensor 432b continues to be “ON”, while the rotation detection sensor 432a is “OFF”. Thereafter, after both the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are “OFF” in Step 3, the rotation detection sensor 432b continues to be “OFF” in Step 4, while the rotation detection sensor 432a is “ON”. Thereafter, the process returns to Step 1 again, and both the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are turned “ON”.

  As described above, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the dial operation unit 401 based on ON / OFF in each of the steps 1 to 4 described above. When the dial operation unit 401 constituting the unit 400 functions as an operation means, in other words, when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by a player's operation, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are turned on / off. It is detected that the dial operation unit 401 has been rotated. At this time, the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise from the ON / OFF state of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b before the rotation operation and the ON / OFF state of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b during the rotation operation. It is detected whether it has been rotated or operated counterclockwise. In this example, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the dial operation unit 401. However, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b count pulses or the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b. The rotational position of the dial operation unit 401 can also be detected by confirming the relationship between the pulse states.

  For example, if step 1, that is, the state where both the rotation detection sensors 432 a and 432 b are “ON” is the state before the rotation operation, the rotation detection sensor 432 a If it is “ON” while the rotation detection sensor 432b is “OFF”, it coincides with step 2 in the clockwise direction, so that the dial operation unit 401 is detected to be rotated in the clockwise direction. On the other hand, if the rotation detection sensor 432a is “OFF” while the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are in the ON / OFF state during the rotation operation, the rotation detection sensor 432b is “ON”, which is the same as Step 2 in the counterclockwise direction. Therefore, it is detected that the dial operation unit 401 is rotated counterclockwise. The clockwise or counterclockwise operation signal of the dial operation unit 401 detected by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b is output to the peripheral control unit 4140. Then, the peripheral control unit 4140 (effect control means, operation effect control means, selection effect control means, display control means) receives the player's operation intention based on the input operation signal, and this is received by the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. It is to be reflected in the production of.

  When the dial operation unit 401 rotates based on the driving of the dial driving motor 414, the driving of the dial driving motor 414 is transmitted as the rotating operation of the driven gear 410 via the driving gear 412. The dial operation unit 401 provided integrally by the operation rotates clockwise or counterclockwise. At this time, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the dial operation unit 401 based on whether or not the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 rotating together with the dial operation unit 401 is detected (ON / OFF). The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are output to the peripheral control unit 4140, and the peripheral control unit 4140 having received the detection signal detects the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the dial operation unit 401. Rotational motion is controlled.

  Next, an effect example using the operation means by the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 will be described. First, as an example, as shown in FIG. 143, the liquid crystal display device 1900 (production means, symbol display) is based on the jackpot determination associated with winning at the starting port (first starting port 2101, second starting port 2102). As shown in FIG. 143 (A), the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are aligned with the same symbol, and the reach form is displayed ( As shown in FIG. 143 (B), the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are displayed on the upper left and right upper sides of the display screen. Each of the images moves to a reduced scale and develops from normal reach fluctuation to super reach fluctuation.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 143 (C), as a variation of the super reach, a middle decorative pattern 4602a (in FIG. 143, “6”) is used to determine a loss with a different pattern from the left and right decorative patterns 4601 and 4603. The middle decorative symbol is illustrated side by side, and the middle decorative symbol 4602b (the middle decorative symbol “7” is illustrated in the same diagram) that determines the big hit with the same symbol as the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are displayed side by side. Below that, an image 4605 in which the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise and a character 4611 “turn the dial operation unit” are displayed, so that the operation unit 400 (dial operation unit 401). Is displayed to urge the player to perform a counterclockwise rotation operation, thereby giving the player an opportunity to operate the operation unit 400 (dial operation unit 401).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 143 (D), an effect display is performed in which the medium decorative symbol 4602a for determining the loss pushes the medium decorative symbol 4602b for determining the big hit. When the player rotates the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 in the counterclockwise direction, this is detected by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b of the operation unit 400 (the detection signal of the dial operation unit 401 in the counterclockwise direction). Is output to the peripheral control unit 4140), as shown in FIG. 143 (E), an effect display (operation effect) is performed in which the middle decorative symbol 4602b that determines the big hit pushes back the middle decorative symbol 4602a that determines the loss. Finally, as shown in FIG. 143 (F), among the medium decorative symbol 4602b for determining the big hit and the medium decorative symbol 4602a for determining the loss, the medium decorative symbol constituting the display result based on the big hit determination. Completely pushes out the other medium decorative design, and the display result of the decorative design is derived to the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  However, at this time, not only the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 but also the rotation speed thereof are detected by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b. That is, as the rotational speed of the dial operation unit 401 increases, the middle decorative symbol 4602b has a more actionable movement, and the middle decorative symbol constituting the display result based on the jackpot determination (in this case, the big hit symbol) ) Will push out the other medium decorative design completely at an earlier stage, which is advantageous for the player. Conversely, when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated, but its rotation speed is slower than a predetermined value, it has only a low-action movement with respect to the medium decorative design 4602b. An effect that is disadvantageous to the player such that the medium decoration symbol (in this case, the jackpot symbol) constituting the display result is pushed out to the other medium decoration symbol first appears. However, also in this case, finally, the medium decorative design constituting the display result based on the jackpot determination completely pushes out the other medium decorative design, and the display result of the decorative design is derived to the liquid crystal display device 1900. It becomes.

  In FIG. 143 (F), based on the determination result of the big hit, the middle decoration symbol 4602b of “7” completely extrudes the middle decoration symbol 4602a of “6”, and the big hit of “7/7/7” The case where the design (specific display result) is derived is illustrated.

  As a second example, FIG. 144 (A) shows a decorative pattern variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the basis of the jackpot determination associated with winning a prize at the start opening (first start opening 2101, second start opening 2102). As shown in FIG. 144, the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are aligned with the same symbol and a reach mode is displayed. Then, as the middle decorative symbol 4602 continues to change, the left and right decorative symbols 4601 are displayed as shown in FIG. , 4603 move to the upper left and right sides of the display screen and are reduced and displayed to develop from the normal reach variation to the super reach variation, an image for selecting the super reach variation mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. As shown in FIG. 144 (C), the selection image of the variation mode includes an option image 4621 of the variation mode A (in the figure, the letter “A” is illustrated) and an option image 4622 of the variation mode B (FIG. 144C). In the lower part, the dial operation unit 401 rotates alternately in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction, and the selection determining operation unit 400 is displayed below. By displaying the image 4606 in which the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed and the characters 4612 “Please select with the dial operation unit”, the change mode can be selected by the rotation operation of the operation unit 400 (dial operation unit 401). A display prompting the player is performed.

  Then, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401 clockwise to select the variation mode A (at this time, the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is pressed by the player for selection determination). As this is detected by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b of the operation unit 400 (the detection signal in the clockwise direction of the dial operation unit 401 is output to the peripheral control unit 4140), as shown in FIG. While the option image 4621 of the variation mode A is displayed in a blinking manner, the option image 4622 of the variation mode B is displayed in the off state, and below that, an image 4605 in which the dial operation unit 401 rotates in the clockwise direction and “Decide !!” When the character 4613 is displayed, a display informing the player that the variation mode A has been selected by the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is displayed. Divide. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144 (E), the effect image 4625 of the super reach variation is displayed in the variation mode A selected by the player (denoted as “A” for convenience in FIG. 144). (Operation production).

  That is, the function of the operation unit 400 as the operation means by the operation unit 400 is that the player rotates the dial operation unit 401 in accordance with the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the rotation operation is reflected in the effect contents. It is intended to suppress the decline of interest.

  By the way, when the operation unit 400 functions as a selection operation means that can be selected from the alternative as in the second example described above, the player performs the selection operation by the operation unit 400 on the pachinko machine 1 side (specifically, The control of the peripheral control unit 4140) can determine in advance whether or not to substitute automatically. The determination as to whether or not to perform the selection operation is performed on the display image for determining the operation substitution of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as shown in FIG. It should be noted that the display image for determining the operation substitution is the operation unit 400 in a state where the winning detection at the start port (the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102) has not been detected for a predetermined time or more, such as during the demonstration display of the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, it is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The display image for operation substitution determination shown in FIG. 145 (A) includes an option image 4623 in which the characters “do not perform selection operation” and an option image 4624 in which the characters “perform selection operation” are written. Displayed side by side, below that, the dial operation unit 401 alternately rotates clockwise and counterclockwise, and the selection operation pressing operation unit 405 is pressed. "Please do" is displayed so that the player is prompted to decide whether or not to perform the selection operation by rotating the dial operation unit 401.

  Then, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 in the counterclockwise direction in order to perform the selection operation (in this case, the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is pressed by the player for selection determination). 145a, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b of the operation unit 400 detect this (output a detection signal in the counterclockwise direction of the dial operation unit 401 to the peripheral control unit 4140). As shown in FIG. 5, the option image 4624 of “substituting the selection operation” is displayed blinking, while the option image 4623 of “do not perform the selection operation” is turned off, and the dial operation unit 401 is shown below. By displaying an image 4607 rotating in the clockwise direction and a character 4613 of “OK!”, The dial operation unit 401 can be rotated. Display for notifying the player is made to the effect that decision to delegate the selection operation I have been made.

  Thereafter, it is determined that the selection operation is performed on the display image for determining the operation substitution, and when the selection effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as shown in FIG. Selection is automatically delegated based on the control. Specifically, in the selection effect image shown in FIG. 145 (C), the option image 4625 of character A and the option image 4626 of character B are displayed side by side, below which the dial operation unit 401 is clockwise. The dial operation unit 401 is displayed by displaying an image 4606 in which the selection determination pressing operation unit 405 is pressed alternately and counterclockwise and an image 4606 of “Please select with the dial operation unit” is displayed. A display prompting the player to select a character is performed by the rotation operation. At this time, the character B, which is the option image 4626, is displayed as a stronger character than the character A, which is the option image 4625, and game content that is more advantageous to the player if the character B (option image 4626) is selected. (For example, it is easy to win big hits, etc.).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 145 (D), when the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 is rotated in the default direction by the control of the peripheral control unit 4140 (in the same figure, the counterclockwise direction is the default). The dial operation unit 401 is rotated counterclockwise), the character B option image 4626 is flashed and the character A option image 4625 is turned off, and below that By displaying the image 4607 in which the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise and the character 4613 of “OK!”, The player is notified that the character B has been selected by the rotation of the dial operation unit 401. Is displayed.

  In the configuration shown in FIG. 145 (D), the default direction is set to the counterclockwise direction, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the default direction may be set to the clockwise direction. In this case, when the operation unit 400 (dial operation unit 401) is rotated clockwise by the control of the peripheral control unit 4140, the option image 4625 of the character A blinks as shown in FIG. 145 (E). On the other hand, the option image 4626 of the character B is turned off, and an image 4605 in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotated clockwise and a character 4613 of “OK!” Are displayed below the dial B. A display for notifying the player that the character A has been selected by the rotation of the operation unit 401 is performed.

  Further, the default direction is not limited to either the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction, and a direction corresponding to the type of option displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 may be set as the default direction. Specifically, a direction that can provide a game content advantageous to the player may be set as the default direction. For example, when the selection image 4625 of the character A is displayed on the left side and the selection image 4626 of the character B is displayed on the right side as in FIG. 145C, the selection effect image is the same as in FIG. 145D. In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated counterclockwise to select the option image 4626. On the other hand, when the option image 4626 of the character B is displayed on the left side and the option image 4625 of the character A is displayed on the right side as the selection effect image, the option image 4626 is selected as shown in FIG. Accordingly, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated clockwise. On the other hand, a direction that may result in a game content that is disadvantageous to the player may be set as the default direction.

  Here, the selection operation detection processing of the operation unit 400 by the peripheral control unit 4140 will be described with reference to FIG. This selection operation detection process is control performed at the time of selection effect of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as shown in FIG. In FIG. 146, first, it is determined whether or not an operation proxy flag is set (step S2001). The operation proxy flag is a flag that is set when the option image 4624 “substitute selection operation” is selected and determined in the display image for operation proxy determination in FIG. 145A. If the operation substitution flag is not set in step S2001, next, whether or not the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 has been rotated, in other words, whether the operation detection signal by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b has changed. It is determined whether or not (step S2002). When there is a change in the operation detection signal, a selection flag for the rotation direction based on the operation detection signal is set (step S2003), and the selection operation detection process is ended.

  That is, when the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 is rotated and the operation detection signal is changed, the selection flag in the direction (clockwise or counterclockwise) in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotated is set. The selection flag is a display indicating that the player has selected and decided one of the alternative choices in the selection effect of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (for example, the display shown in FIG. 144D) or the choice selected and decided. This is a flag for display control of the effect display based on the display (for example, the effect display in FIG. 144E).

  On the other hand, when there is no rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 and there is no change in the operation detection signal in step S2002, it is determined whether or not a predetermined detection effective time of the dial operation unit 401 has elapsed (step S200 S2004). If the operation detection signal is not ON even though the detection valid time has elapsed, a default rotation direction selection flag that is a predetermined selection method is set (step S2005), and dialing is performed in the default direction. The operation unit 401 is rotated (step S2006: selection proxy operation control means), and the selection operation detection process is terminated. Here, the default rotation direction (default direction) is a rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 set in advance by the peripheral control unit 4140 described above, which is advantageous to the clockwise direction, the counterclockwise direction, and the player. It is a direction that can be a game content, or a direction that can be a game content that is disadvantageous to the player.

  When the operation proxy flag is set in step S2001, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the default direction (step S2007: selection proxy operation control means). Thereafter, a change in the operation detection signal is detected by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, a selection flag for the rotation direction based on the operation detection signal is set (step S2008), and the selection operation detection process ends. At this time, as a process in step S2008, the player does not rotate the default direction selection flag rotated in step S2007 as it is, but immediately rotates the dial operation unit 401 in the anti-default direction immediately after the rotation in the default direction. Then, the selection flag in the anti-default direction is set. That is, when the proxy operation for the selection effect is determined, and when the dial operation unit 401 is not operated in spite of the fact that the proxy operation for the selection effect is not determined, Then, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the default direction. When the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the default direction, if there is no player operation, the default direction selection flag is set as it is. On the other hand, when the player operates the anti-default direction when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the default direction, the driving of the dial drive motor 414 that rotates the dial operation unit 401 is stopped and the player The rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is prioritized and the selection flag for the anti-default direction is set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the player leaves room for rotating the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 in the anti-default direction. Specifically, the player operates the dial operation unit 401 in the operation direction (default If the player does not like the rotation direction), the player can intervene and correct it during the rotation, or stop the rotation when the dial operation unit 401 moves unexpectedly (unexpectedly for the player). The dial operation unit 401 can be rotated while leaving such a room. In other words, the processing when the process proceeds from step S2007 to step S2008 described above is performed when the operation detecting means detects a finger touch operation (manual operation) of the dial operation unit 401 by the player during the operation of the dial operation unit 401. In order to give priority to the player's finger touch operation on the dial operation unit 401, operation priority control means for stopping the driving of the electric drive source is configured.

  By the way, the selection operation detection process of the operation unit 400 is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 146, and may be the configurations of Modifications 1 and 2 shown below. As shown in FIG. 147, the selection operation detection process of the first modification first determines whether or not the operation proxy flag is set (step S2011). When the operation proxy flag is not set in step S2011, whether or not the operation detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are changed due to the rotation of the dial operation unit 401, as in the selection operation detection process of FIG. Is determined (step S2012). When there is a change in the operation detection signal, a rotation direction selection flag is set based on the operation detection signal (step S2013), and "1" is added to the operation detection counter that counts that the operation detection signal has changed. In step S2014, the selection operation detection process is terminated. That is, when the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 is rotated and the operation detection signal is changed, the selection flag in the direction (clockwise or counterclockwise) in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotated is set. Furthermore, it is stored that the dial operation unit 401 has been rotated.

  On the other hand, when there is no rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and there is no change in the operation detection signal in step S2012, it is determined whether or not a predetermined detection effective time of the dial operation unit 401 has passed (step S2015). If the operation detection signal does not change even though the detection effective time has elapsed, the value of the operation detection counter counted in step S2014 in the past 10 selection effects is “5” or more. Whether or not (step S2016: motion ratio determination means). When the value of the operation detection counter is “5” or more in step S2016, in other words, when the player has operated the dial operation unit 401 five times or more in the past ten selection effects, the dial operation unit is relatively frequently used. It is determined that the player is a player who rotates 401, and the process proceeds to step S2017 to extend the effective detection time of the dial operation unit 401.

  Note that the processing in step S2016 is performed based on the storage in the operation storage area provided in the peripheral control RAM 4140e of the peripheral control unit 4140, and the operation unit 400 in the last 10 selection effects in the operation storage area. The determination processing is performed by storing the presence / absence of the operation of the dial operation unit 401 in FIG. That is, every time a selection effect is performed, the oldest data among the past 10 stored data is erased, and the presence or absence of operation of the dial operation unit 401 by the player in the selection effect is stored as the newest data. It has become. For this reason, even when a player who plays a game on the pachinko machine 1 is switched, the player gradually adjusts to the player every time the selection effect is executed (whether the player frequently rotates the dial operation unit 401). The processing in step S2016 can be performed based on a judgment criterion (according to whether or not).

  In step S2017, it is determined again whether or not the dial operation unit 401 is rotated and the operation detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are changed. When there is a change in the operation detection signal in step S2017, a rotation direction selection flag based on the operation detection signal is set (step S2013), as in the transition from step S2012, and the operation detection signal is changed. “1” is added to the operation detection counter to be counted (step S2014), and the selection operation detection process ends. On the other hand, if there is no rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation detection signal does not change in step S2017, it is determined whether or not the detection valid time (extended effective time) of the extended dial operation unit 401 has elapsed (step S2017). Step S2018: Validity period extension means). When the operation detection signal does not change even though the extended effective time has elapsed, a default rotation direction selection flag that is a predetermined selection method is set (step S2019), and the dial operation is performed in the default direction. The unit 401 is rotated (step S2020: selection proxy operation control means), and the selection operation detection process is terminated.

  Also, when the operation proxy flag is set in step S2011 and when the value of the operation detection counter is less than “5” in step S2016, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the default direction (step S2021: selection proxy) Operation control means). Thereafter, a change in the operation detection signal is detected by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, a selection flag for the rotation direction based on the operation detection signal is set (step S2022), and the selection operation detection process ends. At this time, as a process in step S2022, the selection flag for the default direction rotated in step S2021 is not set as it is, but the player rotates the dial operation unit 401 in the anti-default direction immediately after the rotation in the default direction. Then, the selection flag in the anti-default direction is set.

  That is, the dial operation unit 401 is not rotated in the past 10 times when the selection operation proxy at the time of the selection effect has been determined, and the selection operation proxy at the time of the selection effect has not been determined. When the number of times that the player has rotated the dial operation unit 401 in the selection effect is less than 5, the dial operation unit 401 is temporarily rotated in the default direction. When the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the default direction, if there is no player operation, the default direction selection flag is set as it is. On the other hand, when the player operates the anti-default direction when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the default direction, the driving of the dial drive motor 414 that rotates the dial operation unit 401 is stopped and the player The rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is prioritized and the selection flag for the anti-default direction is set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the player leaves room for rotating the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 in the anti-default direction. Specifically, the player operates the dial operation unit 401 in the operation direction (default If the player does not like the rotation direction), the player can intervene and correct it during the rotation, or stop the rotation when the dial operation unit 401 moves unexpectedly (unexpectedly for the player). The dial operation unit 401 can be rotated while leaving such a room. In other words, the processing at the time of shifting from step S2021 to step S2022 described above is performed when the player's finger touch operation on the dial operation unit 401 is detected by the operation detecting means during the operation of the operation unit. In order to give priority to the finger touch operation 401, an operation priority control means for stopping the driving of the electric drive source is configured.

  As shown in FIG. 148, the selection operation detection process of the modification 2 first determines whether or not an operation proxy flag is set (step S2031). When the operation surrogate flag is not set in step S2031, the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is rotated and changed to operation detection signals by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, as in the selection operation detection process of FIG. It is determined whether or not there is (step S2032). When there is a change in the operation detection signal, a rotation direction selection flag based on the operation detection signal is set (step S2033), and “1” is added to the rotation direction counter based on the operation detection signal ( Step S2034), the selection operation detection process is terminated.

  That is, when the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 is rotated and the operation detection signal is changed, the selection flag in the direction (clockwise or counterclockwise) in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotated is set. Further, the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 that has been rotated is stored. There are two types of counters for counting the rotation direction, clockwise and counterclockwise. By differentiating the counter type for each rotation direction based on the operation detection signal, the counter counterclockwise and counterclockwise. The number of rotations in the clockwise direction is individually stored.

  On the other hand, when there is no rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and there is no change in the operation detection signal in step S2032, it is determined whether or not a predetermined detection valid time of the dial operation unit 401 has passed (step S2035). When the operation detection signal does not change even though the detection effective time has passed, the rotation direction selection flag having a large count value is set in the past 10 selection operations, which is a predetermined selection method ( In step S2036), the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the direction in which the count value is large (step S2037: selection proxy operation control means), and the selection operation detection process is terminated.

  Here, the rotation direction having a large count value in the past ten selection operations is counted in the previous ten selection operations from the present time in each of the clockwise and counterclockwise counters counted in step S2034. It is the direction of rotation of the counter that takes a large value after comparing each count value. Then, by making such a comparison, it is determined in which direction the player is more likely to rotate the dial operation unit 401, and the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in that direction. That is, every time a selection effect is performed, the oldest data of the past 10 count data is deleted, and the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 by the player in the selection effect is stored as the newest count data. It has become. For this reason, even when the player who plays a game with the pachinko machine 1 is changed, the player gradually adjusts to the player every time the selection effect is executed (the player rotates the dial operation unit 401 in any direction). The process of step S2036 can be performed based on a judgment criterion (according to whether the tendency is high).

  When the operation proxy flag is set in step S2031, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the direction in which the count value is large as in step S2037 (step S2038: selection proxy operation control means). Thereafter, a change in the operation detection signal is detected by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, thereby setting a rotation direction selection flag based on the operation detection signal (step S2039), and then rotation based on the operation detection signal. “1” is added to the direction counter (step S2040), and the selection operation detection process is terminated. At this time, the processing of step S2039 does not set the selection flag in the direction of large count value rotated in step S2038 as it is, but the player dials in the opposite direction immediately after the rotation in the direction of large count value. When the unit 401 is rotated, a selection flag in the opposite direction is set.

  In other words, according to the configuration of the modification example 2, the dial operation unit 401 is used when the selection operation proxy at the time of the selection effect is determined and when the selection operation proxy at the selection effect is not determined. If no rotation operation has been performed, the dial operation unit 401 is compared and determined in which direction in the previous ten selection operations from the current time, and the dial is dialed in the rotation direction (default direction) with a large number of rotation operations. The operation unit 401 is rotated. When the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the default direction, if there is no player operation, the default direction selection flag is set as it is. On the other hand, when the player operates the anti-default direction when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the default direction, the driving of the dial drive motor 414 that rotates the dial operation unit 401 is stopped and the player The rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is prioritized and the selection flag for the anti-default direction is set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the player leaves room for rotating the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 in the anti-default direction. Specifically, the player operates the dial operation unit 401 in the operation direction (default If the player does not like the rotation direction), the player can intervene and correct it during the rotation, or stop the rotation when the dial operation unit 401 moves unexpectedly (unexpectedly for the player). The dial operation unit 401 can be rotated while leaving such a room. In other words, the processing at the time of shifting from step S2038 to step S2039 described above is performed when the player's finger touch operation on the dial operation unit 401 is detected by the operation detecting means during operation of the operation unit. In order to give priority to the finger touch operation 401, an operation priority control means for stopping the driving of the electric drive source is configured.

  Next, a special effect example (operation system effect at the time of non-operation) in which the operation receiving part of the operation unit 400 to be operated by the player operates as if it is operated without permission by the player. explain.

Here, in explaining the special effect example according to the present invention, the operation unit 400 mounted in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment and the player's operation on the operation unit 400 are performed. An effect (operation system effect at the time of operation) that is performed in response to the operation when it occurs will be described again.
That is, as described above, the operation means according to this embodiment (the operation unit 400 to be operated by the player) has two operation receivers formed so as to have different operation modes (rotation operation, pressing operation). (A dial operation unit 401, a pressing operation unit 405), and one of the operation receiving units is provided by being unitized by being positioned around the other side.

  Also, as described above, in the peripheral control unit 4140 according to this embodiment, a display image that prompts the player to perform an operation on a specific operation receiving unit (the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405) is in the middle of the production. A specific display effect pattern (specific variation pattern) that appears at is prepared, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 executes the display effect in a form in which the specific display effect pattern appears. The player is given an opportunity to operate the operation receiving unit such as the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405. Then, when an operation by the player is performed using this operation opportunity, a movement (rotation operation or pressing operation) corresponding to the operation is performed in a specific operation receiving unit (dial operation unit 401 or pressing operation unit 405). Is displayed, for example, information on reliability (expected degree of jackpot) as a display effect performed in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed so as to match the timing at which the movement appears in the operation receiving unit. An operation system effect at the time of an operation that can cause a change in a predetermined effect such as a new appearance of a display image (such as a character image with a tag written as “30% reliability”) is executed. .

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control unit 4140 according to this embodiment, an effective period for receiving an operation on the operation receiving unit is set to a predetermined time at a timing when a display image that prompts the player to perform an operation on the specific operation receiving unit appears. To set over. Therefore, even when the movement corresponding to these operations appears in a specific operation receiving portion by a rotation operation on the dial operation unit 401 or a pressing operation on the pressing operation unit 405 when the effective period is not present, In reality, no change appears in any production (the operation system production at the time of operation is not executed). In addition, when there is an operation on the operation receiving unit on the side different from the specific operation receiving unit that is prompted to be operated by the player, a movement corresponding to this operation appears in the operation receiving unit on the different side. In reality, no change appears in any production (the operation system production at the time of operation is not executed).

  As described above, in the operation system effect described above, basically, first, a display effect is executed in a form in which a specific display effect pattern (display image that prompts the player to perform an operation on a specific operation receiving unit) appears. Thus, an operation opportunity for a specific operation receiving unit is given to the player. Then, after the operation opportunity is given, the player performs an operation on the specific operation receiving unit within the effective period, and a motion corresponding to the operation appears in the specific operation receiving unit. Then, an operation system effect (operation system effect at the time of operation) that causes a change in the effect or the like of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can appear.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control unit 4140 according to this embodiment, for example, when a display effect having a specific display effect pattern is being executed, or in a predetermined effect lottery based on the result of the jackpot determination, When a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when the reliability of the performance is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, the player has an opportunity to operate a specific operation receiving unit (the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405). A game for a specific operation receiving portion even though no operation (rotation operation or pressing operation) is performed on the specific operation receiving portion. Control for driving the operation receiving portion is performed so that a physical change (rotation operation or pressing operation) that appears when an operation is performed by a user is generated over a predetermined time. As a result, when a physical change (rotation operation or pressing operation) that appears when an operation is performed by the player appears in a specific operation receiving portion, the movement in the operation receiving portion is matched. An operation system effect (operation system effect during non-operation) that causes a change in a predetermined effect (the effect of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect of sound, the effect of a frame lamp, etc.) can appear (special effect). ).

  However, as described above, the operation unit 400 according to this embodiment has a structure that can apply a driving force only to the dial operation unit 401 among the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 as the operation receiving unit. Is formed. Therefore, in the special effect according to this embodiment, the operation receiving unit is controlled so that the operation (rotation operation) at the time of operation appears in the dial operation unit 401 that is not operated by the player. . As a result, when a rotation operation appears in the dial operation unit 401, an operation system effect (operation system effect at the time of non-operation) that causes a change in a predetermined effect to match the rotation operation can appear ( Special production).

  According to such special effects, even if there is no operation (rotation operation) by the player on the dial operation unit 401, the physical change (rotation operation) when the operation is performed is dialed. In addition to appearing on the operation unit 401, a predetermined effect is changed so as to match this physical change (rotation operation).

  In other words, in this case, for example, there is no relation to the operation intention by the player, and the dial operation unit 401 to be operated is operated by who (who cannot be seen), and the content of the production has changed accordingly. Such a ghost effect can be realized, and this makes it possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest. It is to be noted that an important point in realizing such a ghost effect is that the movement (rotation operation) that appears in the dial operation unit 401 when the operation is performed by the player in the operation system effect at the time of operation is determined by a predetermined driving force. It is to express large (for example, using the maximum movable region (one rotation or more when rotating)). As a result, a player who sees the movement as if the dial operation unit 401, which is the operation target in the operation system production at the time of operation, is operated arbitrarily, has some change in the production due to the movement at the time of the operation. It is possible to enjoy this by intuitively conscious of the occurrence and the possibility that information advantageous to the player is shown (the effect that appears in the operation system effect at the time of operation). As for the expectation of the production (the probability of winning the jackpot when the production appears), it is better to keep the production system production at the time of non-operation than the operation system production at the time of operation. desirable.

  Incidentally, in the non-operating operation system effect according to this embodiment, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by a predetermined driving force in accordance with the timing at which the dial operation unit 401 rotates without setting an effective period for accepting an operation on the dial operation unit 401. The predetermined production is changed. However, in order to realize such an operation system effect at the time of non-operation more realistically, the dial operation unit 401 is synchronized with the timing when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by a predetermined driving force (or prior to this rotation operation). An effective period for accepting operations on the operation unit 401 is secretly set without any suggestion to the player, and the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by a predetermined driving force within the effective period. It is more desirable to cause a change in a predetermined effect based on the detected motion mode based on the detected motion.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the operation system effect at the time of operation, a notice is given to the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when a rotation operation appears in the dial operation unit 401 by an operation by the player. Whereas a new character image such as an image appears, in the operation system effect during non-operation, a new character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when a rotation operation appears on the dial operation unit 401 with a predetermined driving force. An image is not caused to appear, and a change is caused in the sound effect, the frame lamp effect, and the like.

  Here, as an effect change by sound, for example, in the effect state in which sound is output so as to be linked with the display effect performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, any operation is performed. If a rotation operation appears in the dial operation unit 401 even though the dial operation unit 401 is not rotating, a production effect sound (for example, a dedicated production sound) indicating that the dial operation unit 401 is performing the rotation operation overlaps the above-described sound output. This can be realized by outputting as follows.

  In addition, as the change in effect of the frame lamp, for example, in the effect state where the light emission effect by the frame lamp is performed so as to be linked with the display effect performed in the liquid crystal display device 1900, there is no change. If a rotation operation appears in the dial operation unit 401 even though the operation is not performed, the above-mentioned light emission effect as linked is stopped to indicate that the dial operation unit 401 is in the rotation operation. This can be realized by performing a light emission effect by the frame lamp (for example, a dedicated light emission effect). More specifically, for example, the lamp driving substrate 4160 is repeated such that a plurality of LEDs (lens portions) arranged in the door frame 5 emit light in order from the upper side toward the lower side. However, based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command, a lighting signal or a flashing signal is sent to each of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 320, 322 provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882. It can implement | achieve by outputting sequentially to LED, such as.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the change mode of the effect produced between the operation system effect at the time of operation and the operation system effect at the time of non-operation is made different. That is, during the fluctuation time when the special symbol is fluctuating, an expected effect (for example, a display effect by a decorative symbol or a notice effect) is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Basically, only the expected effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is watched.

  In this regard, in the operation system effect at the time of operation, a display image that prompts the player to perform an operation on the dial operation unit 401 (or the pressing operation unit 405) in the liquid crystal display device 1900 to be watched by the player at the time of the effect. By making it appear, the gaze point by the player is temporarily shifted from the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the dial operation unit 401. Therefore, even if a new character image appears in response to the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the character image is a dial operation unit that is originally located at a position (door frame 5) that is out of the gaze target by the player. The player can recognize that it is an operation system effect triggered by an operation on 401, and thereafter, the user can return to the liquid crystal display device 1900 and enjoy it. It has become.

  However, in the non-operating operation system effect, the operation of the dial operation unit 401 that is the operation target is unrelated to the player's operation intention. Due to the nature of the effect, the liquid crystal display device It can be said that it is not desirable to actively shift the gaze point by the player from 1900 to the dial operation unit 401. Therefore, in the operation system effect at the time of non-operation, it seems that it is often performed while the point of gazing by the player is maintained on the liquid crystal display device 1900, but in such a situation, from the gazing target by the player Even if a new character image appears in response to the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in accordance with the operation of the dial operation unit 401 located at the disengagement position (door frame 5), for example, the dial on the door frame 5 is displayed. This character image may have appeared as an effect completely unrelated to the operation of the operation unit 401, or the dial operation unit 401 in the door frame 5 may have been driven in accordance with the appearance of such a character image. There is a concern that the player cannot recognize the meaning of the display effect.

  In this regard, in the non-operating operation system effect according to this embodiment, a new character image is displayed with respect to the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when a rotating operation appears in the dial operation unit 401 with a predetermined driving force. As described above, it is not caused to appear, and the change as described above is caused in the sound effect, the frame lamp effect, and the like. As a result, when an operation system effect at the time of non-operation is performed, it is possible to prompt the player to shift the gaze destination from the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the dial operation unit 401, and in accordance with the operation of the dial operation unit 401. Thus, the player can recognize that the predetermined effect has changed and enjoy it. Therefore, according to the non-operating operation system effect, no matter what display effect is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the sound effect or the frame lamp is adjusted in accordance with the operation of the dial operation unit 401. This is realized as an effect that can be recognized by the player as an effect that causes a change in a predetermined effect such as the above effect.

  However, in order to suitably realize the operation system effect at the time of non-operation in this way, the player can recognize that the predetermined effect has changed in accordance with the operation of the dial operation unit 401. What is necessary is not necessarily to cause any change in the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  For example, of the character image appearing as a display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the background image used as the background thereof, only the background image is used for the operation of the dial operation unit 401 without causing a change in the effect related to the character image. Even if it is made to change together, the operation system effect at the time of non-operation can be suitably realized as an effect centering on the operation of the dial operation unit 401.

  As another example, in a display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900, when a transition to a specific super reach effect (story-based effect) is made, a stunning “between” (static) A period of time in which a specific display effect appears), and the end of the effect “between” in accordance with the operation of the dial operation unit 401 to a specific super reach effect (time in which a dynamic display effect appears). The operation system effect at the time of non-operation can be suitably realized as an effect centered on the operation of the dial operation unit 401.

  Furthermore, as another example, even when the operation of the dial operation unit 401 is performed, a change in the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is delayed by a predetermined time, and the operation system at the time of non-operation is performed. The effect can be suitably realized as an effect centered on the operation of the dial operation unit 401.

Hereinafter, a specific example of such an operation system effect during non-operation will be described.
First, as a first example, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, as shown in FIG. The left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are aligned with the same symbol, and the reach is displayed (in the figure, the case where the left and right decorative symbols are aligned with “7” is illustrated), and the middle decorative symbol 4602 is normal reach. Displayed in a variable manner. At this time, each operation unit 400 is in a stopped state. That is, the full-color LED 432d for decorating the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 and the full-color LED 430b for decorating the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 are respectively in the off state, and the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 is turned off. The dial drive motor 414 that rotates is in a drive stopped state.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149 (B), the middle decorative symbol 4602 for determining the loss (in the figure, the case where the middle decorative symbol 4602 “6” is temporarily stopped and displayed) is temporarily displayed for a predetermined time. Stopped display. Even at this time, the special symbol is changing, and the operation units 400 are in a stopped state.

  In other words, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 149 (B), a decorative “interval” (static Time for a typical display effect to appear). Therefore, when there is no transition to the super reach effect, the effect ends with the display mode shown in FIG.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149 (C), the operation unit 400 is driven in such an effect situation where the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900 may end. Specifically, the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 rotates by the rotational drive of the dial drive motor 414. Then, in accordance with this rotation operation, the above-described changes are caused in the sound effect, the frame lamp effect, and the like. At the same time, the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 and the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 may emit light by driving the full-color LEDs 432d and 430b to be turned on and blinking.

  Thereafter, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is continued, and the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed in a state in which the change as described above in the sound / frame lamp effect is maintained. As shown in FIG. 149 (D), the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 move to the left and right upper ends of the display screen, respectively, are reduced and displayed, and the variation of the middle decorative symbol 4602 is resumed to develop super reach variation. Do (shift to super reach production). Thereby, the operation system effect at the time of non-operation as if the decoration pattern on the liquid crystal display device 1900 has been developed to the super reach variation by the effect drive of the operation unit 400 is suitably used. It will be realized.

  In this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 149 (C), the stop display (the time during which the static display effect appears) of the decorative symbols over a predetermined time is ended in accordance with the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401. Even if it develops in the super reach variation (the time when the dynamic display effect appears), whether or not the decoration unit normal reach variation in the liquid crystal display device 1900 has evolved into the super reach variation by the effect driving of the operation unit 400. Such an operation effect during non-operation is preferably realized.

  Next, as a second example, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, as shown in FIG. 150 (A), based on the jackpot determination associated with winning at the starting port (first starting port 2101, second starting port 2102). In addition, after the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are aligned with the same symbol and the reach mode is displayed, the normal reach variation has changed to the super reach variation. In this super reach variation, the middle decorative symbol 4602 performs the reach variation in a state where the decorative symbols 4601 to 4603 are collectively reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the display region, and the character of the character in the center of the display region is changed. The expectation level of the jackpot is suggested by the directing action. In the example of FIG. 150A, a state in which the character A and the character B are fighting is shown, and at this point, the operation units 400 are in a stopped state.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 (B), the character at the center of the display area is displayed in a stopped manner for a predetermined time. That is, in this production example, a stunning “between” (a time during which a static display production appears) whether or not the production by the decoration pattern is further continued by displaying the character in a stopped state for a predetermined time. It is trying to have. Therefore, when the effect by the decorative design ends at this point, the decorative design stops with the display mode of losing with the effect image appearing in FIG. 150B, and the effect ends. In the example of FIG. 150 (B), it is shown that the character A is defeated in the battle with the character B, and even at this time, the special symbol is changing and the operation unit 400 is stopped. Is in a state. In addition, as long as the character is displayed with a stop mode, it is possible to have a stunning “between”, so even at this point, the background image and the decorative design displayed in the upper right part will vary. There is no problem even if it is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 150C, the operation unit 400 is driven by the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 under such an effect that the display effect by the character in the liquid crystal display device 1900 may end as it is. The dial operation unit 401 is rotated, and the display with the stop mode of the character over a predetermined period of time (the time when the static display effect appears) is terminated so as to match the rotation operation, and the character is operated again. (The time when the dynamic display effect appears) is made to confirm further continuation of the effect by the decorative design. As a result, it is possible to suitably realize the non-operating operation system effect as if the character that had been displayed with the stop mode is again effected by the effect drive of the operation unit 400. Become. In the example of FIG. 150 (C), a state in which the character A stands up and tries to fight again is shown, and thereafter, a state in which the character A and the character B fight again is shown. When the rematch is finalized, the decorative symbols 4601 to 4603 are displayed in a stopped manner in such a manner that the result of winning the jackpot is shown.

  Even in this production example, when the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 is rotated by the rotational drive of the dial drive motor 414, the above-described changes are caused in the production of sound and the production of the frame lamp. It may be. At the same time, the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 or the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 may be caused to emit light by driving the full-color LEDs 432d and 430b to be turned on and blinking.

  Next, as a third example, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, as shown in FIG. 151 (A), based on the jackpot determination associated with winning at the start ports (first start port 2101, second start port 2102). In addition, the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are aligned with the same symbol, and the reach form is displayed. An example of the case where the non-probable big hit symbol of “6, 6, 6” is temporarily stopped). That is, in this effect example, the decorative symbol 4601 to 4603 is displayed with a non-probable big hit symbol stop mode for a predetermined time, thereby indicating whether or not the effect by the decorative symbol is further continued. A period of time in which a static display effect appears) is provided. Therefore, when there is no re-lottery effect for the probable big hit symbol, the effect ends with the display mode shown in FIG. 151 (A).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 151 (B), in a state where the non-probable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the player is prompted to operate the dial operation unit 401 in the display area. A display image appears. At this time, the operation unit 400 is not driven at all, but the operation receiving unit (in this case, the dial operation unit 401) that is urged to be operated by the player is controlled to light up. You may do it.

  Then, when the player operates the dial operation unit 401 as shown in FIG. 151 (C) with the operation opportunity given to the dial operation unit 401 in this way, the dial operation unit 401 corresponding to the operation is displayed. Rotation motion is detected, and based on the detection, the non-probable big hit symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is re-variable (re-lottery effect), and the chance to stop display with the probable big hit symbol Is added (operation system production during operation).

  However, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 151 (A), when the non-probable big hit symbol is in an effect situation that can be fixed and stopped as it is, any display image that prompts the player to operate the dial operation unit 401 appears. Without (without FIG. 151 (B) appearing), as shown in FIG. 151 (C), the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 is irrelevant to the operation intention of the player by the rotational drive of the dial drive motor 414. By the way, the case where it rotates freely is given. Even when such a rotation operation is performed, the display of the decorative symbols 4601 to 4603 with the non-probable large hit symbol stop mode for a predetermined time is terminated to match this rotation operation. Is re-variable (re-lottery effect) to give a chance to stop display with a probable big hit symbol (operation system effect during non-operation).

  Incidentally, even in this production example, when the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 is rotated by the rotational drive of the dial drive motor 414, the above-described changes are caused in the production of the sound and the production of the frame lamp. I have to. At the same time, the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 or the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 may be caused to emit light by driving the full-color LEDs 432d and 430b to be turned on and blinking.

  According to the third special effect example, an operation opportunity is given to the dial operation unit 401, and an operation system effect at the time of operation according to the operation by the player using the operation opportunity can be performed. In the situation (the production situation shown in FIG. 151 (A)), the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 is driven by the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 without being given an opportunity to operate the dial operation unit 401. However, an operation system effect at the time of non-operation that causes a change in a predetermined effect so as to match the rotation operation can be performed arbitrarily without being related to the operation intention by the player.

  That is, in this case, when an operation system effect at the time of non-operation is performed from the effect state shown in FIG. 151 (A), depending on the player, for example, an operation opportunity for the dial operation unit 401 when the operation system effect appears. You will feel the feeling of being deprived. In the case of a player who has learned such a sense, every time an operation opportunity is given to the dial operation unit 401 by performing an operation system effect at the time of operation from the effect state shown in FIG. Since it is expected that the game will be handled with care, it will be possible to suppress the decline in the game interest.

  Note that the dial operation unit 401 is also operated at the timing shown in FIG. 149 (B) in the first special effect example and at the timing shown in FIG. 150 (B) in the second special effect example. It is possible to give a case where an operation system effect can be given at the time of operation according to an operation by a player using the operation opportunity. However, in this case, the expectation level (probability of winning the jackpot) when the operation system effect during non-operation is performed is higher than when the operation system effect during operation is performed. It is more desirable.

  Here, the electric drive source for operating the dial operation unit 401 is not limited to the dial drive motor 414 formed of the stepping motor described in the embodiment, but the electric drive source for rotationally driving the dial operation unit 401. In this case, it is desirable to use a stepping motor as an electric drive source for the following reason.

  For example, it is expected that the dial operation unit 401 is frequently stopped by the touch of the player in the rotational drive state. However, if the dial drive motor 414 is a stepping motor, it is rotated with weak excitation. If you do this, you can easily step out, and you can ensure safety. In addition, if the excitation for rotation is continued even after the dial operation unit 401 is stopped, the touch is transmitted to the player's finger, and a fresh surprise is obtained for the player. Further, conversely, if the stepping motor is applied with weak excitation enough to maintain the dial operation unit 401 in a stopped state, a click feeling can be generated when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated, and the operability is improved. .

  Further, if a motor having a large detent torque (non-excitation holding torque) is selected, even excitation is not required. Also, for example, when a DC motor is used as an electrical drive source, a large current flows because the armature voltage (counterelectromotive force) disappears when the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped in the rotational drive state. It is not preferable in terms of heat generation and durability. In contrast, stepping motors do not have such concerns. For the above reasons, it is desirable that the electric drive source is a stepping motor.

  By the way, such an operation unit 400 may be used so that, for example, the player can recognize the jackpot reliability of the reach variation that develops according to the rotational operation mode of the dial operation unit 401 when the reach variation develops. The configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153. In addition, about the following production examples, it is assumed that the dial operation unit 401 is driven and controlled so that it can be stopped intentionally by an operation by the player.

  First, as shown in FIG. 152 (A), after the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are aligned with the same symbol and the reach mode is displayed (in the same diagram, the right and left decorative symbols are aligned with “7”) ), And the medium decorative design 4602 is displayed in the normal reach variation mode to determine the losing (in the same figure, the case where the “6” medium decorative design 4602 is temporarily stopped and displayed) Is temporarily stopped. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 152 (B), the operation unit 400 is driven while the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops the lost symbol. Specifically, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 emit light when the full color LEDs 432d and 430b are turned on and blinking, and at the same time, the dial operation unit 401 is driven by the rotation of the dial drive motor 414. Rotate. At the same time as the effect driving of the operation unit 400 is started, a character 4614 “Please stop the rotation of the dial operation unit” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the player can perform the dial operation. The rotation of the unit 401 is prompted to stop.

  Then, when the reach fluctuation that develops is low in reliability, in other words, when the normal reach fluctuation develops to the long reach fluctuation (first effect mode), as shown in FIG. When the player grasps the operation unit 401 with the hand H and the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b of the operation unit 400 detect this, and the effect of the operation unit 400 is produced. The drive is stopped (first mode operation control means). Specifically, by stopping the lighting / flashing drive of each full-color LED 432d, 430b, the light emission of the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 is stopped, and at the same time, the rotational drive of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped. The rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is stopped. As a result, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays a low-hit reliability because the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are not moved to the left and right upper ends of the display screen, and the variation of the middle decorative symbol 4602 is resumed. It develops into long reach fluctuation.

  On the other hand, when the reach variation that develops is high in the reliability of the jackpot, in other words, when the normal reach variation evolves to the super reach variation (second effect mode), as shown in FIG. When the player holds the operation unit 401 with the hand H, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped. However, in this case, even if the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b of the operation unit 400 detect this, the effect driving of the operation unit 400 is continued (second mode operation control means). Thereby, the light emission of the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 is continuously performed. In addition, the player is forced to press and hold the dial operation unit 401 during the rotation operation with the hand H, so that the player receives vibration from the dial drive motor 414 that drives the dial operation unit 401. Note that such vibration of the dial drive motor 414 can be realized only by a player who touches the dial operation unit 401.

  Accordingly, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed on the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 to the left and right upper ends of the display screen, respectively. Developed into highly reliable super reach fluctuations. That is, the operation unit 400 notifies the development from the normal reach fluctuation of the decorative pattern in the liquid crystal display device 1900 by the effect driving (rotation operation) and performs the rotation operation while the player holds the dial operation unit 401. Whether or not the reliability of the jackpot of the reach fluctuation that develops depending on whether or not to continue is high is predicted. Further, the advance notice from the normal reach variation of the decorative symbol is not known unless the player touches the dial operation unit 401. Therefore, the player can select whether or not to receive a notice depending on whether or not the dial operation unit 401 is touched, and as a result, the range of ways to enjoy the game is widened.

  Here, the rotation advance notice control processing of the operation unit 400 by the peripheral control unit 4140 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 153, the peripheral control unit 4140 first determines whether or not a rotation advance notice command has been received from the main control board 4100 side (step S2051). The rotation advance command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 side to the peripheral control unit 4140 side when executing the advance notice effect of rotating the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 in accordance with the reach variation of the decoration symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1900. A command signal to be sent. When the rotation advance notice command is not received in step S2051, the rotation advance notice control process is finished as it is. On the other hand, when the rotation advance command is received in step S2051, the peripheral control unit 4140 controls the dial drive motor 414 to rotate the dial operation unit 401 (step S2052). At this time, as a notice of rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the full color LED 430b is lit and blinked to illuminate the dial operation unit 401.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the dial operation unit 401 continues the rotation operation, in other words, whether or not the operation detection signal by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b is changed (step S2053). In step S2053, when the player continues to rotate the dial operation unit 401 without grasping the dial operation unit 401, that is, when the operation detection signal is changed, the dial operation is performed as a notice effect due to reach variation. It is determined whether or not a rotation control time (for example, 10 seconds) of the unit 401 has elapsed (step S2054). If the player does not stop the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 even after the rotation control time of the dial operation unit 401 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2057 as it is and the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the lighting decoration are performed. Stop the rotation advance notice control process.

  On the other hand, when the player grasps the dial operation unit 401 in step S2053 and the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is stopped, that is, when the operation detection signal is not changed, the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is performed next. It is determined whether or not the reach variation accompanied by the advance notice is a super reach variation with high hit reliability (step S2055). In step S2055, it is determined whether the variation pattern command sent from the main control board 4100 side to the peripheral control unit 4140 side is a super-reach variation command with high jackpot reliability accompanied by a notice of rotation of the dial operation unit 401. (It is a command of long reach fluctuation with low jackpot reliability accompanied by a notice of rotation of the dial operation unit 401). When the change pattern command is not a super reach change command but a long reach change command with a low big hit reliability in step S2055, the process directly proceeds to step S2057 to stop the rotation operation and the light emitting decoration of the dial operation unit 401. The rotation notice control process is terminated.

  That is, when a rotation advance notice of the operation unit 400 is performed as a notice effect accompanying a long reach fluctuation with low jackpot reliability, when the player grasps the dial operation unit 401 and stops the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401, When the player stops the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 without waiting for the rotation control time of the operation unit 401 (for example, 10 seconds), the driving of the dial drive motor 414 and the full color LED 430b is stopped and the dial operation is performed. The rotation notice by the unit 401 is finished.

  If the change pattern command is a super-reach change command with high hit reliability in step S2055, it is determined whether or not the rotation control time (for example, 10 seconds) of the dial operation unit 401 has elapsed (step S2056). . Then, when the rotation control time of the dial operation unit 401 elapses, the process proceeds to step S157 to stop the rotation operation and the light emitting decoration of the dial operation unit 401, and the rotation notice control process is ended. That is, when the dial operation unit 401 is notified of rotation as a notice effect accompanying the super reach variation with high hit reliability, even if the player holds the dial operation unit 401 and stops the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 At that time, the dial operation unit 401 continues to be rotated and when the rotation control time (for example, 10 seconds) of the dial operation unit 401 elapses, the driving of the dial drive motor 414 and the full color LED 430b is stopped and the dial operation unit 401 is stopped. The rotation notice by 401 is ended.

  In the above-described rotation advance notice of the dial operation unit 401, the player is made to recognize the jackpot reliability of the developed reach fluctuation in a mode after the player stops the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401. However, such a configuration may be made to allow the player to recognize whether there is a change from a loss symbol to a big hit symbol, or from a non-probable big hit symbol to a probable big hit symbol, This will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155.

  First, as shown in FIG. 154 (A), the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are aligned with the same symbol, and the reach mode is displayed as a configuration for allowing the player to recognize whether or not to switch from the lose symbol to the jackpot symbol. After that (in the same figure, the case where the left and right decorative symbols are aligned at “7” is illustrated), the middle decorative symbol 4602 is displayed in the normal reach variation mode, and the middle decorative symbol 4602 (in FIG. In the example, “6” medium decoration symbol 4602 is temporarily stopped and displayed).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154 (B), the operation unit 400 is driven to produce effects while the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops and displays the lost symbol. Specifically, the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 and the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 emit light when the full color LEDs 432d and 430b are turned on and blinking. The dial operation unit 401 of the unit 400 rotates. At the same time as the effect driving of the operation unit 400 is started, a character 4614 “Please stop the rotation of the dial operation unit” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the player can perform the dial operation. The rotation of the unit 401 is prompted to stop.

  Then, when there is no switching from the lose symbol to the big hit symbol (first effect mode), as shown in FIG. When the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped, this is detected by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b of the operation unit 400, and the effect drive of the operation unit 400 is stopped (first mode operation control means). . Specifically, by stopping the lighting / flashing drive of each full-color LED 432d, 430b, the light emission of the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 is stopped, and at the same time, the rotational drive of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped. The rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is stopped. Further, in this case, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 does not change the stop results of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 4601, 4602, and 4603, and the losing symbols are derived as the final display results (see FIG. (In the example, the lost symbol “7, 6, 7” is derived as the final display result).

  On the other hand, when there is a switch from the lose symbol to the big hit symbol (second effect mode), as shown in FIG. 154 (D), when the player holds the rotating dial operation unit 401 with the hand H. The rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped. However, in this case, even if the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b of the operation unit 400 detect this, the effect driving of the operation unit 400 is continued (second mode operation control means). Thereby, the light emission of the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 is continuously performed. In addition, the player is forced to press and hold the dial operation unit 401 during the rotation operation with the hand H, so that the player receives vibration from the dial drive motor 414 that drives the dial operation unit 401. Note that such vibration of the dial drive motor 414 can be realized only by a player who touches the dial operation unit 401. Accordingly, in the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the stop result of the medium decoration symbol 4602 is switched, and the jackpot symbol is derived as the final display result (in the figure, “7, 7, 7 ”Is a case where the jackpot symbol of“ is derived as the final display result). Further, the notice of switching to the jackpot symbol is not known unless the player touches the dial operation unit 401. Therefore, the player can select whether or not to receive a notice depending on whether or not the dial operation unit 401 is touched, and as a result, the range of ways to enjoy the game is widened.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 155 (A), the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are aligned in the same design and reach as shown in FIG. 155A to make the player recognize whether or not to switch from a non-probable big hit symbol to a probable big hit symbol. After the mode is displayed and the medium decorative symbol 4602 performs reach fluctuation, the non-probable variable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed (in the figure, the non-probable big hit symbol of “6, 6. 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed. Exemplified case) At this time, each operation unit 400 is in a stopped state. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 155 (B), the operation unit 400 is driven to produce the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 while the non-probable large hit symbol is stopped. Specifically, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 emit light when the full color LEDs 432d and 430b are turned on and blinking, and at the same time, the dial operation unit 401 is driven by the rotation of the dial drive motor 414. Rotate. At the same time as the effect driving of the operation unit 400 is started, a character 4614 “Please stop the rotation of the dial operation unit” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the player can perform the dial operation. The rotation of the unit 401 is prompted to stop.

  When there is no switching from the non-probable big hit symbol to the probable big hit symbol (first effect mode), as shown in FIG. 155 (C), the player operates the dial operation unit 401 during the rotation operation. When the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b of the operation unit 400 detect this and stop the effect drive of the operation unit 400 (first mode operation). Control means). Specifically, by stopping the lighting / flashing drive of each full-color LED 432d, 430b, the light emission of the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 is stopped, and at the same time, the rotational drive of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped. The rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is stopped. Further, in this case, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 does not change the stop results of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 4601, 4602, and 4603, and the non-probable big hit symbol is derived as the final display result ( In the figure, an example is shown in which a non-probable big hit symbol of “6, 6, 6” is derived as a final display result).

  On the other hand, when there is a switch from the non-probable big hit symbol to the probable big hit symbol (second effect mode), as shown in FIG. , The rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped. However, in this case, even if the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b of the operation unit 400 detect this, the effect driving of the operation unit 400 is continued (second mode operation control means). Thereby, the light emission of the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 is continuously performed. In addition, the player is forced to press and hold the dial operation unit 401 during the rotation operation with the hand H, so that the player receives vibration from the dial drive motor 414 that drives the dial operation unit 401.

  Note that such vibration of the dial drive motor 414 can be realized only by a player who touches the dial operation unit 401. Accordingly, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is switched between the stop results of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 4601, 4602, and 4603, and the probability variation big hit symbol is derived as the final display result (same diagram). (In the example, the probability variation jackpot symbol of “7, 7, 7” is derived as the final display result). Further, the advance notice of switching to the probable big hit symbol is not known unless the player touches the dial operation unit 401. Therefore, the player can select whether or not to receive a notice depending on whether or not the dial operation unit 401 is touched, and as a result, the range of ways to enjoy the game is widened.

  In addition, with respect to the effect example shown in FIG. 155, at the timing shown in FIG. 155 (B), the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops at the timing shown in FIG. 155 in accordance with the rotational operation of the dial operation unit 401 by the rotational drive of the dial drive motor 414. If the displayed decorative symbols 4601 to 4603 are changed again (re-lottery effect), the rotation operation in the dial operation unit 401 and the re-change of the decorative symbols 4601 to 4603 (re-lottery effect) are linked. It can be realized as a production. Then, when the player forcibly stops the dial operation unit 401 during the rotation by hand, the decorative symbols 4601 to 4603 during the re-variation (re-lottery effect) are also forcibly displayed in the stop mode. By doing so, it can be realized as an effect as if the player himself is performing a re-lottery effect using the dial operation unit 401. Note that when the decorative symbols 4601 to 4603 are not forcibly displayed in a stopped state, the redrawing effect for the decorative symbols 4601 to 4603 is performed until the timing when the special symbol variation time ends.

  However, in the peripheral control unit 4140, in the stop control of the decorative symbols 4601 to 4603 in accordance with the forced stop of the rotation operation in the dial operation unit 401, the non-probability variable big hit symbol and the probable big hit symbol are based on the information of the winning prize type. It is determined which display mode of the symbol is to be forcibly stopped, and based on the result of the determination, the display is forcibly stopped with either the display mode of the non-probable variation big hit symbol or the probability variation big hit symbol.

  As for the dial operation unit 401, when the player releases his hand to release the forced stop of the rotation operation, the rotation operation appears again and is continued by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. Also good. At this time, the decorative symbols 4601 to 4603 that have been forcibly displayed with the stop mode are also variably displayed (re-lottery effect) in accordance with the rotation operation in the dial operation unit 401 again. It is more desirable to do so. Furthermore, for the re-rotation operation in the dial operation unit 401, the forced stop of the dial operation unit 401 being rotated, and the re-lottering effect of the decorative symbols in accordance with such movement in the dial operation unit 401, a special design is provided. As long as there is a predetermined production period until the fluctuation time ends, it is desirable that it can appear repeatedly according to the operation by the player.

  Further, in this case, as a method for causing the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 to appear again, the rotation operation does not appear again only by releasing the player's hand to release the forced stop of the rotation operation. When the rotation operation by the player is applied, the rotation operation appears again and is continued by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414, and the redrawing effect of the decorative symbols 4601 to 4603 is performed in accordance with the rotation operation. It is more desirable to keep it.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 when the player is forcibly pressed by the hand is not only a method in which the drive control of the dial drive motor 414 itself is stopped, but also a dial as a stepping motor. Although the drive control to continue the rotation of the drive motor 414 is continued, a method of making the state in which the player can forcibly hold it by hand by using the step-out phenomenon in the stepping motor, And so on. In particular, when using the step-out phenomenon in the stepping motor, the dial operation unit 401 in the stopped state cannot be newly rotated, but an excitation force sufficient to continue the rotation operation in the dial operation unit 401 is applied. By doing so, the rotation operation can be performed only by releasing the player's hand to release the forced stop of the rotation operation while maintaining the drive control mode for the stepping motor (dial drive motor 414). However, when the rotation operation by the player is applied, the rotation operation appears again and can be continued by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414.

  Incidentally, such a control method when the dial operation unit 401 during the rotating operation is forcibly pressed by a player by hand can be partially used as follows.

  For example, it is assumed that the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 is rotated by the rotational drive of the dial drive motor 414 in the operation system effect when not operated. Then, a change occurs in a predetermined effect so as to match this rotation operation, and thereby the expectation degree of jackpot is suggested.

However, even when the player forcibly presses the dial operation unit 401 during rotation, the expectation degree of jackpot is suggested by the subsequent movement of the dial operation unit 401. For example, as a way of movement of the dial operation unit 401 after being forcedly pressed by a player by hand,
(A) An operation state in which the rotational drive of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped and the dial operation unit 401 does not move,
(B) Although the rotational drive of the dial drive motor 414 is continued, the operation state where the dial operation unit 401 is oscillating out of step because there is no exciting force to rotate the dial operation unit 401.
(C) The rotational drive of the dial drive motor 414 is executed with a strong excitation force that enables the dial operation unit 401 to be newly rotated. When the player moves away from the dial operation unit 401, the dial drive motor 414 rotates again. The operation state to be operated and (d) the rotational drive of the dial drive motor 414 is executed with a strong excitation force that causes the dial operation unit 401 to perform a new rotational operation contrary to the conventional operation. For example, a predetermined lottery based on the result of the jackpot determination (reliability of performance) is prepared. It is determined in advance which one of these motion effects is to be adopted.

  Then, in the order of (I) → (B) → (C) → (D), when the operating state of (D) appears, the expectation that is won by the jackpot is maximized. Even when a non-operating operation system effect appears, not only is it possible to leave an operation opportunity for the player, but also the stage of expectation using the operation mode in the dial operation unit 401 It is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment after the rotating motion appears by a typical production method.

  In particular, according to this production method in which the operation mode of the dial operation unit 401 to be operated by the player is different when the player is forcibly stopped by hand, the player can change his own timing, Although the production result does not appear definitely until the hand is released with the intention, only the player has any operation mode depending on the subtle difference in vibration transmitted from the dial operation unit 401 to the hand (finger). You will be able to enjoy what you expect.

  However, when the player is forcibly stopped by hand, the dial operation unit 401 does not necessarily have to be driven. Based on the detection that the player has not forcibly stopped by hand (I ), (B), (c), or (d) may be driven in such a manner that one of the operation modes appears.

  Further, when the dial operation unit 401 is rotating, a display image that prompts the stop operation of the dial operation unit 401 is not necessarily displayed, and the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is stopped. In this case, these controls may be stopped for the change in effect due to sound, the change in the effect of the frame lamp, etc., or may be continued for a predetermined time without stopping.

  In addition, when the operation unit 400 functions as an alternative operation means at the time of the selection effect, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated according to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 so that the dial operation unit 401 at the time of the selection effect is operated. The operation method may be explained in an easy-to-understand manner to the player, and the configuration will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, as shown in FIG. 156 (A), an image for selecting the super reach variation mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as a display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 at the time of the selection effect. Specifically, the option image 4621 of the variation mode A (the letter “A” is illustrated in the figure) and the option image 4622 of the variation mode B (the letter “B” is illustrated in the figure) Are displayed side by side, and below that, an image 4606 in which the dial operation unit 401 rotates alternately in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction and the pressing operation unit 405 for selection determination is pressed, or “dial operation unit When the character 4612 of “Please select with” is displayed, a display for urging the player to select a variation mode is performed by rotating the dial operation unit 401.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 156 (B), below the respective selection images 4621 and 4622 of the variation modes A and B, the dial operation unit 401 rotates in the clockwise direction and the pressing operation of the operation unit 400 for selection determination. An image 4608 pressed by the portion 405 and a character 4615 “when“ A ”is selected” are displayed. When the variation mode A is selected, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated clockwise. The player is informed that the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed. At this time, the dial operation unit 401 is actually rotated clockwise by the drive of the dial drive motor 414, similarly to the image 4608 of the dial operation unit 401 rotating in the clockwise direction. The dial operation unit 401 is light-decorated by the lighting / flashing driving of the full color LED 430b (operation demonstration control means).

  Thereafter, below each of the selection images 4621 and 4622 of the variation modes A and B, as shown in FIG. 156 (C), the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise and the selection determining operation unit 400 The image 4609 of the pressing operation unit 405 being pressed and the character 4616 “when“ B ”is selected” are displayed, so that when the variation mode B is selected, the dial operation unit 401 is turned counterclockwise. The player is instructed to rotate and press the pressing operation unit 405. At this time, the dial operation unit 401 is actually rotated counterclockwise by the drive of the dial drive motor 414 in the same manner as the image 4608 of the dial operation unit 401 rotating counterclockwise. In order to make the player recognize the rotation operation of the motor 414, the dial operation unit 401 is light-decorated by the lighting / flashing driving of the full color LED 430b (operation performance control means).

  In other words, according to the above-described configuration, when a selection effect is executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900, the selection method of the options is explained to the player by the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the dial operation unit serving as the selection method is displayed. The rotation operation of 401 is actually explained to the player by visually rotating the dial operation unit 401 so that it can be easily understood visually.

  Further, the configuration of the operation unit 400 that functions as the operation explanation unit as described above is not limited to the selection effect only, and may function as, for example, the operation explanation at the time of the reach effect of FIG. 143 described above. The structure will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, as shown in FIG. 157 (A) as in FIG. 143 (B), the left and right decorative designs 4601 and 4603 are aligned with the same design, and a reach mode is displayed (in the same drawing, the left and right decorative designs are “ 7 ”), and as the middle decorative symbol 4602 continues to change, the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 move to the left and right upper ends of the display screen, respectively, and are reduced and displayed. Develop into fluctuations. At this time, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is stopped by stopping the driving of the dial drive motor 414, and the dial operation unit 401 is turned off by stopping the driving of the full color LED 430b.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 157 (B), as a variation pattern of super reach, a middle decorative pattern 4602a (in the same figure, “6”) that determines a shift with a different pattern from the left and right decorative patterns 4601 and 4603 is displayed. The middle decorative symbol is illustrated side by side, and the middle decorative symbol 4602b (the middle decorative symbol “7” is illustrated in the same diagram) that determines the big hit with the same symbol as the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are displayed side by side. Below that, an image 4605 in which the dial operation unit 401 rotates in the clockwise direction and a character 4611 “Turn the dial operation unit” are displayed, so that the operation unit 400 (dial operation unit 401) is displayed. A display prompting the player to perform a clockwise rotation operation is performed. At this time, the dial operation unit 401 is actually rotated in the clockwise direction by driving the dial drive motor 414 in the same manner as the image 4608 of the dial operation unit 401 rotating in the clockwise direction, and further, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is further rotated. In order to make the player recognize the operation, the dial operation unit 401 is illuminated and decorated by lighting and blinking driving of the full color LED 430b (operation demonstration control means).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 157 (C), when the effect display in which the middle decorative symbol 4602a for determining the loss pushes the middle decorative symbol 4602b for determining the big hit is started, the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is accompanied with this. Operation and luminescent decorations are stopped. As described above, in the configuration shown in FIG. 157, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in accordance with the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 so that the player can easily understand the operation method of the dial operation unit 401 at the time of reach production. Can be done.

  As described above, according to the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, when an operation effect is executed by the effect control means (peripheral control unit 4140), the effect is achieved by driving the dial drive motor 414 before the operation effect is executed and controlled. The player is instructed to manually operate the dial operation unit 401 by demonstrating the movement of the dial operation unit 401 that can affect the contents of the effect of the means. Since the operation method can be directly understood, a player who is still unfamiliar with the game on the pachinko machine 1 can operate the operation unit 400 as the designer assumes. Further, since the movement of the dial operation unit 401 that can affect the production content of the production means can be actually demonstrated and shown to the player, the dial operation unit 401 is simply displayed to the player on the explanation screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Compared with the configuration that prompts the manual operation, it is easy to understand and impacts the player, and the player can be instructed to manually operate the dial operation unit 401.

  Further, when the selection effect is executed, by rotating the dial operation unit 401, the player is taught to manually operate the dial operation unit 401 to select one of a plurality of options. Therefore, the movement of the dial operation unit 401 for manual operation according to the selection effect can be actually demonstrated and shown to the player. The player can be taught the operation.

  Further, when the player selects substitution of manual operation of the dial operation unit 401 during execution of the selection effect, the dial operation unit 401 is automatically rotated by the driving of the dial drive motor 414 so that the selection operation is automatically performed. In addition, when the player operates the dial operation unit 401 while the dial operation unit 401 is rotating, the driving of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped and the player's operation is given priority. A player who feels that manual operation of the dial operation unit 401 is sometimes troublesome work can be provided with comfortable game contents without forcing such operation. Yes.

  Furthermore, since it is possible to determine whether or not to perform the selection operation by pressing the pressing operation unit 405 at the time of the selection effect, the player is willing to operate the dial operation unit 401. The game can be advanced in a state where it is clear whether or not there is, and as a result, a player who is looking forward to manual operation of the dial operation unit 401, and a player who is not looking forward to manual operation of the dial operation unit 401, Comfortable game content can be provided to all players.

  Further, when the selection effect is executed, if the player does not operate the dial operation unit 401 within a predetermined time, the selection effect is performed by a predetermined selection method. Can be advanced. Further, when it is determined at the time of execution of the selection effect that the ratio of the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 by the player so far is high, the reception time of the operation of the dial operation unit 401 by the player is extended. Therefore, by extending the effective detection time for a player who is looking forward to the operation of the dial operation unit 401, it is possible to make the game content according to user needs.

  In addition, when the player makes a selection agent during the selection effect, the dial operation unit 401 performs the selection agent by a predetermined selection method. The selection proxy can be executed in an equal manner. In addition, since the operation of the dial operation unit 401 operated by the player is stored at the time of the selection effect, when the selection agent is executed, the selection agent is reflected by reflecting the selection tendency of the player. Can be executed.

[Second Embodiment of Operation Unit 400]
The operation unit 400 according to the second embodiment includes a non-contact sensor 409 that can detect an operation action by the player with respect to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. This is different from the operation unit 400 according to the embodiment.

  That is, the operation unit 400 according to the second embodiment includes, for example, a light emitting unit 409a that emits infrared rays and an infrared ray emitted from the light emitting unit 409a directly above the operation unit 400, as shown in FIG. A light receiving portion 409b disposed so as to receive light as reflected light from the detection region. The light emitting portion 409a and the light receiving portion 409b are connected to the dial operation portion 401 and the pressing operation portion 405. It functions as a non-contact sensor 409 that can detect an operation action by a player.

  For example, now, assuming that the player has an opportunity to operate the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, the peripheral control unit 4140 first detects the detection area directly above the operation unit 400. Control is performed so that infrared rays are emitted from the light emitting unit 409a toward the. The time for which the emission of infrared rays from the light emitting unit 409a is continued is, for example, an operation for the specific operation receiving unit set when an operation opportunity for the specific operation receiving unit is given to the player. It is desirable to set it to the same time as the effective period for accepting or a longer time including this effective period (may be always output).

  Then, in a state where infrared rays are thus emitted from the light emitting unit 409a, if the player moves his hand to the detection area directly above the operation unit 400 to operate the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, the light emission is performed. The infrared rays from the unit 409a are reflected from the hand in the detection region and become reflected light toward the light receiving unit 409b. When reflected light is detected by the light receiving unit 409b, the detection information is input to the peripheral control unit 4140, and it is determined that the player is just about to operate a specific operation receiving unit. It has become so.

  Note that the detection area by the non-contact sensor 409 according to this embodiment is an area (space) where the space where the operation action for the dial operation unit 401 is performed overlaps the space where the operation action for the pressing operation unit 405 is performed. Is set. However, according to the operation unit 400 in which the dial operation unit 401 is positioned and surrounds the pressing operation unit 405, the dial operation can be performed only by setting a detection area immediately above the operation unit 400. It is possible to detect an operation action by the player for either the unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405.

Hereinafter, an effect example using the operation unit 400 according to the second embodiment provided with the non-contact sensor 409 will be described.
First, as an example, as shown in FIG. 159 (A), the liquid crystal display device 1900 is based on the jackpot determination that accompanies the winning to the starting port (first starting port 2101, second starting port 2102). The decorative symbols 4601 to 4603 are variably displayed, and an image 4631 in which the pressing operation unit 405 performs a pressing operation and a character 4632 “please press the pressing operation unit 405” are displayed below the operation symbols. A display prompting the player to perform a pressing operation on 400 (pressing operation unit 405) is performed, thereby giving the player an opportunity to operate the operation unit 400 (pressing operation unit 405). At this time, the operation unit 400 is not driven at all, but the operation receiving unit (here, the pressing operation unit 405) that is urged to be operated by the player is controlled to light up. You may do it.

  When the player operates the pressing operation unit 405 as shown in FIG. 159B with the operation opportunity for the pressing operation unit 405 thus provided, the pressing operation unit 405 corresponding to the operation is displayed. A new character image showing the reliability as a display effect, such as an effect image in which “Chance!” Is written, for example, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the detection of the pressing operation. By causing 4633 to appear, an operation system effect at the time of an operation corresponding to the pressing operation by the player on the pressing operation unit 405 is realized.

  However, in this effect example, when a display effect having a specific display effect pattern is being executed, or when a win is made in a predetermined effect lottery based on the result of the jackpot determination (the reliability of the effect is a predetermined value) When a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as the above, the player should operate the pressing operation unit 405 as shown in FIG. 159 (C) without waiting for the player's pressing operation on the pressing operation unit 405. When the player's hand H is carried to the detection area directly above the operation unit 400, an effect pattern that causes a change in a predetermined effect is provided.

  More specifically, in the peripheral control unit 4140 according to this production example, the player is about to operate a specific operation receiving unit (here, the pressing operation unit 405) based on the detection information in the light receiving unit 409b. For example, “chance !!” is written in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the determination without waiting for the pressing operation to appear in the pressing operation unit 405. A new character image 4633 showing the reliability as a display effect, such as an effect image, is made to appear (operation system effect during non-operation). In addition, in the effect shown in FIG. 159 (B) and the effect shown in FIG. 159 (C), the same character 4633 can appear in these effects, and what appears in any effect. Is difficult to recognize from the display image (character 4633). However, even when the same character 4633 appears, when the effect shown in FIG. 159 (C) is performed rather than when the effect shown in FIG. 159 (B) is performed. The higher the reliability as the production (the probability of winning the jackpot when the production appears).

  That is, in this case, unless the player's operation method for the pressing operation unit 405 is special, the character image 4633 is preceded by a time that is extremely shorter than the timing at which the pressing operation unit 405 is actually operated by the player. As a player, the player comes to play with an ambiguous expectation that “the character image 4633 may have appeared before the pressing operation”. Therefore, in reality, there is a possibility that the operation system effect at the time of non-operation shown in FIG. 159 (C) is performed even though the operation system effect at the time of operation shown in FIG. 159 (B) is performed. It is also expected to play games with consciousness, and this makes it possible to raise a sense of expectation for the effect when the operation system effect at the time of operation is being performed.

  In addition, since such an effect result can be recognized only by a player who has actually pressed the pressing operation unit 405, it can be enjoyed only by the player. Can be realized.

  Also, depending on the player, each time a display prompting the player to perform an operation on a specific operation receiving unit (pressing operation unit 405) is performed, first, a hand is placed over the detection area directly above the operation unit 400. , Check whether or not the predetermined performance changes in a non-contact state with respect to the specific operation receiving section, and confirm that there is no change in the predetermined performance and then operate the specific operation receiving section. To do. According to such a gaming technique, although it is originally an effect that merely pushes the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to enjoy the effect in two stages of a non-contact state and a contact state. . In addition, for a prudent player, it is possible to play a game while reliably recognizing which of the effects shown in FIG. 159 (B) and the effects shown in FIG. 159 (C) will be performed. become. In addition, when a change occurs in a predetermined performance in a non-contact state with respect to a specific operation receiving part, even if an operation by contact is performed on the specific operation receiving part, the change in the predetermined effect is Does not occur. Therefore, when a predetermined effect is changed in a non-contact state with respect to a specific operation receiving unit, the lighting control for the operation receiving unit that the player is prompted to operate is also stopped. It is desirable to do.

  However, every time the effect shown in FIG. 159 (B) is performed, if the user is aware of the possibility that the effect shown in FIG. 159 (C) is being performed, the operation at the time shown in FIG. As a price that can raise the expectation for the operation system effect, there is a concern that the expectation for the operation system effect at the time of non-operation shown in FIG. Therefore, the dedicated character image at the time of operation that appears only when the operation system effect at the time of operation shown in FIG. 159 (B) is performed, and the operation system effect at the time of non-operation shown in FIG. 159 (C). It is more desirable to prepare a dedicated character image at the time of non-operation that appears only when it is being performed, and to selectively display these dedicated character images at a predetermined frequency.

  Next, as a second example, as shown in FIG. 160 (A), in the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the jackpot determination accompanying the winning to the starting port (first starting port 2101, second starting port 2102). The decorative symbols 4601 to 4603 are variably displayed, and below that, an image 4631 in which the pressing operation unit 405 performs a pressing operation and a character 4632 “please press the pressing operation unit 405” are displayed. A display that prompts the player to perform a pressing operation on the operation unit 400 (press operation unit 405) is performed, thereby giving the player an opportunity to operate the operation unit 400 (press operation unit 405). At this time, the operation unit 400 is not driven at all, but the operation receiving unit (here, the pressing operation unit 405) that is urged to be operated by the player is controlled to light up. You may do it.

  Then, when the player has operated the pressing operation unit 405 as shown in FIG. 160C with the operation opportunity for the pressing operation unit 405 thus provided, the pressing operation unit 405 corresponding to the operation is displayed. A new character image showing the reliability as a display effect, such as an effect image in which “Chance!” Is written, for example, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the detection of the pressing operation. By causing 4633 to appear, an operation system effect at the time of an operation corresponding to the pressing operation by the player on the pressing operation unit 405 is realized.

  However, in this effect example, when a display effect having a specific display effect pattern is being executed, or when a win is made in a predetermined effect lottery based on the result of the jackpot determination (the reliability of the effect is a predetermined value) When a predetermined condition is satisfied (e.g., when the above), the pressing operation unit 405 is provided with an opportunity to operate the pressing operation unit 405 as shown in FIG. 160 (B). When the player's hand H is carried to the detection area directly above the operation unit 400 to operate the player, a predetermined effect is changed.

  More specifically, in the peripheral control unit 4140 according to this production example, the player is about to operate a specific operation receiving unit (here, the pressing operation unit 405) based on the detection information in the light receiving unit 409b. When it is determined that the player is in a state of being present, on the basis of the determination, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, a display image indicating the jackpot expectation degree (probability of winning the jackpot) is caused to appear. Note that here, the display form (color, shape, or the like) of the image 4631 and the characters 4632 appearing in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is changed, and the images 4631a and the characters 4632a are displayed. Also, at this time, the specific operation receiving portion that is the operation target of the player is also subjected to a light emission effect that newly lights it, or when it is already lighted, the lighting mode is changed to perform the light emission effect. By doing so, even when the player's line of sight faces the target to be operated, the possibility of noticing such a change in performance is provided.

  In addition, a plurality of modes with different expectations for jackpots are prepared as the mode of change in the effect in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the mode of change in the effect in the specific operation receiving unit that is the operation target of the player. In addition, it is more desirable that the change modes appear selectively based on the result of the jackpot determination.

  In this effect example, after such effect appearance appears when the player's hand H is carried to the detection area directly above the operation unit 400 to operate the pressing operation unit 405, FIG. 160 (C ), Even when the player operates the pressing operation unit 405, the predetermined effect is further changed based on the detection of the operation.

  In other words, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, first, the display output of the image 4631a and the character 4632a is terminated, and what kind of display image appears until an operation by the player is performed (what kind of display It is made impossible to visually recognize whether a display change has occurred (operation system effect during operation). In addition, for example, a new character image 4633 showing the reliability as a display effect such as an effect image written “Chance !!” is displayed. In this case, by using a technique such as a layer, a new character image 4633 may appear so as to overlap the character 4632a so that the character 4632a cannot be visually recognized.

  At this time, the specific operation receiving unit operated by the player is also subjected to the light emitting effect at the operation receiving unit, so that any light emitting effect is performed until the player performs the operation. (What kind of change has occurred) is prevented from being visually recognized (operation system effect during operation).

  In this way, the presentation mode that appears when the player's hand H is carried to the detection area directly above the operation unit 400 to operate the pressing operation unit 405, the hand H is swung down as it is, and the pressing operation unit According to the effect example (operation system effect at the time of operation) that is concealed against the player's intention even when the operation is performed by the player at the time of operating 405, the pressing operation unit As long as the player's operation method for 405 is not special, it is realized as an effect only for a very short time until the pressing operation unit 405 is actually operated by the player.

  That is, in this case, the player is convinced that “the display effect of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the light emission effect in the pressing operation unit 405 may have changed for a very short time” or such a change in effect. If it is a player, it will come to play in the vague sense of expectation that "the production mode with high expectation degree of jackpot might have appeared". Therefore, in actuality, the non-operating operation system effect shown in FIG. 160 (B) is not performed (or the non-operating operation system effect shown in FIG. 160 (B)). In spite of the fact that a high-expected performance mode does not appear, it is expected that the player will be aware of the possibility that the same performance has been performed, and the operation shown in FIG. It is possible to raise a sense of expectation with respect to the effect when the operation system effect at the time is being performed.

  In addition, each time a display is made to prompt the player to perform an operation on a specific operation receiving unit (pressing operation unit 405), the player first holds his hand over the detection area directly above the operation unit 400. The state is maintained and a specific operation receiving part is checked in a non-contact state to confirm whether or not a change occurs in a predetermined production (the content of the production when the production changes) The operation receiving unit is operated. According to such a gaming technique, although it is originally an effect that merely pushes the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to enjoy the effect in two stages of a non-contact state and a contact state. .

  However, depending on the player, every time the effect shown in FIG. 160 (B) is performed, the effect may be missed, and there is a concern that the game interest will be lowered. Therefore, when it is within a predetermined time (for example, an effective period for accepting an operation on the operation receiving unit) since the operation opportunity for the specific operation receiving unit (pressing operation unit 405) is given, the specific operation receiving unit If the light receiving unit 409b detects that the hand H is in the detection region immediately above the operation unit 400 even after the operation on the (pressing operation unit 405) is once performed, FIG. It is more desirable that the effect shown in (B) appears again. In this case, priority is given to the display output of the image 4631a and the character 4632a appearing in the effect shown in FIG. 160 (B) over the character image 4633 newly appearing in FIG. 160 (C). The image 4633 may not be visible. The character image 4633 that can no longer be viewed in this manner appears again when the hand H is removed from the detection area.

  Furthermore, depending on the player, there is a possibility that even the presence of the effect shown in FIG. 160 (B) may not be grasped, which may result in a decrease in gaming interest. Therefore, when the operation system effect at the time of operation shown in FIG. 160 (C) is performed after the operation system effect at the time of non-operation shown in FIG. 160 (B) is executed, for example, “Chance !!” It is desirable that a new character image 4633 showing the reliability as a display effect, such as a written effect image, does not necessarily appear.

  That is, in this case, from the standpoint of a player who does not even understand the presence of the effects shown in FIG. 160 (B), even if a specific operation receiving portion (press operation portion 405) is operated using an operation opportunity. Regardless, there is a suspicion that no effect change will appear, so that it is possible to notice the presence of the effect shown in FIG. 160 (B) when the hand H is in the detection area directly above the operation unit 400. It is expected that the property will be higher. At this time, in view of the fact that the player will make a trial and error, when it is within a predetermined time after the operation opportunity for the specific operation receiving unit (pressing operation unit 405) is given, Even after the operation with respect to the operation receiving unit (pressing operation unit 405) is performed once, if the light receiving unit 409b detects that the hand H is in the detection region immediately above the operation unit 400. It is more desirable that the effect shown in FIG. 160 (B) appears again.

  Next, as a third example, as shown in FIG. 161 (A), in the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the jackpot determination associated with winning at the start port (first start port 2101, second start port 2102). The decorative symbols 4601 to 4603 are variably displayed, and below that, an image 4631 in which the pressing operation unit 405 performs a pressing operation and a character 4632 “please press the pressing operation unit 405” are displayed. A display that prompts the player to perform a pressing operation on the operation unit 400 (press operation unit 405) is performed, thereby giving the player an opportunity to operate the operation unit 400 (press operation unit 405). At this time, the operation unit 400 is not driven at all, but the operation receiving unit (here, the pressing operation unit 405) that is urged to be operated by the player is controlled to light up. You may do it.

  When the player operates the pressing operation unit 405 as shown in FIG. 161 (B) with the operation opportunity for the pressing operation unit 405 thus provided, the pressing operation unit 405 corresponding to the operation is displayed. A new character image showing the reliability as a display effect such as an effect image in which “Chance! By causing 4633 to appear, an operation system effect at the time of an operation corresponding to the pressing operation by the player on the pressing operation unit 405 is realized.

  However, in this effect example, when a display effect having a specific display effect pattern is being executed, or when a win is made in a predetermined effect lottery based on the result of the jackpot determination (the reliability of the effect is a predetermined value) When the predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when the above is satisfied, the pressing operation unit 405 should be operated as shown in FIG. 161C without waiting for the player's pressing operation on the pressing operation unit 405. When the player's hand H is carried to the detection area directly above the operation unit 400, the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed by a predetermined driving force.

  Then, in accordance with the pressing operation in the pressing operation unit 405 (or based on the detection that the pressing operation has been performed), for example, a display image such as an effect image written as “Chance !!” A new character image 4633 indicating the degree is made to appear. 161 (B) and the effect shown in FIG. 161 (C) are such that the same character 4633 can appear, but the same character 4633 appears. Even so, when the effect shown in FIG. 161 (C) is being performed, the reliability (the effect appears as the effect) when the effect shown in FIG. 161 (C) is being performed. The probability of winning the jackpot is high.

  In other words, in the operation unit 400 according to this effect example, the pressing operation unit 405 can be pressed by a predetermined driving force such as a solenoid, for example, without any operation by the player. In addition, with regard to such a pressing operation, until a predetermined time (for example, an effective period for receiving an operation on the operation receiving unit) has passed since the operation opportunity for the specific operation receiving unit (pressing operation unit 405) is given. To be maintained.

  In this way, when the player's hand H is carried to the detection area directly above the operation unit 400 in order to operate the pressing operation unit 405, the pressing operation unit 405 is a predetermined amount contrary to the player's intention. According to the effect example (operation system effect at the time of operation) that is pushed down by the driving force, the pachinko machine 1 deprives the player of the operation opportunity and operates the pressing operation unit 405 without permission. It will be realized as such a production. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 is maintained in the pressing operation state, the pressing operation unit 405 is operated (by a predetermined driving force), but a predetermined time elapses with respect to an operation opportunity by the player. Can be suitably stripped.

  Next, as a fourth example, as shown in FIG. 162 (A), in the liquid crystal display device 1900, based on the jackpot determination accompanying the winning to the start port (first start port 2101, second start port 2102). The decorative symbols 4601 to 4603 are variably displayed, and below that, an image 4631 in which the pressing operation unit 405 performs a pressing operation and a character 4632 “please press the pressing operation unit 405” are displayed. A display that prompts the player to perform a pressing operation on the operation unit 400 (press operation unit 405) is performed, thereby giving the player an opportunity to operate the operation unit 400 (press operation unit 405). At this time, the operation unit 400 is not driven at all, but the operation receiving unit (here, the pressing operation unit 405) that is urged to be operated by the player is controlled to light up. You may do it.

  When the player operates the pressing operation unit 405 with the operation opportunity for the pressing operation unit 405 thus provided, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 405 corresponding to the operation is detected, and the detection is performed. Based on this, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, for example, a new character image showing the reliability as the display effect, such as an effect image written “Chance !!”, appears, so that the pressing operation unit 405 is displayed. The operation system effect at the time of the operation according to the pressing operation by the player is realized.

  However, in this effect example, when a display effect having a specific display effect pattern is being executed, or when a win is made in a predetermined effect lottery based on the result of the jackpot determination (the reliability of the effect is a predetermined value) When a predetermined condition is satisfied (e.g., when the above), the pressing operation unit 405 is provided with an opportunity to operate the pressing operation unit 405 as shown in FIG. 160 (B). When the player's hand H is carried to the detection area directly above the operation unit 400 to operate the player, a predetermined effect is changed.

  More specifically, in the peripheral control unit 4140 according to this production example, the player is about to operate a specific operation receiving unit (here, the pressing operation unit 405) based on the detection information in the light receiving unit 409b. When it is determined that the player is in a state of being present, a gaming opportunity is not given at the stage of stage shown in FIG. 162 (A) among the plurality of operation receivers in the operation unit 400 based on the determination (player) The operation unit 400 is effect-driven so that a movement at the time of operation appears in a specific operation receiving portion. Here, the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 is rotated by the rotational drive of the dial drive motor 414.

  Further, at this time, a change is caused in the effect by sound, the effect of the frame lamp, and the like so as to match the rotation operation. Since the change modes of these effects are described above, they are omitted. At the same time, the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 or the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 may be caused to emit light by driving the full-color LEDs 432d and 430b to be turned on and blinking.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 162 (C), the player presses the pressing operation unit 405 provided in the form surrounded by the dial operation unit 401 under the situation where the dial operation unit 401 is rotating. Is operated, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 405 corresponding to the operation is detected, and based on the detection, for example, an effect image in which “Chance !!” is written in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, etc. By causing a new character image 4633 to show the reliability as a display effect, an operation system effect at the time of an operation corresponding to the pressing operation by the player on the pressing operation unit 405 is realized. . When the player operates the pressing operation unit 405 provided in a state surrounded by the dial operation unit 401 under the situation where the dial operation unit 401 is rotating, vibrations in the dial operation unit 401 are performed. Is transmitted to the player via the pressing operation unit 405 because of the structure of the operation unit 400 formed so as to be transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405. Become.

  As described above, when the player carries the hand H to the detection area directly above the operation unit 400 in order to operate the pressing operation unit 405 that is the operation receiving unit to which the operation opportunity is given, the operation opportunity is not given. According to the production example in which the dial operation unit 401 that is the operation receiving unit on the side is rotated by a predetermined driving force to indicate that the degree of expectation of the production is high, the position is originally deviated from the gaze target by the player ( An effect in which a step is given to the degree of expectation indicated in the non-contact state and the contact state is realized while paying attention to the movement of the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5). Further, in this case, the movement (rotation) at the time of operation is performed only on the operation receiving unit (dial operation unit 401) on the side to which the operation opportunity is not given although it is an effect using the operation unit 400 that is an operation target by the player. Operation) appears, it becomes possible to leave the operation opportunity for the operation receiving portion (press operation portion 405) on the side to which the operation opportunity is given, and thereby the operation receiving portion is operated. It will be avoided that adverse effects are exerted on.

  Furthermore, the operation mode of the dial operation unit 401 when the player's hand H is carried to the detection area is also in a situation where the pressing operation unit 405 is about to be operated. A movement (rotation operation) when the dial operation unit 401 as a receiving unit is operated is allowed to appear without permission. In other words, in this case, the player who sees the movement as if the dial operation unit 401 is operated on its own may operate two different operation receiving units, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, at the same time. As a result, it is possible to create a production situation in which the player operates the pressing operation unit 405 with great expectation.

[Another production example using the operation unit 400]
According to the operation unit 400, when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated step by step by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, As described above, the rotation can be assisted, prevented from intentionally rotating, and a click feeling can be imparted to the rotation.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 4140, when a display effect is being executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the operation receiving unit (the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405) of the operation unit 400 is executed. Control that generates a predetermined driving force according to the content of the display effect can be executed. In other words, in this case, the operation feeling felt when the player operates the operation receiving unit (for example, one dial operation unit 401) of the operation unit 400 appears in the liquid crystal display device 1900 although it is one operation unit 400. It can change according to the content of the display effect being displayed, and this makes it possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment when the operation system effect using the operation receiving unit is performed.

  Hereinafter, an example of an effect that can change the operational feeling felt when operating the dial operation unit 401 in accordance with the content of the display effect appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1900 will be described. Note that this effect is performed when a display effect having a specific display effect pattern is being executed, or when winning is performed in a predetermined effect lottery based on the result of the jackpot determination (the reliability of the effect is a predetermined value). When a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when a specific hold display mode appears in response to winning in a hold effect lottery using a jackpot determination random number in a hold state) Can be executed.

  First, as a first example, in the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the jackpot determination accompanying the winning to the start port (first start port 2101, second start port 2102), FIG. As shown, after the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are aligned with the same symbol and the reach mode is displayed, the normal reach variation changes to the super reach variation. In this super reach variation, the middle decorative symbol 4602 performs the reach variation in a state where the decorative symbols 4601 to 4603 are collectively reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the display region, and the character of the character in the center of the display region is changed. The expectation level of the jackpot is suggested by the directing action.

  Here, in the example of FIGS. 163A to 163C, a safe 4634 provided with a dial-type key is displayed as a character, and this safe 4634 is displayed on the player with respect to the dial operation unit 401. This is executed as a display effect (super-reach fluctuation) as to whether or not it can be opened by the operation of. In other words, although not shown in the figure, in the super reach variation, first, characters such as “Open the safe by operating the dial operation unit 401 as instructed!” Are displayed in the center of the display area. An opportunity to operate the dial operation unit 401 is given to the user. Then, when the dial operation unit 401 is operated as instructed, the dial type key is unlocked and the safe 4634 is opened. Corresponding character images appear, and after the effect, decorative symbols 4601 to 4603 are developed so as to develop a story-type effect associated with the appearing character image and show a jackpot result in the effect. It has a mechanism to stop display.

  However, in this production example, considering that the dial operation unit 401 is operated as a dial-type key, the dial drive motor 414 is provided for each predetermined rotation angle based on detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b. By applying a driving force to stop the rotation of the dial operation unit 401, a click feeling is given to the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401. As such drive control, for example, when a stepping motor is used as the dial drive motor 414, a predetermined excitation force that keeps the dial operation unit 401 in a stopped state is continuously applied to the stepping motor. It is possible to generate a click feeling at every predetermined rotation angle when the dial operation unit 401 rotates.

  According to such an effect, the operation feeling felt when the player operates the dial operation unit 401 when the player is given an operation opportunity of the dial operation unit 401 is the liquid crystal display device 1900. The drive operation of the dial operation unit 401 (dial drive motor 414) is performed with the drive mode determined based on the content so as to be in accordance with the content of the display effect appearing at. As a result, even when the dial operation unit 401 is operated, even when the dial operation unit 401 is operated, even this operation feeling is realized as a bodily sensation effect integrated with the display effect appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1900. At the same time, the player's sense of vision and touch and sound (when the dial-type key is operated (such as “click”) are also performed) The game entertainment can be suitably maintained by the novel production that appeals.

  Incidentally, in the effect shown in FIG. 163 (A), the dial operation unit 401 counterclockwise by a predetermined number of clicks as a “first operation” below the safe 4634 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. After “” is operated, an instruction image 4635 indicating that the dial operation unit 401 is operated clockwise by the predetermined number of clicks is shown as “second operation”. Note that the predetermined number of clicks may be one time or may be two or more times. However, for example, when the dial operation unit 401 is operated counterclockwise by a predetermined number of clicks as “first operation”, for example, “OK!” Is displayed on the display portion corresponding to “first operation”. It is desirable that the player can recognize whether or not the “nth operation” has been completed, such as when a character appears. Alternatively, if the dial operation unit 401 is controlled so that no driving force is applied to the dial operation unit 401 so that a click feeling does not occur when the dial operation unit 401 is operated in a direction different from the instruction on the liquid crystal display device 1900, “ As the “first operation”, when the dial operation unit 401 is operated counterclockwise by a predetermined number of clicks, even if the dial operation unit 401 is continuously operated counterclockwise, the click feeling does not occur (“ Because it has shifted to “second operation (clockwise)”). As described above, the player may be able to recognize whether or not the “n-th operation” has been completed based on the operational feeling of the dial operation unit 401.

  Further, in this effect example, since the number of clicks felt by the player when the dial operation unit 401 is operated before the safe 4634 is opened, the jackpot expectation degree (reliability of the effect) is indicated. Also, as an instruction to operate the dial operation unit 401, an effect mode such as “how many times of operation” is determined in the effect lottery according to the result of the jackpot determination, and the determined effect is determined. An instruction image 4635 for operating the dial operation unit 401 in a manner is displayed. In other words, in this case, the expectation of the jackpot (the reliability of the performance) depends on the number of clicks felt by the player when the dial operation unit 401 is operated before the safe 4634 is opened and the development destination of the subsequent production (character image showing the production). ) Is shown.

  In this sense, in the effect shown in FIG. 163B, “first operation”, “second operation”, and “third operation” are displayed below the safe 4634 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. ”Is displayed, when the dial operation unit 401 can be operated while feeling a click feeling to the“ third operation ”according to these instruction images 4635, FIG. 162. It will be shown that the expectation of jackpot (the reliability of the production) is higher than the production shown in (A).

  However, in the “second operation” and “third operation”, the instruction image 4635 is “?”, And it is concealed whether to operate clockwise or counterclockwise. This is a display that prompts the player to guess the direction to be operated and prompts one or eight operations. Then, when it is detected that the operation is performed in a direction different from the predetermined operation direction, the effect is terminated without opening the safe 4634. In other words, in this case, the maximum number of click feelings that the player should have been able to feel can be grasped, and the game will develop into a pre-determined story-type production so that the jackpot result will be shown in the production. The decorative symbols 4601 to 4603 are stopped and displayed.

  As a more specific control example, it is determined in advance in which direction the “second operation” or “third operation” should be performed, and the operation is performed in a direction different from the determined direction. When it is detected that the safe is not opened, the effect is terminated and the player can feel the maximum number of click feelings (the expectation of jackpot) in advance. It will be developed into a story-style production that has been decided. On the other hand, when the player operates in the predetermined direction until the “third operation” (maximum number of operations), the safe 4634 opens, and the maximum click feeling that the player can feel. In a state where the number of times (expected expectation of jackpot) is grasped, it will be developed into a story-type production decided in advance.

  Here, as another control example related to the effect shown in FIG. 163 (B), for example, it is determined in advance that an operation can be performed while feeling a click feeling until the “nth operation”, and the determination is made. Until the “n-th operation” is completed, there is a method of performing control so that the player treats the operation as instructed regardless of which operation direction is selected. In this case, for example, if it has been determined in advance that the operation can be performed while feeling the click feeling until the “second operation”, the “first operation” ends (the display corresponding to the “first operation”). By performing drive control of the dial operation unit 401 so that the rotation direction that the player first operated after the “OK!” Character appears in the part as the instruction direction in the “second operation” is performed. In the “second operation”, the player always feels a click and succeeds. On the other hand, after the “second operation” is completed (the character “OK!” Appears in the display portion corresponding to the “second operation”), a direction different from the rotation direction that the player first operated is “ By performing the drive control of the dial operation unit 401 so as to be handled as the instruction direction in the “third operation”, in the “third operation”, the player always fails without feeling a click. Alternatively, when the “second operation” is completed (the character “OK!” Appears in the display portion corresponding to the “second operation”), the driving force is not applied to the dial operation unit 401. In addition, when the player challenges the “third operation”, an indication that the player has failed may appear.

  According to this other control example, for example, even when the expectation level of jackpot is low such that the click feeling appears only as few as two times, whether the expectation level of jackpot (reliability of performance) is high. As described above, since it is possible to appropriately display “many operations”, it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment at the time when the effect is performed. In addition, as a result of the production, even if the production ends and develops into a story-type production with only a few clicks being obtained, the production is performed due to the player's own operation. Since awareness of the possibility of failure, the decline in the entertainment interest is suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the effect shown in FIG. 163 (C), only the instruction image 4635 for “first operation” is displayed below the safe 4634 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Even if the dial operation unit 401 is operated in accordance with the image 4635, there is a production situation that is highly likely to indicate that the expectation level of jackpot (reliability of production) is low. In other words, when such an effect appears, the gaming interest is reduced at the stage before the dial operation unit 401 is operated, and thus the dial operation unit 401 is not operated and may end without enjoying the effect. There is.

  Therefore, in the effects shown in FIGS. 163 (A) to 163 (C), for the predetermined number of clicks required for each operation, an instruction mode such as “how many operations” is displayed. At the same time, it is more desirable to make a decision by a predetermined effect lottery according to the result of the jackpot determination so that it can change every time the effect is performed. For example, even when the effect shown in FIG. 163 (C) appears, the counterclockwise until a large number of click feelings (such as 10 times) are obtained as a result of the player operating the dial operation unit 401 as instructed. When it was possible to continue the operation while feeling the click feeling around, it was possible to obtain a click feeling for three times in the production shown in FIG. 163 until the “third operation”. As a result, it is shown that the degree of expectation of jackpot (reliability of performance) is higher than the case.

  According to such an effect method, for example, even when the effect shown in FIG. 163 (C) appears, the point in time when the effect shown in FIG. 163 (A) appears (the expectation of jackpot is 30 %)) And the point in time when the effect shown in FIG. 163 (C) appears (the expectation degree of jackpot is 10%)), the point in time when the effect shown in FIG. 163 (A) appears Although the jackpot expectation (reliability of performance) is high, depending on the result of operating the dial operation unit 401 in accordance with the operation instruction indicated by the performance (number of times a click feeling is obtained), FIG. 163 (A) It can be shown that it is higher than the jackpot expectation level (for example, 30%) at the time when the production shown in (1) appears. Expectation of jackpot is 60%). However, in this case, since the others around the pachinko machine 1 can recognize only the jackpot expectation level (10%) shown when the effect shown in FIG. It is possible to provide a large gap between the jackpot expectation (60%) that is finally suggested only to the player through the gap (gap production).

  Note that the gap effect is not limited to the click operation on the dial operation unit 401, and only a player can recognize when operating a specific operation receiving unit, and is in the vicinity of the pachinko machine 1. The expectation of jackpot indicated by the change in operation feeling that cannot be grasped by other people, and prior to this, when an instruction image for operating a specific operation receiving part appears, both the player and the other person Any production that has a gap with the expected degree of jackpot shown to be recognized may be used.

  Here, as another example of the gap effect, for example, when a display image indicating that the pressing operation unit 405 is operated appears, the “cat” indicating that the expected degree of jackpot is 10%, and the expected level of jackpot While displaying either “tiger” indicating 30%, even when “cat” is displayed, the appearance probability is low, but the load felt when operating the pressing operation unit 405 Is given an effect pattern that is slightly heavier, and the expectation degree of jackpot (for example, 50%) when this effect pattern appears is the expectation degree of jackpot at the time when “tiger” is displayed ( Higher than (30%), the jackpot expectation (10%) that can be grasped by others around the pachinko machine 1 and the final suggestion only to the player through the production Jackpot It is possible to have a large gap between the expected degree (50%) (gaps director). As for the load felt when operating the pressing operation unit 405, for example, a solenoid or the like can be used so that a predetermined driving force can be applied in the direction opposite to the direction in which the pressing operation unit 405 performs the pressing operation. The driving force can be changed as appropriate.

  By the way, the most important thing in realizing such a gap effect is to make sure that the feeling of operation has changed even if another person looks at the player. Accordingly, the predetermined driving force applied to the operation receiving unit such as the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 does not prevent the movement according to the operation by the player from appearing in the operation receiving unit. In other words, it is applied within a range that can be easily operated (finger touch operation) only with the force of the player's fingertip. Therefore, although the operation receiving portion in a state where such a predetermined driving force is applied, the operation feeling felt at the time of operation is different compared to the operation receiving portion in a state where the predetermined driving force is not applied, It will function as an operation target that can be easily operated (finger touch operation) only with the force of the player's fingertip.

  Furthermore, it is also important not to cause a change in display effects, sound effects, lamps, or the like in the liquid crystal display device 1900 in accordance with the operation feeling of operation receiving units such as the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405. Needless to say. That is, in order to realize such a gap effect, it is important to secretly change the operational feeling of the operation receiving units such as the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 so that only the player can recognize them. .

  Incidentally, in the example of production shown in FIGS. 163 (A) to (C), if the player does not perform an operation on the dial operation unit 401 for a predetermined time, any production is also performed. Instead, it develops into a story-type production that has been decided in advance.

  Next, as a second example, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, as shown in FIG. 164 (A) based on the jackpot determination associated with winning at the starting port (first starting port 2101, second starting port 2102). In addition, after the left and right decorative symbols 4601 and 4603 are aligned with the same symbol and the reach mode is displayed, the normal reach variation has changed to the super reach variation. In this super reach variation, the middle decorative symbol 4602 performs the reach variation in a state where the decorative symbols 4601 to 4603 are collectively reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the display region, and the character of the character in the center of the display region is changed. The expectation level of the jackpot is suggested by the directing action. In addition, in the center part of the display area shown in FIG. 164 (A), a state where the character A is fishing is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), when any fish hits the fishing rod of character A, an image 4636 in which the dial operation unit 401 rotates and a character 4637 “roll up!” Are displayed. Thus, a display for prompting an operation to the operation unit 400 (dial operation unit 401) is performed, thereby giving the player an opportunity to operate the dial operation unit 401.

  Then, when the player operates the dial operation unit 401 with the operation opportunity given to the dial operation unit 401 in this way, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 corresponding to the operation is detected, and the detection is performed. As a display effect (super reach variation) such as what kind of fish the character A can catch by causing a change in a display image such as a fishing rod or fish displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the above. It is running.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 164 (C), when the display image that the fishing rod breaks and the fish escapes appears, for example, the highest jackpot expectation degree among a plurality of story-type effects with different jackpot expectation degrees The decorative design 4601 to 4603 is stopped and displayed so that the result is a low story-type production and the jackpot result is shown in the production.

  Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 164 (D), when a display image that lifts a fish brilliantly by a fishing rod appears, for example, it develops into a story-type effect associated with the lifted fish and wins a big hit with the same effect. As shown in the result, the decorative symbols 4601 to 4603 are stopped and displayed.

  However, in this production example, in consideration of the fact that the dial operation unit 401 is operated as if it is a fishing rod reel, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401 In addition, a driving force is applied to the dial drive motor 414 against the rotation direction, or a driving force is applied to the dial drive motor 414 so that it rotates in the opposite direction when the hand is released from the dial operation unit 401. Like that.

  Even with such an effect, the operation feeling felt when the player operates the dial operation unit 401 is given to the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the player is given an opportunity to operate the dial operation unit 401. Then, drive control of the dial operation unit 401 (dial drive motor 414) is performed with a drive mode determined based on the content so as to be in accordance with the content of the display effect appearing. As a result, even when the dial operation unit 401 is operated, even when the dial operation unit 401 is operated, even this operation feeling is realized as a bodily sensation effect integrated with the display effect appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1900. At the same time, the player's sense of vision and touch and sound (when the dial-type key is operated (such as “click”) are also performed) The game entertainment can be suitably maintained by the novel production that appeals.

  Furthermore, in this production example, multiple types of fish, such as sardines, ties, and tuna, are prepared as the types of fish that the player lifts. ) Is becoming higher. Therefore, the load that the player feels when rotating the dial operation unit 401 also resists the direction of rotation of the dial operation unit 401 so that the player feels heavier as the jackpot expectation level increases. Control for driving the dial drive motor 414 is performed. In addition, about such a control method, it can implement | achieve, for example by the predetermined | prescribed effect lottery according to the result of jackpot determination, the effect lottery which referred the result of the said effect of which fish are lifted.

  In such an effect, when some fish hits the character A's fishing rod and the player operates the dial operation unit 401, is the rotation control by this operation assisted by the drive control of the dial drive motor 414? An effect pattern in which the dial operation unit 401 starts to rotate freely as shown in FIG. 5 or an effect pattern in which the dial operation unit 401 starts to rotate freely in the rotation direction that the player should operate when a fish hits the fishing rod of the character A Etc. may appear. In this case, it is desirable that an effect result (the largest fish can be picked up) that is most advantageous for the player appears.

[5. Relationship between this embodiment and the present invention]
The upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 in the present embodiment is the storage tray of the present invention, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is the driving operation unit of the present invention, and the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is The hitting ball launcher 650 of the present embodiment corresponds to the game board holding portion of the present invention, and corresponds to the hitting launcher of the present invention. In addition, the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a of the launch power supply board box 830 in the present embodiment is used as the characteristic determining unit of the present invention, and the launch control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 of the present embodiment. And the launch power supply board 831 correspond to launch control means of the present invention.

[6. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game board holding port for holding the game board 4 with the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launcher 650 provided in the main body frame 3. Since it is possible to detach from the front side through 601, even if an attempt is made to change to an electrolytic capacitor SC 0 having a different capacity in order to change the driving characteristics, it is held in the game board holding port 601 in order to detach the firing power supply board 831. It is necessary to remove the game board 4 that has been removed, and it is difficult to perform fraud by making it difficult to replace the launch power board 831. The launch power board 831 is illegally modified and optimized to optimize the driving strength. In addition to being able to deter fraud that can be changed, it is also possible to deter the development of fraud such as fraudulent behavior by a player who has become frustrated by making it difficult to do fraud It can be a pachinko machine 1 capable

  In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 can be exchanged so as to be removable, even if an unauthorized operation is performed on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the launch power supply board 831, the launch power supply board 831 can be replaced immediately and the unauthorized use can be made. It can be eliminated, and the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game of the player.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the launch control unit 4120 that controls the hitting ball launching device 650 provided in the body frame 3 holds the game board 4. It is possible to detach from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the frame 3, and when replacing the game board 4 due to a model change or the like, the launch power board 831 (launch power board box 830) of the launch controller 4120 can be easily Since it can be exchanged, the main body frame 3 can be replaced by replacing it with a launching power supply board 831 equipped with an electrolytic capacitor SC0 and a DC / DC converter 831a that can realize driving characteristics that match the concept of the new model to be exchanged. The hitting characteristics of the hitting ball launcher 650 provided from the above can be matched with the new game board 4. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the driving characteristics of the game ball with the concept of the game board 4, so that the game with the new model of the game board 4 can be fully enjoyed, and the interest of the player is reduced. can do.

  In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be detached from the front side, when replacing the launch power supply board 831, there is no need to open the main body frame 3 for island facilities such as a game hall, It is possible to simplify the time and labor required for exchange, and it is possible to exchange in a short time and to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side. Further, since the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) can be exchanged so as to be removable, the driving characteristics are changed as compared with the case where the entire launch control unit 4120 (dispensing control board 4110) is exchanged. Cost can be reduced, and the burden on the hall side or the like can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when changing the model, etc., only the game board 4 is replaced so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are used as they are. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the launching power supply board 831 deteriorates, as described above, the launching power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side. The problem can be resolved, the game interruption period can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to quickly eliminate irritation and disappointment due to the game interruption. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, the launch power board 831 (launch power board box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the launch power board 831 is held in the game board holding port 601 for detachment. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing an illegal act enters the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the illegal tool reaches the launch power supply board 831 by the game board 4. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from performing an illegal act on the launch power supply substrate 831 and has a high defense against the illegal act.

  Further, the launch power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601, and the position where the launch power supply board box 830 is supported is more rearward than the front surface of the main body frame 3. A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the launch power board box 830 and exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  In addition, after the game ball is driven by the firing solenoid 654, the driving power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided in the firing power supply board 831. By exchanging the firing power supply board 831 equipped with the electrolytic capacitor SC0, the current (maximum current) supplied to the firing solenoid 654 can be changed, and the driving characteristics of the hitting ball launcher 650 are matched to the game board 4 Can be changed.

  Further, since the power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654, the power from the power supply board 851 is stored in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and fired between the time the game ball is fired and the next time it is fired. By supplying the power to the solenoid 654, it is possible to avoid instantaneously consuming a large current directly from the power supply board 851, and light emission and movement of the LED of the light emitting decoration board, the motor for driving the effect, the solenoid, etc. It is possible to prevent instability and occurrence of unevenness of the game ball.

  Further, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided in the firing power supply board 831. Since the firing power supply board 831 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is likely to deteriorate, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply substrate 831) can be easily replaced, and the malfunction can be solved at an early stage to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the power supply board 851 and the hit ball launching device 650 are provided. The power supply board 851 creates and supplies DC power (+ 5.2V, + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V) from the AC power (AC24V) of the island facility, and the hitting ball launching device 650 includes the handle device 500. The rotating handle body front 506 is rotated, and the firing solenoid 654 is driven with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotational position of the rotating handle body front 506 to launch a game ball toward the game area 1100.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, the firing intensity target voltage applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is + 5.0V obtained by amplifying the constant voltage + 2.5V from the shunt regulator circuit 4121a by the amplification circuit 4121b. Since the voltage is divided by the rotation position detection sensor 512 of the handle device 500, the divided voltage does not vary when the rotation position of the front of the rotation handle body 506 is held at the same rotation position. It will be held at a constant voltage. As a result, the switching circuit 4121d causes the firing control voltage to be close to the launch intensity target voltage by causing the combined current to flow to the launch solenoid 654 of the ball hitting device 650, so that the launch control voltage becomes the same as the launch intensity target voltage. When the rotational position of the front handle body 506 is held at the same rotational position, the combined current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 does not change, and a constant current flows. Therefore, the firing solenoid 654 causes the game ball to play the game area 1100. The firing strength launched towards the same is the same. Therefore, “flying unevenness” of the game ball due to the drive firing of the firing solenoid 654 can be prevented.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, on the side of the main body frame 3 that holds the game board 4 having the game area 1100, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are transferred to the normal passage of the full tank branch unit 770. Through a normal ball outlet 774 disposed at the front end of the main body frame 3 through 773, it is sent to the upper plate 301 provided on the upper side on the front surface of the door frame 5 through the first ball inlet 542 a of the door frame 5. When the upper plate 301 is filled with game balls and the game balls can no longer come out from the normal ball outlet 774, the game balls are sequentially stopped in the normal passage 773 on the upstream side of the normal ball outlet 774. When the game ball stops at the branch position of the tongue passage 775, the paid-out game balls enter the full tank passage 775 side through the branch, and are arranged side by side on the left side in the front view of the normal ball outlet 774. The full tank outlet 776 is sent to the lower plate 302 disposed below the upper plate 301 via the second ball inlet 542c of the door frame 5, and the door frame including the two storage plates 301 and 302 is provided. 5, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be sent without any problem. In addition, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank ball outlets 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right sides, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray (the first inlet) Even when there is only one ball inlet 542a and second ball inlet 542c), the game ball can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be able to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game ball (full tank branching unit 770) in the main body frame 3. And it can suppress that the cost concerning the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frame 5 from which the number of storage dishes differs is increased.

  In addition, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be handled without changing the main body frame 3, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5 is achieved. Cost can be reduced, and various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Furthermore, a game ball sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray. Even if it is exchanged, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage tray via the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so the time lag from payout to storage can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player due to lack of game balls for driving, and it is possible to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays.

  In addition, as long as the upper plate 301 is not full, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. This makes it possible to devote the player to a game ball driving operation and the like, and to suppress the player's interest in games from being reduced.

  Furthermore, since the pachinko machine 1 can have the same feeling as a conventional pachinko machine having two storage dishes with an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, the old pachinko machine can be reminiscent, Even the pachinko machine 1 (a new model of a pachinko machine) can reduce the feeling of anxiety given to the player and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to play.

  Even if the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side and the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray, the first sphere The position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a and the like can be set to the same height as the first ball inlet 542a and the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage plates. It becomes possible to avoid the depth becoming shallower, the storage tray can be deepened to secure a sufficient amount of game balls, and the game can be played without frequently worrying about the amount of storage for the player. Can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the main body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 and the like increases. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branching unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with game balls. Even if the game ball can no longer come out from the normal ball exit 774, the amount of game balls stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball exit 774 to the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. The amount of substantial game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be increased as much as possible. In addition, in the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray becomes full of game balls and the game balls can no longer come out from the normal ball exit 773 or the full tank exit 776, Since the position where the full tank path 775 branches from the normal path 773 is arranged as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are provided not only in the normal path 773 but also in the full tank path 775. Can be stored, and the substantial amount of game balls stored in the storage tray can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game balls in each door frame 5 is maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). The pachinko machine 1 can be increased to a limit and can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

  In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 are wide enough to allow game balls to circulate in a plurality of rows, and the stopping amount (reserved amount) of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 is Since it can be increased, even if the number of storage dishes provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to prevent the substantial storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 from decreasing. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 that can correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3 can be obtained.

  Moreover, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 can be seen from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with transparent resin, the game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. In this case, it is possible to easily find the place where the ball is clogged from the outside of the full tank branching unit 770, and it is possible to solve the problem at an early stage and increase the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power board box 850 that covers the power board 851, and then protrudes rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the connector terminal 855 is folded by the standing wall portion 850b, the tension acting on the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is connected by a locking claw or the like. It is possible to act in such a direction as to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853 to which the connector is fixed, and it is possible to prevent the connector terminal 855 from being disconnected by the wiring cord 854, so that the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 can be prevented. Easily remove the connected connector terminal 855 to easily perform maintenance such as board replacement. Can.

  Further, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, and the bending of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where there is no standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from being disconnected due to the unreasonable force and causing a failure.

  Further, a standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853, and the standing wall portion 850b is positioned adjacent to the power supply terminal 853. The wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 can be extended to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a force from acting and to prevent problems such as disconnection.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851 is provided with the standing wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 851 with the standing wall portion 850b, and the assembly work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. . In addition, since the power supply board 851 is covered with the power supply board box 850, dust and dirt that cause a failure can be prevented from adhering to the power supply board 851 and mounted on the power supply board 851. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult to touch or replace electronic components (for example, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.), and to increase the defense against fraud.

  In addition, a predetermined direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 in the power supply board 851 is a substantially perpendicular direction (front-rear direction) to the board surface, and the connector is connected to the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when the terminal 855 is connected or removed can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply board 851, it is possible to prevent the shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and the lead The pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from causing troubles because it is possible to prevent the energization failure and the power supply terminal 853 from being detached from the power supply substrate 851.

  Further, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means using the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b so that the wiring cord 854 is Even if a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 in such a direction as to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being released. Connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained to prevent problems such as poor contact and poor energization.

  Further, since the projections 850c projecting rearward are provided at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b. Even if it slides along the side, the projection 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall 850b. The pachinko machine 1 that reliably prevents the above-described effects can be realized.

  Further, since the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b is moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 is not easily detached from the standing wall portion 850b. In addition, the above-described effects can be surely achieved, and the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and then the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d. Thus, a series of operations can be performed continuously, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the wiring holding member that holds a part of the wiring 196 on the step 195a on the rear side of the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame 5 pivotally supported by the main body frame 3. 197 is pivotally supported, and the tip of the wiring holding member 197 extends in the direction away from the axis of the door frame 5 (open side), so that the door frame 5 is rotated with respect to the main body frame 3 in the opening direction. And the portion of the wiring 196 that extends from the tip of the wiring holding member 197 tries to leave the tip of the wiring holding member 197 toward the main body frame 3, and the tip of the wiring holding member 197 rotates in a direction away from the door frame 5. Will be. On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is rotated in the closing direction, it is pushed by the portion of the wiring 196 extending from the tip of the wiring holding member 197 and the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is rotated in the direction approaching the door frame 5 side. Will be. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 is in a state where a bridge is hung between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and a part of the wiring 196 holds the wiring. Since the bridge is formed by the member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from hanging down even when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Such as the main control board 4100 as the main body side electric equipment, the peripheral control unit 4140, the dispensing control board 4110, etc., and the door side electric equipment. Decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 430, 432, speakers 130, 222, 262, ball rental unit 360, handle device 500, etc. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of malfunction in the wiring 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates even if the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and to prevent a problem that the wiring 196 is pulled and disconnected or the connection connector is disconnected. it can. Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is simply bent partially as the wiring holding member 197 is rotated. ), The wiring 196 does not slide, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being rubbed and causing problems such as leakage or disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the holding holes 197 a that are arranged at a predetermined interval in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. It is possible to prevent the held binding band 198 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 through the holding hole 197a, and to reliably prevent the wiring 196 from dropping together with the binding band 198 from the wiring holding member 197. can do.

  Even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 is arranged at a position away from the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the wiring 196 is connected by the wiring holding member 197 as described above. Since it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the wiring 196 from drooping when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding, the main body frame 3 having increased strength and rigidity on the side of the door frame 5 that is pivotally supported. The pachinko machine 1 can have a high crime prevention property against fraud.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with protrusions protruding at least from the both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction to the side along which the wiring 196 is located, the wiring is formed by the pair of protrusions and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. 196 can be surrounded, and the wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-like wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 is prevented from being bent when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good state.

  In addition, the length from the base end to the tip end of the wiring holding member 197 is substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the base of the base end, and the main body frame 3 extends in the wiring 196. The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center side of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member Since a pantograph-like link is formed by the axis of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, wiring when opening and closing the door frame 5 The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be made smooth, the opening / closing operation can be facilitated, and an unreasonable force acting on the wiring 196, etc. can be reduced to cause problems such as disconnection. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph-like link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, a portion of the wiring 196 that extends from the front end of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back on the front end side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and gathered compactly, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 that pivotally supports the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 being closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the step 195 a that can store the wiring holding member 197 is provided, and the wiring frame holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base substrate cover 195. Since it is housed in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 or The wirings 196 can be gathered in a compact manner, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by other members, thereby preventing a problem from occurring.

  Further, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5. It is possible to reliably achieve the function and effect. Moreover, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for relatively holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 which can hold the game board 4 having a larger game area 1100 by enlarging the game area 1 and can attract the player's interest strongly by having the large game board 4 is provided. it can.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the side speaker 130 attached between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the dish unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5 is provided. In order to replace, first, the main body member 292 disposed on the front side of the speaker in the side speaker cover 290 is detachably attached to the door frame base main body 110 from the rear side, so the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed. The door frame 5 is opened to the front side, the body member 292 is not attached to the door frame base body 110 from the rear side of the door frame 5, and the body member 292 and the cover body 291 are then moved to the door frame base body 110 (door When it is moved to the front side of the frame 5) and removed from the door frame 5, the side speaker 130 faces from the front side of the door frame 5. Since the side speaker 130 is sandwiched by the speaker bracket 132 attached to the door frame base main body 110 from the front side, the speaker for the door frame base main body 110 from the front side of the door frame 5 after the main body member 292 is removed. By removing the bracket 132 and releasing the holding of the side speaker 130, and further moving the side speaker 130 to the front side, the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 are moved to the door frame 5 (the door frame base main body 110. The side speaker 130 can be removed from the door frame 5 without being removed from the door frame 5, and the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame 5 can be easily replaced.

  Further, even when a player or the like hits the door frame 5 (side speaker cover 290) during the game and the side speaker 130 is damaged, as described above, the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame 5 can be easily removed. Since it can be exchanged, the interruption time of the game due to the exchange of the side speakers 130 can be shortened as much as possible, and the interruption is prolonged, so that the player becomes irritated and less interested and the interest is lowered. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the side speaker 130 is sandwiched between the speaker bracket 132 and the door frame base main body 110, and the side speaker 130 can be attached to the door frame 5 ( Since it can be attached to the door frame base body 110), the side speaker 130 does not need to be provided with a mounting piece, a mounting hole or the like, the cost for the side speaker 130 can be reduced, and the cost for the pachinko machine 1 is increased. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the cover body 291 that covers the front surface of the side speaker 130 is formed of a metal plate (punching metal) having a plurality of through holes, the cover body 291 is not affected even if a player or the like hits the cover body 291. Deformation and breakage can be reduced as much as possible, the side speakers 130 can be sufficiently protected to prevent the occurrence of defects, and the durability of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced. .

  Moreover, since the side speaker cover 290 which covers the side speaker 130 is provided between the left and right side decoration units 200, 240 and the dish unit 300, the side speaker 130 is positioned relatively close to the player. However, as described above, the side speaker 130 can be easily replaced, and the interruption time of the game can be shortened as much as possible. Thus, it is possible to suppress the player's interest from deteriorating. In addition, since the side speaker 130 is arranged as close as possible to the player, the sound output from the side speaker 130 can be heard by the player more efficiently, and a powerful sound is provided. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from deteriorating by making the sound production enjoyable.

  Further, since the side speaker 130 is disposed between the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300, the continuity of decoration by the side decoration units 200 and 240 can be maintained, and the side decoration unit can be maintained. 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 can be connected without a sense of incongruity, and the side speaker cover 290 can prevent the appearance from deteriorating, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention strongly can be obtained. Further, since the surface shape of the main body member 292 in the side speaker cover 290 is formed so as to be continuous with the surface shapes of the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300, the side speaker cover 290 is formed on the side decoration units 200 and 240. It is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable even if the side speaker 130 is provided on the front side separately from the side decoration units 200, 240, etc. The design of the front surface of the door frame 5 (pachinko machine 1) can be made favorable.

  Furthermore, when removing the main body member 292 of the side speaker cover 290 from the door frame 5, it is necessary to first remove the security cover 180 and the glass unit 590 attached to the rear side of the door frame 5. It may take a little time to remove the glass, and it is possible to make the removal work troublesome for a person who intends to perform an illegal act, etc., and to make the removal work conspicuous by removing a relatively large glass unit 590. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 having high deterrence (safety) against fraud etc. can be obtained by deceiving theft or fraud.

  Further, since the crime prevention cover 180 covers the rear lower outer periphery of the glass unit 590 (the gaming window 101) in the door frame 5, it is flexible between the gaming window 101 and the glass unit 590 from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if a highly functional tool is inserted to try to cheat on the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100), the security cover 180 can prevent the tool from entering, A highly safe pachinko machine 1 can be obtained.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the fastening member 924 that fastens the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 is attached to the back cover 900. Since the guide member 923 is movably held, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 while the game board 4 is held on the main body frame 3, and the rear side of the game board 4 is maintained. Even when the fastening member 924 that fastens and fixes the back cover 900 to the body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780b of the body frame 3, 924 is held by the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and the fastening member 924 can be prevented from being lost or left in the pachinko machine 1, and the back cover 9 can be prevented. From 0 to the fastening member 924 from falling off can be a pachinko machine 1 capable prevented.

  Further, as described above, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from dropping from the opened back cover 900, so that it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 whose fastening has been released in a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. Further, it can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

  In addition, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 is extended at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a is reliably in a correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be securely fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Further, since the holding member 925 that holds the fastening member 924 in a freely movable manner with respect to the guide member 923 in cooperation with the head of the fastening member 924 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is provided. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming out of the elongated hole 923 b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 can be prevented. The fastening member 924 can be movably held with respect to the guide member 923 by the gap and the long hole 923b, and the pachinko machine 1 capable of achieving the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating a holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 is inserted into the back cover of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900. When the fastening hole 780b is fastened, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be housed in the housing recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are brought into close contact with each other. Thus, the protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility of other members coming into contact with the protruding portions of the guide member 923 and the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of problems. Can improve the appearance.

  Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female screw portion and is screw-coupled to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it is fastened only by pulling compared with engagement by a simple claw. Can not be released and the back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

  Furthermore, since the guide member 923 is flexible and the guide member 923 can bend, the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 relative to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921) can be further increased. The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is easily positioned in a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, and the male screw portion 924 is easily moved straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 770b. The male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  In addition, in the state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is in contact with the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking port 922 of the back cover 900, the locking port Since it is elastically locked to 922, the shaft extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 on the distal end side (the long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 that is movably mounted It can be moved so as to rotate around the center, and the locking piece 923 a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the long hole 923b on the distal end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening operation by the fastening member 924 can be facilitated, and the above-described effects. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be realized with certainty.

  Further, a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. A plurality of engaging pieces 908 to be engaged, and by engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, the fastening by the fastening member 924 is described. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using only one fastening part using the fastening member 924, and work such as assembly and maintenance can be performed. Can increase the sex. Further, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closed range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 (the rear side of the game board 4) can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening member 924.

  Further, the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pins 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover pivot support portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600). Therefore, by simply rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction and closing the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The hole 780b can be easily aligned, and the fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 through the insertion hole 921 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Further, since the back cover 900 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 can be opened even when the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and the back cover 900 is opened during maintenance or the like. It is possible to keep the cover 900 pivotally supported on the main body frame 3, and it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time and effort required to open and close the back cover 900 can be simplified.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a transparent prize ball base 710 having a peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (front-rear direction) on the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a book on the upper side of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball tank 720 for storing game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is aligned with the game balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720, and the rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base is aligned. A transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the side, and a game ball released from the tank rail unit 730 is discharged to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction, after the rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base 710 A part of the prize ball device 740 that is attached to the side and a side portion 904 that extends to the rear end of the main body frame base 600 and the rear surface of the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740 are rear. And a transparent back cover 900 arranged substantially in the same plane as that of the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like. A pachinko machine that can visually check the rear side of the game board 4 without opening the back cover 900 that covers the rear side of the game board 4. 1 can be used.

  Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc. When the game board 4 is removed from the front side to the 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, remove them. It can be easily detected from the image, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of any malfunction due to the residue.

  Further, as described above, since the rear surface and rear side surface of the game board 4 can be viewed from the outside, unauthorized devices and tools for performing illegal acts are attached to the rear side and side surfaces of the game board 4. Even if it is done, it can be easily discovered, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed, and it is also possible to easily find unauthorized devices attached to the game board 4 from the outside, The pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraudulent behavior can be provided, which can be used to prevent unauthorized installation of devices.

  Also, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the game machine 4 is installed come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign matters such as dust and dust from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to keep the game board 4 in a good state and suppress the occurrence of problems.

  In addition, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position about twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, and the above-described effects are surely achieved. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to obtain a flat shape. Further, it is possible to facilitate the attaching operation of attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

  Further, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made into a substantially flat surface, and it can be caught or brought into contact with other members in the island facility to be installed by eliminating protrusions on the rear side. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems. In addition, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, it is possible to use a buffer material with a simple shape and to increase the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency). The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

  In addition, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly visually recognized through the slits 916 and the like. The rear side of 4 can be further easily seen, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the back side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 and the like of the back cover 900. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from accumulating, and the control of the game is unstable due to the heat, and the occurrence of problems due to deformation of members such as synthetic resin is suppressed. be able to. Furthermore, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 are sized so that the game ball cannot pass through, for example, even if the game ball spills behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring due to the game ball entering.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation portion 405 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are in contact with each other. Therefore, when the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial driving motor 414 causes the dial operation unit 401 to vibrate by repeating normal rotation / reverse rotation within a predetermined angle range, so that the protruding portion of the dial operation unit 401 is The pressing operation portion 405 can also be vibrated through the step portion 407a in contact with 401f. Therefore, even if a vibrator for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405 is not provided separately, it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation with respect to the pressing operation 405, so that an effect using the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls. Further, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405 that the user thought would not move. It is possible to make it seem that there is something, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the interest from deteriorating. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the production using the operation unit 400. It is possible to facilitate the operation of the operation unit 400 to the player, and the enjoyment of the game by reducing the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other, so that the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even when the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed also on the dial operation unit 401 side, and load resistance and impact resistance against the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed. Can be increased. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to damage to the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent a player's interest in games from being reduced due to the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range with respect to the axial center extending in the vertical direction. When the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even if the dial operation unit 401 is driven to rotate by the motor 414, the pressing operation unit 405 can be prevented from rotating together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the player can perform the dial operation in the operation unit 400. The role of each of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be surely recognized, and the player can easily enjoy the performance using the operation unit 400, and is guided to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. The “PUSH” characters that have been played can be easily read from the player side without turning or tilting greatly, It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes from the inner periphery of the inner tube portion 401a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 has a smaller diameter than a predetermined position in the vertical direction. Since the step portion 407a is formed at the upper end of the operation unit 400, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible. It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 as much as possible, and the inside of the operation unit 400 through the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dust to enter, and it is difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate due to the entry of foreign matter, and it is difficult to press the pressing operation unit 405. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, which part of the circumferential direction with respect to the dial operation unit 401 is selected. Since the contact can be made even at a position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed with a feeling that it is tilted (a position that is biased toward the outer periphery from the center of the pressing operation unit 405), the dial operation unit 401 is reliably contacted. Therefore, the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are annularly contacted, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely distributed to the dial operation unit 401 side. Impact resistance can be further increased.

  Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower toward the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed radially outward in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, and the load is prevented from being concentrated. The loadability and impact resistance can be reliably increased, the durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased, and the occurrence of problems during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward / reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 is not simply rotated, but can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, or forward / reverse. The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that can be easily vibrated by repetition and that exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Further, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the dish unit 300 having the upper tray 301 for storing the game balls, the strength and rigidity of the dish unit 300 is high in order to store a large number of game balls. Thus, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a smashing of the operation unit 400 (pressing operation unit 405), and it is possible to easily entertain using the operation unit 400.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the terminal board box 870 containing the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and Even if an unauthorized tool is inserted between the body frame 3 and the like and the tip of the unauthorized tool is inserted into the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 accommodates the CR unit connection terminal board accommodated. 874 can be protected, and unauthorized acts on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be reliably prevented.

  When the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in the terminal substrate box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate are in the direction along the front surface (back surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the base 871, and the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the substrate of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are arranged in the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the barrier wall 875c of the box cover 875 exists, a barrier wall is formed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. In an analogy, an unauthorized tool with excellent flexibility tries to enter between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary). However, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the unauthorized entry of the tool from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be surely prevented. The pachinko machine 1 that can reliably prevent an illegal act on the unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b can be obtained.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed between the substrate as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and illegal acts can be surely prevented.

  Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871 so that the rear surface of the connection terminal board cover 873 can be opened and closed, and the opening 873b of the connection terminal board cover 873 is opened. And a board box cover 875 having a plate-like barrier wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the pivotally supported side of the through-hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the portions of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported with respect to the substrate base 871 to form a gap to allow an unauthorized tool to enter, an unauthorized tool is connected to the connection terminal by the barrier 875c. Reaching to the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) side can be prevented, and illegal acts can be prevented. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the connection box board cover 873 after opening the board box cover 875, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Can increase deterrence against fraud. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap, the substrate box cover 875 is formed. Can be prevented from being distorted to prevent the formation of a gap, making it difficult to perform fraud and making it highly deterrent.

  Furthermore, even if an unauthorized act of inserting the needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attempted, Since the rear side of the corresponding opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body is covered with the protective part 873g and the board box cover 875, the outside of the terminal board box 870 The needle-like electrode cannot be inserted from the (rear side) into the gap of the connector body, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed on the terminals of the connected wiring cord. Can be.

  In addition, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with a substrate holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c extends to the front side from the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even when a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 to form a gap in order to perform an illegal act, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves rearward together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). The CR unit connection terminal on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of a transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from the outside without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Whether an unauthorized tool is inserted into the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 accommodated therein, or the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 itself is not replaced with an unauthorized one. Or, it is possible to easily check whether electronic parts (for example, ROM, IC, resistors, capacitors, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 have been replaced with unauthorized ones. , It can make it easier to detect fraud, and it also makes it easier to find fraud. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the back surface side of the main body frame 5 so that the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like is directed to the rear side, When the main body frame 5 is rotated to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 are directed to the worker side (player side), and the CR The unit connection terminal plate 874 and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed with the door frame 5, the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the security side face plate 950 are provided. A rear piece of a pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952b is pivotally supported. Since the U-shaped projecting piece 166 is sandwiched between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 forcibly opening the main body frame 3, the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 has the front end of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the pivoted U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the door frame 5 from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3 by coming into contact with the piece 952b, and the closed door frame 5 can be peeled open. Fraud that can prevent the door frame 5 from being opened against the body frame 3 Carried out can be to the pachinko machine 1 be possible to prevent.

  In addition, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is set. The body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made difficult to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the crime prevention performance in the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, since the body frame base 600 that supports the game board 4 is formed of synthetic resin, the security side plate 950 on the side that supports the door frame 5 (the shaft support side) is formed of metal. Compared with the case where the entire main body frame 3 is made of metal, the cost associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 that locks the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one location between the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hook portions 1041, the open side is illegal such as a bar. Even if the tool is scooped by an easy tool, it is possible to prevent the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 from being spread well, and to prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly opened.

  Further, the rear end of the side piece 952a in the crime prevention side plate 950 is extended rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the dimension in the front-rear direction of the side piece 952a is increased. Since the bending rigidity with respect to the load applied in the front-rear direction is increased, the strength and rigidity of the security side plate 950 as a whole can be further increased, and it is possible to prevent the crime prevention side plate 950 from being forcibly bent and being cheated. .

  Further, since the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by a metal extrusion mold material, the security side plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined cross-sectional shape having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily obtained. It can be formed, and even if the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced, the increase in cost can be suppressed, and defects such as a decrease in strength that occur during processing are compared with the case where the metal plate is bent. The security side plate 950 can be reduced as much as possible and has high durability and high strength.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 301 and supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, and then the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5 is played. When the player operates, the game ball is sent to the ball hitting device 650 by driving the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580, and the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 by the ball hitting device 650. A game is played in the game area 1100 that can be visually recognized through the window 101, so that the player can be entertained, and a feed mechanism (ball feed member 584 or ball feed) is provided on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. A ball feed unit 580 including a solenoid 585 and the like and a discharge mechanism (ball removal member 583) is disposed. 3, the ball feeding member 584 and the hitting ball launching device 650 are brought as close as possible, and when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341, the ball feeding member 584 side It is possible to reduce the number of game balls remaining in the game as much as possible, and to prevent the player from feeling lost and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 provided with the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game ball can be thrown in. It is possible to prevent the game balls in the upper plate 301 from disappearing early or the game balls in the upper plate 301 from being filled up early due to the operation. It is possible to reduce the player's feeling of annoyance and suppress the interest, and the dish unit 300 can be downsized while maintaining the capacity of the upper dish 301, so that the game The area 1100 can be enlarged (widened) to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention.

  Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided with the ball feed member 583, the ball feed member 580 is simply attached to the ball feed member 580 as compared with the ball feed member 584 and the ball feed member 583 separately. 584 and the ball punching member 583 can be attached, the labor involved in the assembly can be simplified, the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, and a defect occurs in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball punching member 583. Even so, the problem can be easily solved by replacing the ball feeding unit 580.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper plate ball is compared with the ball feeding unit 580 provided on the main body frame 3 side. There is no need to configure the transmission mechanism (the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340) that transmits the operation of the removal button 341 to the ball removal member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 so as to straddle the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 that can be opened and closed. The configuration related to the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (when the door frame 5 is opened, as compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side). By shutting off the upper bowl removing mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid the possibility that the transmission mechanism will be consumed at an early stage, causing malfunction or damage, and reliability for the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feeding unit 580, etc. And durability can be increased.

  Further, since the upper plate ball removal button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 or the upper plate 301 only by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 341 downward. Can be stopped, and the player can easily perform the ball removal operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removal button 341.

  In addition, the partition 583a of the ball removal member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 that slides in the vertical direction according to the operation of the upper plate ball removal button 341, and the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is moved. At the same time, the partition portion 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 and the partition portion 583a can be made as small as possible. The unit 580 can be reduced in size, and the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is urged upward, and the partition portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 communicates the entrance 581a and the hit ball supply port 582a when the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is in the raised position. Therefore, even if the game ball from the upper plate 301 vigorously comes into contact with the partition portion 583a, the impact can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removal slider 343, and the partition portion 583a (ball removal member) 583) can be improved. Further, since the impact applied to the partition portion 583a can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper dish ball removal slider 343, it is possible to make it difficult to repel even when the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing problems.

  In addition, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, the movement of the partition portion 583a when a load of a game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a is compared with the case where the partition portion 583a is slid. The friction loss can be reduced, and the operability can be improved by lightening the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341, and the moving range of the partitioning portion 583a can be reduced in the planar projection. The effect of this can be achieved.

  In addition, since the partition portion 583a is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other, the partition portion Rotating due to its own weight, the entrance and the discharge port are in communication with each other, and the game medium in the storage tray is sent to the feed mechanism (input device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since it will be discharged to the player side without being played, the player can be made aware that there is a problem with the pachinko machine 1 and moved to a pachinko machine 1 with no problems. It can suppress that it falls.

  Furthermore, since the ball removing member 583 is rotated via the rotating hook part 583b bent, the rotating hook part bent when the game ball collides with the divider 583a. It is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotating shaft by dispersing it by 583b or by absorbing it by bending of the rotating collar portion 583b, and to improve the durability of the ball removing member 583. Can be increased.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged directly below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged, the right and left of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580 are The movement of the direction can be minimized, and the game ball can be discharged well by improving the passage of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580. Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game balls in the ball feed unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feed unit 580 can serve as a discharge mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, the ball feeding unit 580 can be prevented from being unnecessarily enlarged.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 of the left and right decoration units 200, 240 in the door frame 5 are provided outside the transparent game window 101 that closes the front surface of the game area 1100. The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged radially, and the LEDs 214a, 216a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 arranged in a substantially concentric manner divided in the circumferential direction by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b. , 254a, 256a, so that the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are caused to emit light according to the gaming state, so that the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 is It is possible to decorate the light in multiple rings, this Also do not like the light-emitting decoration that was seen in the pachinko machine can show the player, can be a pachinko machine 1 is strongly attracted the interest of the player in.

  Further, the annular first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 constituted by the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, and 256 in the door frame 5 are arranged substantially concentrically (FIG. 60). So that the light converges toward the gaming window 101, that is, the gaming area 1100 by emitting light in the order of the second annular group 103 and the first annular group 102 from the outside to the inside. And can make the player's interest to the gaming area 1100, and can make it seem that there is something good in the gaming area 1100, which increases the expectation of the game. It can suppress that interest falls. Furthermore, by emitting light in the order of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 from the inside to the outside, it is possible to perform a light-emitting effect that spreads outward from the game window 101, that is, the game area 1100. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that there is something good for the light-emitting effect spreading to the player, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Furthermore, since the above-described light-emitting effects can be performed outside the game window 101 (game area 1100), not only a player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 but also the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The player in the game hall can also show the above-mentioned light-emitting effects, attract the interest of other players, and make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play. Can do.

  In addition, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104 that are radially arranged so as to divide the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 that extend in the circumferential direction in the circumferential direction. Since it is possible to divide the annular luminous decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction by causing these radial groups 104 to emit light, it is possible to add an accent to the luminous decoration, The player's interest can be strongly attracted by changes in the light-emitting decoration. Further, the radial groups 104 arranged in a radial direction cause the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to correspond to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 in the circumferential direction. Since the LEDs 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j are divided, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a corresponding to the respective peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a are caused to emit light independently for each of the systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j. Thus, it is possible to perform a light emission effect in which light moves in the circumferential direction. By providing a variety of light emission effects, the pachinko machine 1 that does not get tired can be obtained.

  Further, the side lenses 210 and 250 are provided with peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a corresponding to the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a and 256a, and radiation lens portions 210b and 250b corresponding to the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b and 256b. Compared with the case where the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b are included in the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and integrated, the appearance of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be changed, so Even when the lighting decoration is not performed, the design of the appearance of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained. Even if the side lenses 210 and 250 are divided into the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b, the annularly arranged LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a and the radially arranged LEDs 214b and 216b are arranged. , 254b, and 256b in the same light emission mode, it is possible to make an illusion that the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b are integrated, and the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 is integrated. Thus, the light emitting decoration can be performed in a ring shape, and the above-described effects can be sufficiently achieved.

  Further, the LEDs 214a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 that are partitioned in the circumferential direction by LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b arranged radially on one peripheral lens portion 210a and 250a in the side lenses 210 and 250. , 216a, 254a, and 256a, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a corresponding to the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are caused to emit light even if the appearance is single. Therefore, it is possible to make the light emission decoration substantially concentrically, so that it is difficult to imagine the aspect of the light emission decoration from the appearance, the change of the side lenses 210 and 250 due to the light emission decoration can be increased, and the light emission Increase the impact of decoration and attract players' attention It can be pachinko machine 1 to be kicked.

  Furthermore, the side inner lenses 212, 250 irradiate the side lenses 210, 250 by diffusing light from the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 between the side lenses 210, 250 and the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256. 252 is provided, so that unevenness in the light emitting decoration of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be suppressed, the appearance of the light emitting decoration can be improved, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, Even if 254a and 256a are used, the side lenses 210 and 250 can be decorated with light emission in a planar shape, so that a light emitting body that emits light in a linear shape (for example, a cold cathode tube (fluorescent tube), a neon tube, an organic EL, etc.) Compared to the case of using the first annular group 1 by causing each LED 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a to emit light individually. 2 and the second annular group 103 can also change the light emission in the circumferential direction, can present more various light emission effects, and suppress the decrease in the interest of the player due to difficulty in getting bored. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's attention.

  Further, since the light can be diffused by the side inner lenses 212 and 252, even if the transparency of the side lenses 210 and 250 is increased, the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 is caused by random refraction in the side inner lenses 212 and 252. The decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 placed on the player can be hard to see, and the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, etc. can be seen directly from the player side and prevent the appearance from deteriorating. Can do.

  Furthermore, the light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b is guided by the light guide portions 212b and 252b of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 to irradiate the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250. The light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b can be reliably guided to the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b to be decorated with light emission, so that the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-described effects can be realized. Further, the light guide portions 212b and 252b of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 ensure the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 even if the distance between the side lenses 210 and 250 and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b is long. Since the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 irradiate the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 widely with the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, it is sufficient between the side lenses 210 and 250. The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b arranged radially can be mounted on the same substrate as the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a that secure the space, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified.

  Further, the side decorative frames 202 and 242 surround the outer periphery of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250, so that the light from the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a is emitted from the radiating lens. It is possible to reduce as much as possible that the light from the portions 210b and 250b or the light from the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b affects the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a, and the light emitting decorations interfere with each other. It is possible to prevent the appearance of the light emission.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420, Since the strength of the unit 400 can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if a player or the like strikes the operation units 401 and 405 strongly. Can be operated freely, the operability of the operation units 401 and 405 can be improved, and the entertainment using the operation units 401 and 405 can be enjoyed to prevent the player's interest in games from being reduced. can do.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401. If the pressing operation unit 405 is struck strongly, the dial operation unit 401 is also struck, The force of hitting 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and it is possible to prevent the hitting impact from being concentrated and prevent the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 from being damaged. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 can be made to withstand strong hits, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to improve the operability of 405 and to entertain the performance using the operation units 401 and 405 and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. Door can be.

  Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As shown, when the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300 and the operation parts 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to give an impact or a load is applied, Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the cover body 426 can absorb an impact and a load by elastic deformation, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 is connected to the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, an impact is caused by the bottom of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (the dish unit 300). Since the load can be received, the impacts from the operation units 401 and 405 can be dispersed to avoid the concentration of the impacts, and the impact resistance and load resistance by the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 can be reduced. Can be increased.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of legs 420e protruding downward from positions where the operation parts 401 and 405 are supported, and the legs 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the dish unit 300. Even when the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 is applied to the base member 420 by contacting the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the leg portions 420e are not arranged immediately below the impact, so the operation portions 401 and 405 in the base member 420 are not provided. The portion that supports the base plate is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed), so that the shock from the operation units 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300. It is possible to reduce the impact and prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from below so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps the base member 420 in plan view. Even when the operation unit holding member 416 that holds the dial operation unit 401 moves away from the base member 420 when the operation unit 401 is struck from the upper side, the dial operation unit 401 comes into contact with the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 and can satisfactorily prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

  Furthermore, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 disposed at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the gaming state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotation drive including vibration). Thus, the player can be surprised and attention can be paid to the effects produced by the operation units 401 and 405, the player can be entertained, and the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414, thereby enabling the dial operation unit It is possible to make the production using 401 (press operation unit 405) more diverse and less tired, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in games from being lowered.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, and the position of the rotation axis of the dial drive motor 414 is, as a matter of course, the dial operation unit 401 (driven gear). 410), even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, the impact is transmitted via the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401. Direct dial drive motor 414 can be avoided and damage to dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) can be prevented.

  Furthermore, since the opening 420a of the base member 420 has a smaller diameter than the dial operation unit 401, the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can abut on the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 becomes the base member. It is possible to reliably prevent a drop from 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation portion holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and load from the operation.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotating the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 is driven. Although the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player despite being driven by the rotation, even if the amount of heat generated due to excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 increases, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated and radiated satisfactorily through the base member 420, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive means 414 from being defective due to overheating. That can withstand high loads. Can be sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial driving means 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a press detection sensor 432c for detecting the press of the press operation unit 405 are provided, and the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 are provided. Rotation operation and pressing operation can be detected, so that it is possible to produce an effect according to the player's operation based on the detection signal, and it is more effective for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide an experience with a bodily sensation, and to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the player entertained. In addition, a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 for decorating the operation parts 401 and 405 are provided, and the operation parts 401 and 405 can be decorated with light emission, so that the operation parts 401 and 405 emit light. Thus, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine that is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 100 Door frame base unit 101 Game window 300 Dish unit 301 Upper plate (storage plate)
302 Lower plate 500 Handle device (driving operation unit)
504 Rotating handle body rear 506 Rotating handle body front (driving operation part)
600 Main body frame base 601 Game board holding port (game board holding part)
650 Hitting ball launcher (striking launcher)
652 Launch Base 654 Launch Solenoid 656 Hit Ball 800 Board Unit 830 Launch Power Board Box 831 Launch Power Board (Characteristic Determining Unit)
831a DC / DC converter SC0 Electrolytic capacitor (characteristic determination unit)
851 Power supply board 1100 Game area 4000 Main board 4100 Main control board 4110 Discharge control board 4120 Fire control unit 4120d Fire solenoid drive circuit

Even with such a conventional gaming machine , there is a concern that the gaming interest will be lowered.

Means 1: A gaming machine for performing a game using a game medium,
Determination means for performing determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
When the special results were obtained similar determine constant by the previous SL-size constant means, and profits providing means for providing a benefit to the player,
Operation means having an operation receiving portion operable by a player;
Effect display means for performing a display effect in a predetermined display area;
Effect control means capable of executing control to cause any one of a plurality of effect modes having different hit expectation degrees to appear in the predetermined display area based on a result of determination by the determination means ;
With
The production control means includes
A low-expectation production means for causing a low-expected production mode with a low expectation degree among the plurality of production modes to appear in the predetermined display area;
A high-expectation production means for causing a high-expected production mode having a high expectation degree among the plurality of production modes to appear in the predetermined display area;
An operation promotion control means capable of executing control for prompting an operation to the operation receiving portion when the low expectation effect mode or the high expectation effect mode appears in the predetermined display area; and
When a low-expected production mode with a low expectation degree appears in the predetermined display area and the operation promotion control means prompts an operation on the operation receiving unit, a person who has performed an operation on the operation receiving unit Expectation degree gap effect control means capable of executing a control related to an expectation degree gap effect that gives a gap between a perceived expectation degree that can be recognized and a hit expectation degree that can be recognized only by a person who is viewing the display effect. Have
The expectation gap effect control means includes:
The feel when the operation receiving unit is operated is different in the production situation in which the low expectation degree can be recognized externally by the low-expected production mode appearing in the predetermined display area. When the predetermined driving force is generated at a predetermined appearance probability and the predetermined driving force is generated, the predetermined display is performed even though the low-expected effect mode appears in the predetermined display area. It is made possible to recognize that it is a higher expectation degree than the high expectation effect mode that does not appear in the area,
The gaming machine further includes
The gap due to the expectation gap effect is generated when the operation promotion control means performs the control for prompting the operation receiving unit but the operation receiving unit is not operated for a predetermined time. A gaming machine that is controlled so that the performance is progressed without being present .

Claims (3)

  1. A start opening where a game ball can enter,
    A hit determination means for performing a determination process for a hit based on the game ball entering the start opening;
    Special game execution means for executing a special game capable of giving a prize to a player based on winning in the determination processing by the hit determination means;
    An operation means having an operation receiving portion formed so as to be operable by a player;
    Effect display means for performing a display effect in a predetermined display area;
    Based on the fact that an operation opportunity for the operation receiving unit is given to the player when the display effect is being executed by the effect display means, and the operation receiving unit is operated at this operation opportunity, the display effect is provided. Production control means capable of executing an operation system production that causes a change in
    The production control means includes
    An operation opportunity for the operation receiving portion is given to the player while a predetermined driving force is not generated with respect to the operation receiving portion, and the player operates the operation receiving portion at the normal operation opportunity. A normal operation system effect control means capable of executing an operation system effect that causes a change in the display effect, and a feeling of operation when a player operates the operation receiver is the normal operation opportunity. Unlike a case, given a predetermined movement in the operation receiving portion by a predetermined driving force, the player is given an opportunity to operate the operation receiving portion. A special operation system effect control means capable of executing an operation system effect that causes a change in the display effect when a player performs an operation on the operation receiving unit;
    The operation receiver is
    It is possible to receive an operation by a player in a manner that resists the predetermined driving force when the predetermined movement appears due to the predetermined driving force, and that resists the predetermined driving force. When the player receives an operation in the game machine, the predetermined movement in the operation receiving unit can be stopped.
  2. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
    A gaming machine further comprising a lamp device that performs a predetermined light emission effect.
  3. In the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
    A gaming machine further comprising a speaker device that performs a predetermined sound effect.
JP2015093976A 2015-05-01 2015-05-01 Game machine Active JP5963909B2 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2015093976A JP5963909B2 (en) 2015-05-01 2015-05-01 Game machine

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2015093976A JP5963909B2 (en) 2015-05-01 2015-05-01 Game machine

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
JP2010210177 Division 2010-09-17

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
JP2015134275A